JPS5886529A - Shutter speed selecting circuit of camera - Google Patents

Abstract

PURPOSE:To perform invariably adequate flash photographing by generating a shutter control signal according to a mode signal from a strobe device. CONSTITUTION:A strobe unit 342 controlled by a photographic film speed setting dial 106, aperture setting dial 108, etc., applies a charging completion signal to a current circuit 346 according to the charging of a main capacitor. Then, the circuit 346 is driven by a changeover switch 146 changing in state according to a mode signal for indicating whether a strobe device is in full-automatic mode or semi-automatic mode to generate a signal CS which controls a shutter speed to 1/60 second only when either a 1/60sec shutter speed in full-automatic mode of a >=1/60sec shutter speed in semi-automatic mode is selected. Therefore, invariably adequate flash photographing is performed without any deficiency in exposure due to rear light at a window even when flash duration is short.

Description

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to a shutter speed selection circuit for selecting a shutter speed for a hook V camera of a camera, a 4IK camera.

In addition, when using a camera with a focal plane shutter, the exposure time of the electronic flash device (hereinafter referred to as a strobe) is very short, so the shutter speed set is the strobe synchronized shutter speed or slower. Must be shutter speed.

Conventionally, such a shutter speed has been manually set, but in such cases, the setting may sometimes be forgotten, and proper photographs may not be taken.

Therefore, if a signal is applied from the autoflash control side to the camera side to automatically set the shutter speed during flash photography to the strobe synchronized shutter speed, for example, 1/60 second or 1/90 second, it will always be possible to keep the shutter speed at the appropriate speed. A system was proposed that enabled flash photography.

However, this method has the disadvantage that a backlit subject located next to a window will be underexposed because the light adjustment operation by the auto-adjustable strobe responds to the intensity of light from the window.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a shutter speed selection circuit for flash photography that can overcome the drawbacks of the conventional devices described above.

Note that the description related to the present invention is mainly shown in FIG.

Figure 70(e) Sequence K 198 related to these Figures
Jl [~No. 202) j, pages 162 to 164, but in order to facilitate the Jl explanation, the following detailed explanation of the invention IN is provided.
Now, explanations related to drawings other than FIG. 70(e) will also be explained in detail.

Hereinafter, the camera system of the present invention will be explained in more detail with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 is a six-sided view of a camera device to which a camera system according to an embodiment of the present invention is applied; FIG. 1(a) is a front view, FIG. 1(b) is a top view, and FIG. ) is the bottom view, and the same figure (d
) shows a right side view, (e) a left side view, and (f) a rear view.

The camera device having the configuration shown in the figure is a single-lens reflex camera equipped with a dual-priority automatic exposure control mechanism based on the TTL photometry method 2', and its components are arranged with particular emphasis on its operability.

This camera device is composed of a lens device 2 which is an optical system and a body 4 which is a main body system, and various combinations of different types of lens devices and main body systems are possible.
It is the same as the conventional single-lens 7-lens camera in that it enables wide-ranging photography.

The lens device 2 includes a distance adjustment ring 6 and an aperture adjustment ring 8, and is attached to the body 4 by a tightening ring 1o. Note that this lens device 2 can change the imaging position of the subject using the distance adjustment ring 6, that is, it can perform focusing operations, and can also preset the aperture value using the aperture adjustment ring (8). You can preset the aperture value using the aperture adjustment ring 8.
Accordingly, this refers to aligning the aperture value display 9 displayed on the circumference 1 with the index 7 attached to the lens barrel of the lens device 2, and in fact, in this state, the lens device 2 is in an open state.

In this manner, the preset aperture value is obtained by narrowing down the aperture blades of the lens device 2 to the preset position using the driving force from the body 4 during exposure after shutter release. However, as a general rule, this camera device focuses on operability on automatic exposure control, so the aperture adjustment ring 8 should be adjusted so that the mark 12 on its circumference is aligned with the index 7. It is constructed so that the aperture value can be preset from the body 4 side, and this mechanism performs the central function when controlling the aperture in this camera device. Further, the lens device 2 includes a mechanism for transmitting a forecast regarding the maximum aperture value, etc. to the body 4 side. This mechanism is an important mechanism for the arithmetic unit incorporated in the body 4 to take in information necessary for performing arithmetic operations for exposure control.

The body 4 basically constitutes a dark box for forming the subject image introduced by the lens device 2 on the film surface, and the film is a 35 mm roll film in a cartridge. The exposed surface is replaced by winding the roll film one frame at a time onto a winding spool. The shutter is a two-curtain running focal plane shutter placed on the side of the lens device 2 on the exposed surface of the film.
The running force of the curtain is controlled by a charged spring force, and the running timing of the two curtains, ie, running start control, is performed by electrical means. The body 4 has a built-in finder mechanism centered around a quick return mirror and a pentaprism section 11, and allows for framing, operations, etc. before shooting through the finder window 13.
The finder mechanism configured to perform focusing operations is exactly the same as the finder mechanism of a well-known single-lens reflex camera. However, the difference, which will be described in detail later, is that most of the information necessary for photographing can be obtained from the finder window 13, and this is one of the characteristics of this camera device. Furthermore, this finder mechanism is equipped with a TTL photometry function that measures the brightness of the subject light introduced through the lens device 2, and the subject brightness information (apex value) necessary for calculation for automatic exposure control is added. : BV).

A winding lever 14 is provided on the top surface of the body 4, which works in conjunction with the film winding spool to wind up the film by one frame, and to charge springs to move the mechanical parts necessary for release. It will be done. The number of frames of the film wound by the winding lever 14 is displayed on a film counter 15. The button 16 provided at the center of rotation of the winding lever 14 is a multiple exposure button.If you operate the winding lever 14 while holding down this button 16, only the necessary mechanical parts will be charged and the film will be wound. is not carried out. Furthermore, the function attached to this winding lever 14 is to act as a power switch for the electrical function section within the camera device, and the power is turned on by pulling it out slightly in the direction of arrow α. This function is effective in preventing forgetting to turn off the power, especially for camera devices that have an automatic exposure control mechanism that consumes a lot of battery power and has a high possibility of causing serious malfunctions due to battery consumption. be.

18 is a shutter release button, which is arranged on the top surface of the body 4 so that it can be pressed with the index finger of the right hand when the body 4 is held with both hands, just like in conventional cameras. -Various operations required after the data release will begin. Incidentally, the hole 20 provided in the center of the shutter release button 18
is the insertion hole for the cable release or air release. Near the shutter release button 180 is a selector lever 22 configured to select various functions by rotating around the button 18.
are arranged. This selector lever 22 can be operated with the same finger that operates the shutter release button 18, that is, the index finger of the right hand holding the body 4.

Now, when the selector lever 22 is rotated to the position where the mark 24 is selected, the 7' release button 18 is locked and cannot be pressed. This locked state occurs when mark 24 is selected after shutter release button 18 is pressed.
This also applies when the button 18 is pressed and held, allowing long exposures when the shutter speed is selected at the lubricant position, i.e.
The selection of mark 24 by this selector lever 22 is as follows:
This is applied to achieve two functions: to prevent the shutter release button 18 from being pressed down due to erroneous operation, and to enable long-time exposure.

Furthermore, when the selector lever 22 is aligned with the position where the mark 26 is selected, the AE (Automatic-E
xp□5ure) becomes locked. In this AE lock state, during automatic exposure control operation, the exposure amount (combination of aperture and shutter speed) obtained as a result of photometry and calculation is maintained at the amount immediately before the mark 26 was selected. The amount of exposure is held fixed, and even if there is a change in the amount of photometry thereafter, the amount of exposure is fixed, and when exposure is actually performed, the amount of exposure that is fixed is followed. This function can be applied extremely effectively, especially when photographing subjects with large brightness differences, and when the actual frame to be photographed is different from the frame in which only the subject brightness related to photometry is desired, and the automatic exposure control amount function is used. This is an absolutely necessary function for cameras equipped with this function. This AE lock mechanism may include a mechanical ramp mechanism or an electrical processing mechanism, but
An electrical processing mechanism will be applied to this camera device. Note that the lever 22 that selects the mark 26 automatically returns to its original position as the shutter release button 18 returns after being depressed. Incidentally, this does not apply if an external force is applied that prevents the lever 22 from returning.

Further, when the selector lever 22 is set at a position where the mark 28 is selected, the self-timer is set. In this camera device, unlike conventional cameras, the self-timer is equipped with a mechanism to electrically count time, and when the self-timer is set, the shutter release button When 18 is pressed, the series of actions accompanying shutter, ivy, and release are as follows:
It is controlled by an electrical signal that is emitted after a predetermined period of time. Note that during the period when the self-timer is operating, the selector lever 22 is placed on the top surface of the body 4.
When the self-timer is in its home position, a light emitting diode (LED) lamp 32 hidden beneath it flashes to indicate that the self-timer is operating. Furthermore, Se.

If the selector lever 22 is returned to its original position while the luer timer is operating, the self-timer setting is canceled, and the shutter release button 18 can then be used for normal shutter release. Furthermore, since the self-timer mechanism in this camera is not released even after the shutter release operation is performed, self-timer photography can be repeated without having to set the self-timer again. As will be described later, this function, in combination with a motor drive device, enables automatic photographing at timed intervals, and is extremely useful.

When the selector lever 22 is set at a position where the mark 30 is selected, a battery check state is entered. If the LED lamp 32 blinks during this battery check state, it indicates that the power battery has sufficient voltage, and if it remains off, the voltage of the power battery has decreased, and the camera device Informs you that the electrical function cannot operate satisfactorily. Note that when the selector lever 22 selects the position of the mark 30, a return force toward the position of the mark 28 is constantly applied by the biasing force of the spring, and the selector lever 22 selects the position of the mark 30.
After checking 5 times, when you release your finger, it returns to the position of mark 28. This function is to prevent not only the camera device from functioning properly if you forget to return the Renoku-22 after checking the battery, but also to prevent unnecessary power consumption from being caused by the blinking LED lamp 32. It is.

34 is a dial for setting the aperture value or footer degree in the exposure information, and the setting value is displayed on the display window 3.
6. It has been stated repeatedly that this camera device is equipped with an automatic exposure control mechanism, but it does not adopt only one of the aperture priority and shutter speed priority systems, but rather selectively uses both systems. This method uses a so-called dual priority method. Therefore, there are two modes to choose from: aperture priority mode, which automatically calculates and controls the shutter speed by setting the aperture value, and shutter speed priority mode, which automatically calculates and controls the aperture value by setting the shutter speed. However, (1) mentioned above,
As is clear from equation (2), whether the aperture is selected preferentially or the shutter speed is preferentially selected, the handling in performing calculations is exactly the same, and therefore, one dial 34, a desired amount corresponding to the aperture value or shutter speed is set. Here, whether the amount set on the dial 34 is an aperture value or a shutter speed is specified by switching the mode changeover switch 38. Note that depending on the switching of the mode changeover switch 38, the content of the numerical value displayed on the display window 36 is changed. That is, when the mode changeover switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode, the aperture value is displayed on the display window 36, and when the mode selection switch 38 is switched to the shutter speed priority mode, the shutter speed is displayed on the display window 36. is displayed. This mechanism is a simple one that selectively fires one of the aperture value and shutter speed that are displayed in parallel.

40 is an ASA sensitivity setting dial for setting the ASA sensitivity of the film to be used.

This dial 40 can be rotated by slightly lifting it with a finger in the direction of the arrow β, and when the finger is released after setting the film sensitivity, the dial 40 returns to the opposite direction of the arrow β by the biasing force of the spring and the set position is fixed. .

This is a mechanism provided to prevent the dial 40 from rotating inadvertently during photographing.

42 moves the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 when performing automatic exposure control and wants to take a photo with an overexposure or underexposure amount relative to the appropriate exposure amount,
This is a scale that serves as an index for obtaining excessive or insufficient exposure by changing the set film sensitivity relative to the actual film sensitivity. This is the relational expression (1) listed earlier.
, As is clear from (2), if the set film sensitivity is changed with respect to the actual film sensitivity, the calculation result is
Focusing on the fact that the exposure amount that is considered appropriate and calculated is either excessive or insufficient for the film actually used by the change made to the set film sensitivity, special changes are made to the calculation circuit or its calculation routine. It allows you to easily take photos with overexposure or underexposure without adding
It can be said that this is an extremely effective method.

Reference numeral 44 denotes a filter rewind knob, which houses a rewind lever 46, and the film that is being exposed while being wound up one frame at a time by the winding lever 14 is rotated by the rotation of this knob. Then, Bato is rehoused inside Rhone. To rewind the film, press the rewind button 48 provided on the bottom of the body 4 to release the film winding mechanism from the film winding lever 14, and then press the rewind lever from the film rewind knob 44. 46 and rotate it in the direction of arrow γ. This film rewinding process is well known.

This camera device is provided with an accessory shoe 50 like a general camera.

Of course, the main purpose is to attach a strobe or a light emitting device for flash photography, but as will be detailed later, the strobe included in the camera system of the present invention is
It works closely with this camera device. Further, an adapter for external photometry included in the camera system of the present invention can be connected to this accessory shoe 50.

In addition to the synchronization contact 52, the accessory shoe 50 includes a control terminal 54 for receiving control information from a strobe, an external photometry adapter, etc., a data terminal 56 for receiving data, and an AE lock terminal 58. Several levels of level signals are input from the control terminal 54, each indicating different modes of operation to the camera, and from the data terminal 56, the aperture value set on the strobe and the subject measured by an external metering adapter are input. Data regarding brightness is input as an analog value.

The strobe and external metering adapter will be explained in detail later.

60 is an eyepiece shutter lever.

The eyepiece shutter is provided to shield the viewfinder window 13 from light, and when you take your eyes off the viewfinder window 13, especially when using the self-timer, the light entering through the viewfinder window 13 will expose the film surface. This is to prevent errors caused by light entering the finder window 13 from being added to subject brightness information, which is a prerequisite for automatic exposure control. By operating the shutter lever 6o in the direction of arrow C, the finder window is closed. This mechanism is definitely required for cameras with TTL photometry function.

Reference numeral 62 denotes an X contact, which has exactly the same function as a lever provided in a general camera, and constitutes a synchronization contact (7) when photographing using a strobe or flash.

Reference numeral 64 denotes an aperture tightening lever, and when pushed in the direction of arrow δ, the lens device 2 is narrowed down. Now, if the aperture value is preset by the aperture adjustment ring 8 of the lens device 2, the lens device 2 will be stopped down to the preset position by operating the aperture lever 64, and the aperture adjustment ring 8 will be marked on the aperture adjustment ring 8. 12 is set to the index 7, the operation of the aperture lever 64 is restricted. Note that it is possible to align the mark 12 on the aperture adjustment ring 8 with the index 7 while the aperture lever 64 is operated to the aperture position, but this is considered an erroneous operation and the viewfinder 1
A warning will be issued within 3 days. The relationship between the state of the aperture adjustment ring 8 of the lens device 2 and the state of the aperture adjustment lever 64 and mode changeover switch 38 of the body 4 will be described in detail later. This aperture lever 64 is locked when operated in the aperture position, but this lock is released by pressing the release button 66, and the lens (-
64 returns to the original position.

A screw hole 68 for fixing a tripod is provided on the bottom of this camera device, but this screw hole 68 can also be used for mounting a motor drive device. In addition, the motor
When installing the drive device, remove the lid 70 at the bottom of the shaft of the winding lever 14.
The shaft of No. 4 and the winding shaft of the motor drive device are fitted to form a mechanical connection. When the motor drive device is installed, a control signal is applied to the motor drive device through the contact device 72 on the bottom surface of the body 4. This motor
The drive device will be explained in detail later, but the motor and
After the shutter is released and all camera operations associated with the shutter release are completed, the drive device uses the driving force of the motor to replace the film winding lever 14.
It has the function of advancing the film and charging other necessary parts, making it possible to perform continuous shutter release and making it easier for the photographer to capture the desired shutter opportunity. This is an extremely useful function, apart from the volume and weight of the motor and its driving power source.

When the film rewinding knob 44 is pulled up, the back covers 7, 4 on the back of the body 4 open, allowing the film in the cartridge to be refilled.

By opening the back cover 74, the film counter 15 on the top surface of the body 4 is reset and returns to the original indicated position.
Ru.

Although the configuration of each part of this camera device has been briefly explained above, it is important to note that specific information about the lens device 2 and the body 4 has been omitted, or the lens device 2 from the body 4 side has been explained briefly.
, the relationship between the operation of the strobe 7 or external photometry adapter attached to the accessory shoe 50 and the camera device, the relationship between the operation of the motor drive device attached to the bottom of the body 4 and the camera device, and the viewfinder 13.
Since the relationship between the information or data display and the operation and operation of the camera device is insufficient, a more detailed explanation will be given below.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view for explaining the case where the lens device 2 and the body 4 of the first illustrated camera device are separated, and the lens device 2 is moved relative to the body 4 as shown by the arrow λ and assembled. The body 4 includes a mount ring 76 on the mounting surface of the lens device 2, and the mount ring 76 has three independent flanges 78A, 78B, and 78C protruding from its outer peripheral end. This mount ring 76 is firmly fixed to the body 4 in parallel to a plane perpendicular to the optical axis, that is, parallel to the film plane, so as to surround the optical path. This is because the mount ring 76 is the only member that connects the camera body 4 to the camera body 4, and any deviation in mounting accuracy or aging will definitely have a negative effect on the subject image formed on the film surface. It depends on On the other hand, a tightening ring 10 is rotatably provided on the lens device 2 side, and this tightening ring 10 moves the lens device 2 in the direction of the arrow λ in the illustrated state.
When combined with the body 4, the flange 78 of the mount ring 76
Notch 80 through which each of A, 78B, and 78C can pass.
A, 80B, and 80C, the mount ring 7
6, each collar portion 78A, 78B.

78C and corresponding notches 80A and 80B.

80C, by rotating the tightening ring 10 in the direction of arrow φ, each of the flanges 78A, 78B, 78
C is the non-notched portion 82A, 82B, 82C of the tightening ring 10.
It is configured such that the lens device 2 is rotated around the body 4 by being engaged with the lens device 2.

The side where the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 is provided with various mechanisms for information exchange or control with the body 4.

! Reference numeral 84 denotes a lever associated with the number of nine aperture stages from the open position of the lens device 2, and is disposed movably in the directions of arrows ψ and φ along the annular hole 86. This lever 84 is biased in the direction of the arrow φ by a strong spring, but the lens device 2 is not attached to the body 4 and the tightening ring 10 is in a ready state as shown in the figure. When it is in the annular hole 86, it is held in a state of being moved in the direction of the arrow φ.

This state is released by rotating the tightening ring 10 in the direction of the arrow φ in order to attach the lens device 2 to the body 4. At this time, the lever 84 moves in the direction of the arrow φ due to the biasing force of the spring, but when it reaches a certain position, its movement is restricted. This certain position is the lens device 2
This corresponds to the number of aperture steps from the open position for the preset aperture value, and the closer to the direction of the arrow ψ, the smaller the number of aperture steps, and the closer to the direction of the arrow φ, the larger the number of aperture steps. It is. As mentioned above, the lens mounting device 2 can preset the aperture value using the aperture setting ring 8, and the movement restriction position of the lever 84 changes depending on the preset aperture value. Therefore, the lever 84 also moves accordingly, and therefore, depending on the position of this lever 84, the number of stops from the open aperture to the □preset aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 is transmitted to the body 4 side. has the potential to The reason I say "possibility" here is that the main focus of the camera device applied in this example is to perform automatic exposure control, and as will be explained in detail later, the aperture value from the body side of the camera device is This is because it is not necessary to specifically detect the position of the lever 84 to detect the number of aperture stages preset by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2.

When the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7, the lever 84 is always moved to the position corresponding to the maximum aperture stage number of the lens device, that is, in the annular hole 86 by the biasing force of the spring. It is in a state where it moves all at once in the direction of the arrow φ.

Incidentally, no matter where the lever 84 is restricted from moving in the φ direction according to the spring biasing force, it cannot be moved in the direction of the smaller number of aperture stages, that is, in the arrow ψ direction, against the spring biasing force. is possible. That is, lever 8
4 to a desired position against the biasing force of the spring, a desired aperture value can be set without depending on the aperture setting ring 8. This characteristic can be applied to a so-called servo-type AE camera that automatically controls the aperture value by controlling the position of this lever 84 with a servo motor.
Although this method has been implemented, it has drawbacks such as slow response, so this embodiment uses a different method to take advantage of this characteristic.

Now, what is indicated by 88 is the aperture lever, and this aperture lever 88 has the aperture widest position in the direction of the arrow Ω.
That is, it corresponds to the large diameter side and is always urged in this direction by a spring. Further, since the direction of arrow ν corresponds to the narrowing position of the lens, that is, the small diameter side, the lens device 2 is opened by moving the narrowing lever 88 in the direction of arrow ν against the biasing force of the spring. The aperture is narrowed down by the number of aperture stages corresponding to the position of the lever 84.

Further, reference numeral 90 denotes an open bottle having a protruding amount corresponding to the open aperture value of the lens device 2, and is used to transmit the open aperture value of the lens device 2 to the body 4. This open pin 90 is important in performing various corrections for calculating accurate subject brightness information in exposure calculation based on subject brightness information by TTL photometry.

Further, numeral 91 indicates a minimum aperture pin having a protrusion amount corresponding to the maximum aperture value of this lens device 2, that is, the minimum aperture i, and is used to transmit the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 to the pocket 4. It will be done. This minimum diameter pin 91 is used to detect the limit of the aperture of the controllable lens device 2 during exposure control.

92 is an AE pin that protrudes when the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7, and indicates that the aperture value is not preset on the lens device 2 side.
This is a boiler set up to transmit information to the other side.

On the other hand, the body side is provided with mechanisms that cooperate with various mechanisms of the lens device 2 as described above.

94 is an AE that operates by bringing its surface on the arrow θ side into contact with the surface on the arrow φ side of the lever 84 provided on the lens device 2.
The lever is always biased in the direction of arrow θ with a weak spring force. The spring that biases the lever 94 in the direction of the arrow δ is extremely weak compared to the force that biases the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side in the direction of the arrow φ, so that the force that tends to move the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ I can't resist it. Therefore, this AE lever 94 is always urged in the σ direction by the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side. When the winding lever 14 is operated, the AE lever 94 moves in the direction of the arrow θ together with the lever 84 and against the biasing force thereof, and is locked at the position shown. This lock is released when the shutter is released, and as a result of the release of the lock, the AE lever 94 naturally moves in the direction of the arrow σ due to the biasing force of the lever 84. The body 4 is equipped with a mechanism that clamps the AE lever 94 at an appropriate position based on the control aperture υ value set by the dial 34 or obtained as a result of calculation. When operated, the AE lever 94 stops at the clamp position. Therefore, naturally, the lever 84 is also restricted from moving in the direction of the arrow φ at a position corresponding to the clamp position of the AE lever 94, and the number of aperture stages is preset. That is, the clamp position of the AE lever 94 is extremely important in determining the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2, and therefore a highly accurate mechanism is required for detecting the clamp position. Such a mechanism converts the amount of movement of the AE Reno (-94 in the direction of the arrow σ from the lock position as a reference) into pulses, and counts the number of pulses in correspondence with the number of aperture stages. Due to its structure, if you want to narrow down the lens by pushing the diaphragm 9-closing lever 64 provided on the body 4 in the direction of the arrow δ, the reference of the AE lever 94 is applied. The lock at the position or the clamp at the desired position is released and the AE Leno (-9
4 will run in the direction of the arrow σ depending on the biasing force of the lever 84. At this time, if the aperture value has been selected and set with the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, the lever 84 is restricted from moving at a position corresponding to the aperture stage number of this aperture value or 'I-', and therefore the AE lever 94 also stops running, and the aperture is eventually stopped down to the set aperture value. However, if mark 12 is set on the aperture setting ring 8, the lever 84 is moved to the maximum aperture p value position, that is, the minimum aperture position. Since there are no travel restrictions, the aperture will eventually be narrowed down to the maximum aperture value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the aperture setting ring 8 is setting the mark 12, the aperture lever 64 is locked so that it cannot be operated. However, if for some reason the lock of the EL/bar 94 to the reference position is released before the shutter release, the film can be advanced by operating the winding lever while pressing the multiple exposure button 16. This A is easy to do without
The E lever 94 can be locked at the reference position. Note that when the AE lever 94 is locked at the reference position, it is said that AE charging is being performed, and when the AE lever 94 is locked at the reference position, it is said that AE charging is being performed. Further, the release of the AE lever 94 from the reference position is called AE disconnection.

Reference numeral 96 denotes an aperture input pin for inputting the aperture value of the lens device 2, which contacts the aperture pin 90 of the lens device 2 and outputs a signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the pin 9o, that is, the aperture value of the lens device 2. It is used to capture signals according to the In addition,
This open distance pier 96 is connected to a mechanism that converts the amount of movement into a digital value, and as a result, the open aperture value of the lens device 2 is converted into a digital value.

Reference numeral 97 denotes a minimum aperture input pin for taking in the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2, and when it comes into contact with the minimum aperture pin 91 of the lens device 2, a signal corresponding to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91, that is, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is generated. This is for inserting No. 4 according to the value, that is, the minimum diameter pin. Note that this minimum aperture input pin 97 is connected to a mechanism that converts the amount of movement thereof into a digital value, and as a result, the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is taken in as a digital value.

Reference numeral 98 denotes an aperture drive lever, which brings its surface in the direction of arrow ε into contact with or faces the surface in the direction of arrow Ω of the aperture reduction lever 88 of the lens device 2, and moves in the direction of arrow ε before exposure starts at the time of shutter release. Then, drive the aperture drive lever 88 in the direction of arrow ν to move the aperture of the lens device 2 from the open position to the lever 84.
The aperture is narrowed down to the aperture position specified by . After the exposure is completed, the nine aperture drive lever 98 moves in the direction of the arrow ω and returns to its original position, thereby opening the aperture of the lens device 2 again. This aperture driving lever 98 can also be moved in the direction of arrow ε by operating the aperture tightening lever 64 of the body 4 in the direction of arrow δ. This is a necessary mechanism for viewing the subject image through the lens device 2 which is focused through the finder 13.

Reference numeral 100 denotes an AE detection unit facing the AE pin 92 of the lens device 2, which detects the protruding AE pin 92 and detects the mark 12 when the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2. It is provided to receive a control signal indicating selection.

As is clear from the above explanation, when trying to control the aperture value of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 needs to be aligned with the index 7. Mark 12 is called the AE mark.

Next, the lever 8 is used after the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 until the aperture is stopped, that is, the shutter is released.
4. For each movement of the AE lever 94, the aperture setting lever 88, and the aperture drive lever 98, the aperture setting ring 8
The case where the aperture setting ring 8 is set to a certain aperture value will be explained according to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 3, and the case where the aperture setting ring 8 is set to the AE mark 12 will be explained according to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As mentioned before, FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where some aperture value is preset on the lens device 2 side. With the lens device 2 in the preparation state, the tightening ring 1o has not rotated to the mounting position, so the lever 84 is moved against the force of the spring that biases the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.
It is held in a state where it is moved by an amount in the direction of the arrow ψ. Now, if only the tightening IJ ring 1o is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ without attaching the lens device 2 to the body 4, the lever 8
4 moves in the direction of the arrow φ to a position defined by the aperture setting ring 8, as shown in FIG. 4(b). This movement depends on the force of the spring which tends to move the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ. Now, let us assume that this lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 when AE charging is not completed or when the aperture lever 64 is being operated to suppress it. In this case, the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side is biased by the spring in the direction of the arrow δ, but since it is not specifically locked, the tightening ring 1o of the lens device 2 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ. When the lever 84 is moved and attached to the body 4, the lever 84 is moved in the direction of the arrow φ.
The biasing force of the spring that tries to rotate it in the direction is
Because it is superior to the biasing force of the spring that tries to move the AE lever 94 in the direction of the arrow θ, the lever 84 is
'), the diaphragm setting ring 8 moves in the direction of the arrow φ to a position defined by the diaphragm setting ring 8. Along with the kota, AE
The lever 94 is pushed by the lever 84 and is in the state shown in FIG. Now, if AE charging is performed by operating the winding lever 14 while the aperture lever 64 of the body 4 has returned to its original position, the AE lever 94 will move against the biasing force of the lever 84. It is driven in the direction of mark θ and locked at its reference position as shown in (2) in the same figure.

Therefore, the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side is the same as the lever 9.
4 and is held in the state shown in FIG. 4(D'). Note that when the lens device 2 is attached to the body 4 that has been charged with AE, the AE lever 9
It is obvious that the positions of 4 and the fin par 84 will be maintained at the positions shown in FIG. Next, the shutter
When the release is performed, the lock of the AE lever 94 is released, so the lever 84 runs in the direction of the arrow σ against the spring biasing force of the AE lever 94, and as shown in the figure, the lever 84 is moved by the aperture setting ring 8. Stop at the specified position. At this time, the AE lever 94 was pushed by the lever 84 and came running.
As shown in the same figure (g), the lever 84 also stops at the stopped position. Next, when the aperture drive lever 98 of the body 4 moves in the direction of the arrow ε as shown in (■) in the same figure,
-As shown, the aperture tightening lever 88 of the lens device 2 is aligned with the arrow ν.
direction, and the diaphragm is squeezed to a position defined by the lever 84/. In this state, exposure is started, but the close-up state is maintained at least until the exposure stops. Note that when the exposure is completed and the aperture drive lever 98 returns to the direction of the arrow ω, the lever 84, the aperture lever 88, the AE lever 94, and the aperture drive lever 98 return to the state shown in FIG. .

In addition, through the above operations, the lever 84 and the AE lever 9
4 does not have any particularly meaningful action. As mentioned earlier, this embodiment has a mechanism for taking in information on the aperture stage number regarding the aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 from the lever 84 to the body 4. In order to preset the aperture from the so-called body 4 (IllId-), by clamping the knee 94 at the desired position, and regulating the <-84 from running in the direction of the arrow σ. Since the aperture is preset by the aperture setting 1 and 8 on the lens device 2 side, the Leno (-84 and 94 are the same as those that do not perform any action. As is clear from the explanation of the figure, each reno (-84, 94 has an independent function; in a mode unrelated to its function, it will not cause any interference or operational failure. .This is one
The force is large depending on the arrangement of the lever 84 and the force distribution of the springs biasing each lever.

・As mentioned before, Fig. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where no aperture value is preset on the lens device 2 side, but Fig. 4 (a) shows the operation of each lever when it is attached to the body 4. With the lens device 2 in the ready state, the tightening ring 10-
Since the lever 84 has not been rotated to the mounting position, the lever 84 is kept moved in the direction of the arrow ψ against the force of the spring that urges the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ.

Now, if only the tightening ring 10 is rotated in the direction of the arrow φ without attaching the lens device 2 to the body 4, the lever
84 moves in a negative direction in the direction of arrow φ, as shown in FIG. Incidentally, this moving position is the same as the position defined when the minimum aperture of the lens device is selected with the aperture 9 setting ring 8. Note that this moving force depends on the force of the spring that attempts to move the lever 84 in the direction of the arrow φ. This time, this lens device 2 has not been fully charged with AE, or!
Body 4 with narrow down/<-64 pressed
Let's say you put it on. In this case, the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side is set to the previous shooting situation or the aperture lever 64
, in an indeterminate position depending on the state. That is, POD 4
When the aperture preset control is performed from the side, the AE lever 94 is clamped at a location corresponding to the controlled aperture value and remains in that position until the next AE charge is performed, and the aperture lever 64 is not operated. A when done
The clamp is released at the same time as the E-D8 is charged.

Therefore, when the tightening ring 10 of the lens device 2 is moved in the direction of the arrow φ and attached to the body 4, the lever 84 is urged toward the position shown in FIG. However, since the random lever 94 is actually clamped at the position shown in FIG. 84 is moved in the direction of arrow φ by the AE lever 9'4 to the position shown in FIG. LE Leno (-9
4, further movement will be restricted. Now, if the winding lever 14 of the body 4 is operated and AE charging is performed, the AE Reno ζ-94 is
It is driven in the direction of arrow θ against the biasing force 4, and is locked at its reference position as shown in FIG. Therefore, the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side is pushed by the AE lever 94 and held in the state shown in the figure. In addition, A.E.
It is obvious that even when the lens device 2 is attached to the fully charged body 4, the positions of the AE lever 94 and the lever 84 will be maintained at the positions shown in FIG. Next, when the shutter release is performed, the AE lever 94 is unlocked, so the lever 8
4 is an arrow σ against the spring biasing force of the AE lever 94.
Start running in the direction. The AE lever 94 is pushed by the lever 84 and runs in the direction of the arrow σ, but during this time the camera device detects the amount of travel of the AE lever 94 in a pulse manner and adjusts the aperture set or calculated on the body 4 side. When traveling the amount of movement equivalent to the corresponding number of aperture stages, the corresponding AE +
1 Clamp the bar 94 to restrict further travel.

Therefore, AE Shiba-9! The flang will be held at the position shown in the same figure (■), but at the same time, the lever 84 will also be moved to the position shown in the same figure by the AE;<-94. Through the above-described operations, the aperture set or calculated on the -body 4 side is in a preset state. Next, when the aperture drive lever 98 of the body 4 moves in the direction of the arrow ε as shown in FIG. It is narrowed down to a position regulated by lever 84.

In this state, exposure is started, but the state shown in the figure is maintained at least until the exposure is stopped. In addition,
When the aperture drive lever 98 returns to the direction of the arrow ω after the positioning is completed, the lever 84, the aperture lever 88, and the AJ lever 9
4. The aperture drive lever 98 returns to the same state as shown in tr5 in FIG.

The above operations are performed while performing wide-open photometry with the lens device 2. This operation is performed when an automatic exposure control operation including aperture priority and shutter speed second priority is applied, and is particularly effective in controlling the aperture value from the body 4 side of the camera device.

FIG. 5 shows an example of a strobe applied to the camera system of this embodiment, in which (a) is a front view and (b) is a rear view. (c) is a bottom view. This strobe has the well-known automatic dimming function, but with even more power! −
It is distinctive in that it has the ability to exchange information with other devices.

In the figure, reference numeral 102 is a light emitting unit that emits a flash of light that is limited to the light emitting capacity of this strobe. Further, 104 is the light emitting section 1
This is a light detection unit that detects the reflected flash from the subject in order to dim the flash of 02. The automatic light adjustment method applied to this strobe is such that when taking a photo, the strobe is emitted and the light emitting section 102 emits light toward the subject, and at the same time, the light detecting section 104 detects the light reflected from the subject. The light is photometered, and when the total amount of reflected light reaches a predetermined value, light emission from the light emitting section 102 is stopped, thereby providing an appropriate amount of exposure to the film surface.゛Also,
In order to perform such automatic light adjustment, the film sensitivity and aperture value of the photographic lens to be used must be given in advance as setting information, and the film sensitivity setting dial 106 and the aperture value are provided for this purpose. This is a value setting dial 108. Considering this, it seems possible to set the film sensitivity and aperture value through the film sensitivity setting dial 4° and the dial 34 for setting the aperture or shutter speed provided on the main body of the camera device. However, in this embodiment, in order to make it possible to use the strobe in camera systems other than this system, input means for prerequisite information necessary for automatic light adjustment is purposely provided on the strobe side. Note that the aperture value setting dial IQ8 has a manual mode, that is, a mode in which the operator sets the aperture value without relying on automatic light adjustment, and a mode in which the operator selects the desired aperture value when performing automatic light adjustment. You can choose between. This selection is made by rotating the dial 108 so that the manual mode display 110 or the aperture value display 112 written on the dial 108 is aligned with an index 114 provided on the strobe body. Further, the film sensitivity setting dial 106 can be rotated by moving a lock lever 116 that restricts its rotation in the direction of the arrow τ. This lock lever 116 is always biased by a spring in the direction opposite to the arrow τ.
The film sensitivity setting dial 106 is prevented from being rotated inadvertently. Incidentally, as the dial 1060 is rotated, a film ASA sensitivity display 12o appears in a window 118 provided on the dial 106, and the desired ASA sensitivity display 120 is aligned with the index 122 provided on the dial 106. Depending on the situation, the film sensitivity setting is completed. This film sensitivity setting dial 10fi also serves as a guide number calculation board, and dial 108
When the manual mode is controlled by the camera, it is possible to manually set the aperture value of the lens device 2 based on the distance to the subject. That is, when the aperture value setting dial 108 is set to the manual mode, the S.10 robot emits the maximum amount of light that the strobe has without automatically adjusting the light. Therefore, in order to give the proper amount of exposure to the film surface, it is necessary to select an appropriate combination of shooting distance and shooting lens aperture value, and the guide number calculation board used for this purpose is 1. ,
A configuration is adopted in which the combination of aperture values for photographing distances is changed to match the guide number of the strobe according to the film sensitivity. Therefore, it is naturally possible to use the film sensitivity setting dial 106 as a guide number calculation board, but in this embodiment, the aperture value series display is displayed in the window 124 provided on the dial 106. , the window 12 of the dial 106
4, a series of shooting distance displays 1 and 28 are displayed, and the photographer manually sets the aperture value on the camera device side from the corresponding aperture/aperture value display 126 and shooting distance display 128. The structure is such that it gives an appropriate amount of exposure to the film surface. As is well known, many strobes have a capacitor discharge type configuration, in which a battery or commercial power source is boosted to a voltage sufficient to cause the xenon discharge tube to emit light, and then the voltage is accumulated in a capacitor and used to take pictures. Sometimes, a configuration is adopted in which the charge in the capacitor is discharged through a xenon discharge tube, thereby causing the discharge tube to emit light. Therefore, in order for the xenon discharge tube to reliably emit light, it is necessary that the capacitor be charged to a specified voltage.
Even if a photograph is taken before the charging of the capacitor is completed, the flash will not emit enough light, and the film surface will not be sufficiently exposed. Therefore, what is needed is
This is a charging completion indicator light 130, which emits the first light when charging is completed to inform the photographer of this fact. Note that this charging completion indicator light 130 also serves as a switch for a light emission test, and the strobe emits light by pressing this switch. This function can be effectively used when measuring exposure using a flash meter or the like. 132 is a power switch, and by turning on this switch, charging of the capacitor is started.

The functions of this strobe described above are roughly the same as those of the conventional strobe equipped with an automatic light control device, but as mentioned earlier, this strobe can be used in combination with a camera device. Therefore, it constitutes one component of the camera system, and can greatly improve the operability of the camera device.

The strobe in Figure 5 is an accessory for the camera device shown in Figure 1.
- It can be attached to the shoe '50, but in that case, the shoe 13 provided at the bottom of the strobe body from the back side of the camera device.
4 into the accessory shoe 50,
It is defined by tightening with a tightening ring 136. Furthermore, at the bottom of the strobe shoe 134, there are a synchro contact 138, a control signal contact 1401, and a data signal contact 1.
42, and when the strobe is attached, accessories and
It is electrically connected to a synchronizing contact 52, a control terminal 54, and a data terminal 56 of the shoe 50, respectively. Further, the shoe 134 is provided with a ground terminal 144 on a portion thereof, and is grounded to the main body of the accessory shoe 50 when the strobe is attached.

When taking pictures using strobe light, the focal
The shutter speed at which a camera equipped with a plain shutter can perform exposure in synchronization with the strobe light emission, that is, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, is generally on the low side of 1/60th to 1/125th of a second or less. , it often happens that this setting is incorrect when operating the camera,
Furthermore, resetting the shutter speed for strobe photography impedes operability, and some countermeasures have been required.

On the other hand, the strobe used in this embodiment is not a passive system that simply issues a warning in case of erroneous operation, but an active system that controls the shutter speed necessary for flash photography from the strobe side. method is adopted. This includes a fully automatic method that automatically releases the shutter at the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN, regardless of the shutter speed set on the camera device, prior to taking a photo with strobe light, and is set to a higher speed than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS will automatically change.
A semi-automatic method can be considered in which the shutter is released at YN and the shutter is released at a shutter speed set on the camera device in a shutter speed range smaller than this strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, but in this embodiment, a fully automatic method or The plan is to select and adopt semi-automatic methods as appropriate. A selector switch 146 provided on the back of the strobe body is used to select between the fully automatic method and the semi-automatic method.

Note that the signal for determining the switching position of the changeover switch 146 is transmitted from the control contact 140 to the control terminal 4 of the accessory shoe 50 along with a signal indicating that charging of the strobe is completed.
is given as a signal containing two pieces of information. This can be done by setting the current value that flows when a voltage is applied from the control terminal 54 on the camera side to the control contact 1'40 on the strobe side to be different depending on the switching position of the changeover switch 146. Note that each of these two pieces of information is given to the camera device according to an AND condition with information indicating that charging of the strobe is completed. Therefore, when charging of the strobe is not completed, no signal is transmitted to the camera device side. Now, if a signal indicating that charging of the strobe is completed is given as the first information, it will be taken into the camera device as a signal indicating the fully automatic method, and the charging completion signal will be given as the second information. If it is given as information, it will be taken into the camera device as a signal indicating the semi-automatic method. Depending on the first or second information signal from the control terminal 54, this camera device enters the strobe photography mode, and the shutter speed is selected to be a strobe synchronized shutter speed or a lower second (in the case of semi-automatic mode). At the same time, the data terminal 56
The data of the aperture value or full light emission is taken in from 0. Information set by the aperture setting dial 108 is given to this data terminal 56 as an analog value. That is,
In automatic light control mode, as mentioned above, information about the aperture value of the lens is essential, and although we configured this so that it is set on the strobe side, this setting value can also be directly used on the camera device side. In order to obtain the aperture control signal, a transmission system is required. For this purpose, a data contact 142 is provided on the strobe side, and a data terminal 56 is provided on the camera body side. Now, when the charging completion signal is input to the camera device side, the camera device takes in analog information regarding the aperture value from the data terminal 56, and
Aperture control is performed according to that information. Note that when the strobe aperture setting dial 108 is set to manual mode, the data contact 142 has a
Analog information other than the level corresponding to other aperture values, such as an analog signal with a relatively higher level than the data representing the aperture value, is output, indicating that the strobe is in manual mode and will emit maximum light intensity. A signal indicating this is transmitted to the camera body.

At this time, since aperture control is not performed on the camera device side, it is necessary to set a desired aperture value on the lens device 2 side, or one calculated from a guide number calculation board, through the aperture setting ring 8.

According to the configuration described above, the camera system in this embodiment can completely automatically obtain the appropriate exposure amount when taking pictures using an auxiliary light called a strobe. Conventionally, when taking pictures using an auto-adjustable flash, the shutter speed on the camera device side is set to a strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or less that can be synchronized with the strobe, for example, 1/60th of a second or less, and the aperture is While it was necessary to set the value to the value specified from the flash side for automatic light, the shutter speed setting and aperture value setting are all done automatically, so it is much easier. It is possible to greatly improve operability and avoid erroneous operations. Also, on the camera device side, automatic exposure control operations will be performed until the strobe is fully charged, so even if you release the shutter without fully charging the flash, it will not be possible to get the correct exposure or an exposure close to it. Since photography will be carried out, the probability of obtaining a good photographic image will increase.
When a conventional camera device performs strobe photography, if the strobe is not fully charged and the strobe does not fire when the shutter is released, the shutter speed and aperture value set for strobe photography may result in underexposure. This is a huge improvement compared to the previous years.

In addition, with this camera system, when taking photos with a strobe, there is no need for any special operations on the camera device side; simply attach the strobe to the camera device, turn on the strobe's power switch, and the strobe can fire. When the camera device is fully charged, the camera automatically switches to flash photography mode, so all that is left is to adjust the distance and release the shutter. We are trying to significantly improve the operability of camera devices that require manual operation.

One of the most important elements when incorporating an automatic exposure control function into a camera is the photometry system. This photometry system has a function to take in object brightness information, which is one element for exposure calculation, and most commonly used is a configuration in which the brightness of the object is converted into an electrical signal through a photoelectric conversion element.

Currently, most of the light meters built into single-lens reflex cameras use the internal light (T, T L) metering method, which is useful for single-lens reflex cameras with automatic exposure control functions. It is not an exception. This TTL photometry method actually measures the brightness of the subject that enters through the lens, so relatively accurate photometry is possible, and it is useful because it can be equally applied even when using lenses with different focal lengths. The gender is extremely large.

Additionally, since you can check the photometry area or frame through the viewfinder, you can easily make corrections to the photometry amount.

What is discussed in a camera device using the TTL' photometry method is the problem regarding the photometry area in the frame. “This photometry area can also be roughly divided into 29 areas: a partial photometry area that focuses on only a specific part of the frame, such as the center, and an average photometry area that measures the entire area of the frame on an average basis. Irregular photometry areas are also being considered, such as combining a partial photometry area and an average photometry area, or dividing the average photometry area into several parts and changing the weight of each area.

- For camera devices incorporating an automatic exposure control function,
Applying the average photometric area to this photometric area is convenient from the viewpoint of instant shooting, etc., so the average photometric area is widely applied, but it still has some problems.

This is a serious problem when using a wide-angle lens, etc., but if the background brightness is extremely different compared to the wave force body you want to photograph, the automatic exposure control mechanism ,
The exposure control operation is performed according to the brightness of the subject, and there is a risk that the subject that you actually want to photograph will be extremely underexposed or overexposed. The above-mentioned AE lock mechanism was provided to deal with this problem, but with camera devices that perform average metering, it is possible to measure only the brightness of a subject at a specific position within the frame. If you want to measure the
Once you approach the subject, set the frame so that the specific position of the subject occupies most of the frame, measure the light on the frame, and then move away from the subject while operating the AE lock mechanism and set the desired frame. It is a cumbersome operation to perform focusing and then release the shutter.

Photometry of subject brightness is preferred.

In the camera system of this embodiment, in order to deal with this problem, the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device is
The camera is configured such that an external photometer other than the TTL photometer can be attached to the camera, and automatic exposure control is performed based on the photometry results from this external photometer.

FIG. 6 shows a perspective view of an external photometer applied to the camera system of this embodiment.
The nine contacts 146 provided on the camera device side can be contacted with the control terminal 54 provided in the accessory shoe 50 on the camera device side, so that when the photometer is attached to the accessory shoe 50, it is possible to contact the control terminal 54 on the camera side. This is to inform the public. this is,
This signal is given from the photometer to the camera device as third information separate from the charging completion signal, which is made up of two pieces of information indicating whether the strobe attached to the accessory shoe 50 is full σ movement or semi-automatic. The camera device that receives this third information switches to external photometry mode and takes in the analog information input from the data terminal 56 as subject brightness information. A contact point 148 provided on the bottom of the photometer can be contacted with the data terminal 56 when the photometer is attached to the accessory shoe 50, and outputs the brightness of the subject light incident through the light receiving window 150 as analog data. The data is transmitted to the camera device through the data terminal 56. The light-receiving angle of the light-receiving window 150 may be fixed as appropriate depending on the purpose, but in this embodiment, a zoom function is added to the light-receiving angle 4, and the focal length of the photographing lens used is adjusted by the dial 152 on the top surface of the photometer. The light-receiving angle can be freely and variably set according to the desired Ω photometry region.

With this configuration, the camera device automatically switches to external photometry mode with a photometer for external photometry attached to the accessory shoe 50, and automatically switches to external photometry mode based on photometry information from the photometer. Exposure control operations are performed, and the scope of application can be further expanded.

Now, the TT is being incorporated into an eye-flex camera.
Considering the L exposure meter and the external photometer mentioned earlier, these metering methods are so-called reflected light metering methods that use a boiling configuration to measure the light reflected from the subject, so the amount of light metering depends on the subject. The brightness corresponds to the actual brightness of the subject.

However, since this subject brightness is greatly affected by the subject's color tone and surface condition, it is important to accurately measure the brightness of the light, that is, the illuminance, to determine the subject's color tone, etc. This is not a suitable method if you are trying to make accurate exposure decisions that are not influenced by this method. For example, under the same lighting
- When metering a colored subject and a solid black subject, there will naturally be a difference in the amount of light metering when using the reflected light method, but when metering using the incident light method, the amount of light measurement will naturally be different. There is no difference between the two, as it depends only on the lighting conditions in which the two-wave subject is placed. Therefore, if you are actually trying to find out the exact amount of exposure, the incident light method is more desirable.
It is desirable for a camera device, especially a camera device having an automatic exposure control function, to be able to perform automatic exposure control based on photometry results based on the incident light method.

From this point of view, the strengths of this embodiment are as follows.

The system also includes an incident light exposure meter as an external photometry system.

FIG. 7 shows a perspective view of an incident light type exposure meter applied to the camera system of this embodiment, and this exposure meter 60 is connected to the camera device by a cord 154. This code 15
4 includes a signal line for transmitting various information or data from the exposure meter 160 to the camera device, and a coupler 1 at one end.
56 to the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device, and connect the plug 158 provided at the other end to the exposure meter 160.
The exposure meter 160 is connected to the camera device by being attached to the socket 162 of the camera.

A contact point 166 provided on the bottom surface 164 of the coupler 1° 56 is capable of contacting a control terminal 54 provided in the accessor no-shoe 50 on the camera device side, as described above.

Just like in the case of a solid external photometer, when the exposure meter 160 is connected to a camera device, this is notified to the camera side. This is also given to the accessory shoe 50 from the exposure meter to the camera device as third information separate from the charging completion signal, which is made up of two pieces of information indicating whether the attached strobe is fully automatic or semi-automatic. After receiving this third information, the camera device switches to external photometry mode and takes in the analog information input from the data terminal 56 as illuminance information. Note that this illuminance information is treated as a value that is completely equivalent to the subject brightness information input from the external photometer mentioned above in terms of exposure calculation. In addition,
A contact 168 provided on the bottom surface of the coupler 156 is capable of contacting the data terminal 56 when attached to the accessory shoe 50, and converts the illuminance information obtained as a result of photometry with the exposure meter 160 into analog data to the data terminal 56. 56 to the camera device side. Furthermore, coupler 156
The contact point 170 provided on the bottom surface of the accessory
The contact point 170 can be contacted with the AE lock terminal 58 of the camera 50, and at the same time as the camera 156 is attached, this contact point 170 contacts the AE lock terminal 58 to control the automatic exposure control mechanism of the camera device, in particular, the amount of light metering. lock. The AE lock is released only while the metering button 174 provided on the Hayashi exposure meter 160 is pressed. Note that by pressing the photometry button 174, the exposure meter 160 starts photometry, and by releasing it, the photometry is completely stopped.

17 for a more detailed explanation of the exposure meter 160
Reference numeral 6 denotes a rotatably provided light receiving head, the light receiving portion of which is covered with a hemispherical diffusion member 178. At the time of photometry, the photometry button 174 is pressed after positioning the light-receiving section of the light-receiving head 176 from the subject toward the camera device. By this operation, the AEO switch on the camera device side is released and calculations for automatic exposure control are started. At the same time, the exposure meter 160 starts metering light and receives data regarding the illuminance measured by the light receiving section. It is given as analog data to the camera device through a code 154. Here, the camera device from which the AE lock has been released performs calculations for automatic exposure control based on the data regarding the illuminance. Note that during photometry, the mud illuminance obtained as a result of the photometry is also displayed by the meter 180 on the exposure meter 160 side. Therefore, the photographer should use the pointer 182 of the meter 180.
It is also possible to know the combination of aperture value and shutter speed necessary to obtain proper exposure from the instruction from the calculation board 184. At the end of photometry, by releasing the pressure on the photometry button 174, the camera device enters the AE lock state again and the pointer 182 of the meter 180 is clamped. In this state, remove the exposure meter 160 from the metering position, perform appropriate operations such as framing and focusing on the camera device side, and then release the shutter to automatically expose based on the AE-locked calculation result. It is controlled and exposure can be obtained under desired conditions.

In addition, this incident light type exposure meter is equipped with the AE flow 2 of the camera device.
The reason why this function was added is that the incident light type exposure meter must be used close to the subject, away from the location where the camera is installed when shooting. The location of the camera equipment for each shot is necessarily not the same, and if you release the camera while continuously metering, there is a risk that the exposure meter will get inside the subject and the photo will be taken. The reason is that it needs to be avoided.

That is, the exposure meter 160, like a general incident light type exposure meter used as a stand-alone unit, temporarily performs photometry operation near the subject, and only performs photometry by removing the AE lock of the camera device. Calculations for automatic exposure control are performed based on the data, and after the photometry is completed, the calculation results during photometry are locked using the AE lock, and even if the exposure meter 160 is subsequently removed from the photometry position, the calculation results during photometry are This makes it possible to control exposure.

As mentioned above, by providing a camera device with an automatic exposure control function with an automatic exposure control function based on photometric data from an incident light exposure meter, the scope of application of the camera device can be greatly expanded. be.

The camera system of this embodiment allows application of a motor drive device. This motor drive device has a mechanism that automatically winds the film of the shutter release, and is capable of continuous shooting of moving objects.
It can be used extremely effectively to capture the appropriate shutter opportunity, but since it eliminates the need to advance the film, you can concentrate on framing and focusing for photography, and you can also use the shutter and Since there is more room for opportunities, the possibility of photographing can be greatly improved.

The motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment is very effectively applied to photographing.
It is required that the operability of the camera device is not deteriorated compared to before the motor drive is installed, and that it is compact and has excellent functionality. , FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of a motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment, in which 186 is a main body of the motor drive device, and 188 is a motor drive device that rotates on the main body 186. It freely protrudes 7 and can be screwed into a screw hole 68 provided on the bottom surface of the camera device's pocket 4. A camera mounting screw 190 is used to attach the main body 186 to the body 4, and 190 is the camera mounting screw 188. A mounting ring is attached to the shaft and is used to rotate the mounting screw 188, 192 is a power switch for this motor drive device, and 194 is the number of frames that can be taken with the film being used or the number of frames that can be taken by the photographer as desired by the motor drive device. The frame number setting gear 196 for setting the desired number of frames determines the number of remaining frames that can be photographed on the film that is fed frame by frame by this motor drive device, or the frame number setting gear 194. 198 is a contact terminal connected to the contact device 72 on the bottom surface of the body 4 when this motor drive device is attached to the camera device, and 200 is a contact terminal for displaying the number of frames set in the camera device. - A winding coupler 202 is used to mechanically connect the shaft of the winding lever 14 of the camera device when the drive device is installed. Since the rewind button 48 cannot be operated, the rewind levers 20 and 4 provided for operating the button 48 from the motor drive device are operated by operating the rewind lever 202. This is a rewind pin that protrudes above 186 and is used to press the rewind button 48 on the bottom surface of the camera device body 4.

In addition, when attaching the motor drive device to the camera device 2, it is necessary to remove the lid 70 on the bottom surface of the body 4 to expose the coupler 206 that interlocks with the shaft of the winding lever 14 of the camera device. After removing the lid 70, when the motor drive device main body 186 is attached to the bottom surface of the camera device POD 4, the d winding coupler 200 on the main body 186 side and the coupler 206 on the body 4 side are fitted,
It becomes possible to wind the film from the motor drive device side.

It should be noted that the motor drive and live device attached to the camera device must operate in close coordination with each operation of the camera device O, and for that purpose, some kind of information transmission means is required between the camera device and the camera device. .

The contact device 72 on the camera device side and the contact terminal 198 on the motor drive device side are provided for this purpose, and when the motor drive device is attached to the camera device, they are included in the contact device 72 on the bottom of the camera device body 4. , the three contacts 214, 216, and 218 are connected to the motor drive device main body 1.
Three contacts 208.2 included in 86 contact terminals 198
1o1212, respectively. In addition,:
Here, the contacts 208 and 214 connect the ground wires of the camera device and the motor drive device, and the contacts 21JO and -216 connect the camera device side to the motor drive device. It transmits a signal to drive the winding motor from the completion of exposure to the completion of winding, and also contacts 212 and 218.
The purpose of this contact is to cause the shutter release device provided on the motor drive device to release the shutter of the camera device.

Reference numeral 220 is the above-mentioned shutter release device, and is a device for remotely operating the camera device, in particular for shutter release and film winding using a motor drive device.

This shutter release device 220 is connected to the motor drive device main body 18 by an appropriate length Ω control cord 222.
6, which connects the plug 224 provided at the tip of the control cord 222 to the motor drive device body 1''.
This is done by inserting it into a socket 226 provided at 86.

This shutter release device 220 has an operation button 228
By pressing this operation button 228, a shutter release signal is applied from the motor drive device to the camera device through the contacts 212 and 218 mentioned above.

This operation button 228 has exactly the same function as the shutter release button 18 provided on the top surface of the body 4 on the camera device side. Note that the operation button 228 is locked in the pressed state by sliding it in the direction of the IT arrow.

To explain in more detail the motor drive device configured as described above, when applying the motor drive device to a camera device, first remove the lid 70 provided on the bottom surface of the camera device body 4, and then attach the motor drive device to the camera device. Align the bottom surface of the body 4 with the top surface of the motor/drive device main body 186. In this state,
The winding coupler 200 is in a position where it can be mated with the coupler 206, the mounting screw 188 is in a position where it can be screwed into the screw hole 68, and the pin 204 is in a position facing the rewinding button 48, and the contact Each contact 20 of the terminal 198
8.210.212 is the corresponding contact 2 of the contact device 72
It is necessary to position it so that it can come into contact with 14.216.218. This positioning can be done by using the retaining lip 228 provided on the upper edge of the motor drive unit body 18''6, unless the orientation of the camera device and the motor drive device are reversed.
This can be done easily and quickly by holding the bottom surface of the camera device body 4. Next, the mounting ring 19
0, the mounting screw 188 is rotated and screwed into the screw hole 68 on the bottom surface of the body 4, thereby firmly fixing the motor drive device to the camera device. In this state, the winding coupler 200 and coupler 206 are fitted together,
Each contact 208, 210, 212 of the contact terminal 198 abuts a corresponding contact 214, 216, 218 of the contact device 72. In addition, the winding coupler 200 and the coupler 206
To fit the two claws 230 of the winding coupler 200 to the coupler 20! Depending on the rotational position of each coupler, the pawl 230 of the winding coupler 200 may fit into the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206 when the motor drive device is installed. may not engage properly. In preparation for such a case, the winding coupler 200 can be sunk in its axial direction, and is held protruding by the biasing force of the spring. That is, when the pawl 230 of the winding coupler 200 does not engage the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206, the pawl 230 engages the engagement hole 232 of the coupler 206.
This prevents excessive force from being applied to each coupler when the motor/drive device is installed.However, if the winding lever 14 on the camera device side is When the winding coupler 200 or the coupler 206 is rotated by the rotation of the motor and the pawl 230 and the engagement hole 232 are in a positional relationship where they can engage, the pawl 230 protrudes under the biasing force of the spring and closes the engagement hole. 232.

By installing a motor drive device, this camera device becomes capable of automating film winding and continuous photography after photography is completed. If the photographer wishes to take a photograph using the motor drive device, the photographer turns on the power of the motor drive device using the power switch 192. At this time, if film winding has already been completed on the camera device side, the motor drive device is in a standby state, but if film winding has not been completed, the motor drive device will first perform the film winding operation and then It will be in a standby state. Next, the shutter release button 18 on the camera device side
By pressing , the motor drive device winds the film after shooting. Further, by keeping the 7-shot release button 18 pressed, the 7-shot release and film winding are continuously repeated.

It should be noted that the film counter 96 performs a subtraction count every time the film is wound once, and when the content of the counter 96 becomes on, the operation of the motor drive device is regulated. This is film perfoure! This is an important function in the sense of protecting the engine and preventing excessive force from being applied to the motor of the motor drive device.

When rewinding the film after shooting all the frames of the film, by rotating the rewind lever 202 in the direction of the arrow, the bin 204 pushes the rewind pin 48 of the camera device, making it possible to rewind the film. becomes.

Note that the shutter release device 220 has exactly the same function as the shutter release button 18 provided on a camera device, and the shutter release and film winding are performed by pressing the operation button 228.
Continuous shutter release and film winding is effected by holding down or locking the operating button /228.

In addition, the selector lever 22 provided on the top surface of the camera device body 4 is aligned with the position where the mark 28 is selected, and the shutter release button 18 is kept pressed or the shutter release device 220 is pressed. If the operation button 228 is pressed and locked, the self-
The shutter release and film advance are repeated at intervals specified by a timer mechanism.

As described above, the motor tripe device 1 applied to the camera system of this embodiment can greatly expand the range of use of this camera device, and improve the mobility, quick-shooting performance, and operability of the camera device. This will greatly improve the quality of life.

The Fileda plays an extremely important role in camera operation, and most camera operations, including framing and focusing operations, which are the basics of camera operation, are performed while looking through the viewfinder. As mentioned earlier, the viewfinder has an important relationship with the operability of the camera, and for that reason,
If most of the information necessary for camera operation can be obtained through the viewfinder, the operability can be greatly improved. However, the shooting information displayed in the viewfinder is
It is necessary to use falsetto, which needs to be efficiently arranged in a limited area, and which makes it easy to confirm the displayed information. This is important in the sense that the photographer can concentrate on framing, focusing, and focusing.

The camera system of this embodiment is equipped with a new information display system in the camera device viewfinder that allows shooting information to be viewed efficiently and easily, prevents erroneous operation of the camera, and improves its operability. .

Through this information display system, the operator can obtain various information such as shutter speed, aperture value, low brightness warning, high brightness warning, automatic or manual mode, pulp, strobe charging completion, warning 1 for incorrect operation, etc. Therefore, it is possible to obtain information to deal with any situation while looking through the finder.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of finder information when looking through the finder window 13 of the camera device, and the focusing screen 234 has a split section 236 and a micro-screen for reliably and quickly focusing.
A prism section 238 is arranged coaxially. This focusing screen 234 is the most important part in projecting the subject onto it and performing focusing and framing operations.
The operator can obtain desired information necessary for photographing from a portion outside the outer periphery of the screen 234. The shooting information is configured to be displayed using light emitting elements such as LEDs so that it can be confirmed even when shooting with a strobe in the dark or when shooting a stage, but in this embodiment, the information is also displayed digitally. It is characterized by displaying

Digital display of shooting information allows the photographer to obtain objective shooting information, unlike the fixed point type, hand movement type, and other methods that relatively obtain shooting information, which were commonly used in the past. When performing operations, it becomes possible to predict depth of field, camera shake, etc., making it possible to perform accurate photographic operations.

LED display with focusing screen, 2
It is provided in a part outside of 34, and consists of a symbol display section 240 for representing a reciprocal number, a numeric symbol display section 242 for displaying a 4-digit number or symbol consisting of 8 character segments, and a decimal point for representing a decimal point. a first display section 244 consisting of a display section 243; a second display section 244 consisting of a decimal point display section 246 for displaying a decimal point; and a numeric symbol display section 248 for displaying a two-digit number or symbol consisting of an 8-character segment. Display section 250
and "When in manual mode to display manual or automatic mode"
It is composed of a third display section 252 that displays the character 'M''.

The first display section is mainly used to display the shutter speed, and the second display section is mainly used to display the aperture value, but depending on the operation mode, other information may be displayed.

That is, the first display section not only displays the shutter speed from 60 seconds to 1/2000 second, but also displays "buLb" when Pulp is selected as the shutter speed, and also displays "buLb" during strobe photography. When the strobe is fully charged,
In order to let the photographer know that flash photography is possible, the "EF" display is displayed together with the shutter speed for flash photography, and it also alerts the photographer that photography is not being performed properly. As a warning to make people aware of "EEE"
E” is also displayed blinking.

In addition, the second display section displays the aperture values from Fl, 2 to F22, and also displays the aperture value of the lens device 2.
When adjusting the exposure manually by operating the aperture setting ring 8, a flashing "op" message will appear if the manually set aperture value is insufficient for the appropriate exposure, and if it is excessive c.
A blinking display of "L" is displayed, and a display of "oo" is displayed when the aperture is appropriate, informing the photographer of the appropriate aperture, and further informing the photographer that the shooting is not being performed normally. As a warning, a blinking "EE" is displayed together with the first display section.

Since the information in the viewfinder as explained above is closely related to each operation mode of the camera device, below, while explaining each operation mode of the camera device shown in the first diagram,
What kind of information is displayed in the finder as the object changes will be clarified through an explanatory diagram showing a display example in FIG. 10.

Now, when performing automatic exposure control photography with shutter speed priority (hereinafter referred to as AE photography) with the camera device shown in the first figure, set the mode selector switch 38 on the top of the body 4 to the shutter speed priority mode side, and turn the dial 34. Through rotation operation,
Allows input of shutter speed settings. Also, 2
mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the device 2 side with index 7.
, so that the aperture of the lens device 2 can be preset controlled from the body 4 side. In this state, this camera device is in a state where it is possible to perform AE photography with priority given to shutter speed, and if the dial 34 is now rotated, the shutter speed displayed on the first display section 24.4 will be changed. It changes according to the rotation of the dial 34. The display of the shutter speed at this time is as shown in FIG. 10(a)-(1). A desired shutter speed can be selected and set by rotating 34. At the same time, an arithmetic circuit (not shown) uses the subject brightness information (or illuminance information) corresponding to the brightness of the subject to Proper exposure or excessive or insufficient exposure by the number of steps desired by the photographer (This can be set by selecting ←i on the scale 42 with the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 provided on the top of the body 4. (hereinafter, this exposure will also be referred to as proper exposure), the necessary aperture value is calculated, and is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in FIG. 10(a)-(1). Therefore, the photographer can know the calculated aperture value for the shutter speed he or she has set before releasing the shutter.If the shutter is released in this state, the camera device will know the calculated aperture value for the shutter speed that has been set by the photographer. The lens device 2 is stopped down to the aperture value, and the shutter is released at the set shutter speed.

Note that the aperture, or aperture, of the photographic lens device 2 used has an upper and lower limit, and if the aperture of the lens calculated for the set shutter speed is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, That is, when the subject brightness is low, aperture control using the calculated aperture value is impossible. In these various cases, the second display section 250 is displayed to inform the photographer of the situation.
Photographic lens 2 compatible with the maximum aperture that allows aperture control
The aperture value, that is, the maximum aperture value, is displayed blinking. Note that the controllable maximum aperture of the photographic lens 2, that is, the maximum aperture value, is taken in from the lens device second opening bin 90 through the opening input bin 96 on the body 4 side.

Furthermore, if the aperture of the lens calculated for the shutter speed set by the dial 34 is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, that is, if the brightness of the subject is high, the aperture value calculated using the aperture value Aperture control is not possible.

In such cases, the 20th
The aperture value of the photographic lens 2- corresponding to the minimum aperture for which aperture control is possible, that is, the maximum aperture value, is displayed blinking on the display section 250. Note that the controllable minimum aperture, that is, the maximum aperture value, of the photographic lens device 2 is taken in from the minimum aperture bin 91 of the lens device 2 through the minimum aperture input bin 97 on the body 4 side.

In addition, if the subject brightness is too low or too high for the set shutter speed, and the second display section 250 flashes the open aperture value or the maximum aperture value to issue a warning. However, shutter release is possible,
In this case, the aperture value is controlled according to the value flashing on the second display section 250. Also, when performing aperture-priority AE photography next time, set the mode selector switch 38 on the top of the body 4 to the aperture-priority mode. , and the aperture value can be set and input through the rotation operation of the diamond 34.

Also, mark 1 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 21 side.
2 as index 7, and the aperture of lens device 2 is set to body 4.
The aperture value can be preset controlled using a dial 34 on the side. In this state, this camera device is in a state where AE photography with aperture priority is possible, and when the dial 34 is now rotated, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 will change depending on the rotation of the dial 34. It changes depending on the movement.

The display of the aperture value at this time is shown in Figure 1θ (a) - ([
As shown in l), the photographer selects the second display section 2.
While looking at the aperture value displayed at 50, turn the dial 3.
By rotating 4, a desired aperture value can be selected and set. Simultaneous KJ A calculation circuit (not shown) calculates the shutter and tilt speeds necessary to obtain proper exposure based on object brightness information (or illuminance information) corresponding to the brightness of the object, and displays the shutter speed on the first display section 244. In Figure 10(a)-(
It is displayed as shown in If). Therefore, the photographer can know the shutter speed calculated for the aperture value he or she has set before releasing the shutter. When the shutter is released in this state, the camera device stops the lens device 2 to the set aperture value -t and releases the shutter at the calculated shutter speed.

Note that the aperture, or aperture, of the photographic lens device 2 used has an upper and lower limit, and if the aperture of the lens set using the dial 34 on the body 4 side is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2. In this case, aperture control using the set aperture value is impossible.

In such a case, the aperture value is set incorrectly and the aperture value is incorrectly set.
Although some kind of countermeasure is required, in the present embodiment, erroneous settings like these 4 are treated as if the aperture value of the maximum aperture of the photographic lens, that is, the aperture value at maximum aperture had been set.

For example, the open aperture value of the Luns device 2 is 1.
Although it is 8", the dial 34 on the body 4 side
If you set the aperture value to ``1.4'' in F-number, the camera equipment actually treats the set aperture value as ``1.8'' in F-number, and releases the shutter based on this value. The speed is calculated. At this time, the display in the viewfinder shows the aperture ν value and shutter speed, which are used to control the actual exposure, regardless of the setting value of the dial 34, as shown in FIG. 10(e)-m. Ru.

Conversely, if the lens aperture set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, it is impossible to control the aperture at the set aperture value.

In such a case, the aperture value was set incorrectly.
Several countermeasures are required, but in this embodiment, such erroneous settings are treated as if the aperture value of the minimum aperture of the photographic lens, that is, the maximum aperture value, had been set. For example, if you set the aperture value to 22" using the dial 34 on the body 4 side even though the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 is 16" in F number, 1. So, the set aperture value is F number 116"
is treated as a set value, and the shutter speed is calculated based on this value. At this time, the display in the finder shows the dial 34α as shown in Fig. 10(e)-(II).
The aperture value and shutter speed used to control actual exposure are displayed regardless of the set value.

Furthermore, there are upper and lower limits to the shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera body 4, and if the shutter speed calculated for the set aperture value is slower than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera body 4, When the brightness is low, shutter control using the calculated shutter speed is impossible.

In such a case, in order to inform the photographer of this, the first display section 244 flashes a shutter speed corresponding to the longest time that shutter control is possible.

Furthermore, if the shutter speed calculated for the aperture value set by the dial 34 is faster than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, that is, if the subject brightness is high,
It is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shank speed. In such a case, it is impossible to control the shutter speed using the calculated shutter speed. In such a case, in order to notify the photographer of this, the first display section 244 flashes the fastest speed at which the shutter can be controlled.

In addition, if the subject brightness is too low or too high for the set aperture value, and the longest shutter speed or the fastest shutter speed is blinking on the first display section 244 and a warning is issued. However, shutter release is possible, and in this case the shutter speed is controlled according to the value blinking on the first display section 244.

The camera device shown in Figure 1 mainly prioritizes shutter speed.
It is designed to be used in the two modes mentioned above, E shooting or aperture priority AE shooting, but in normal photography, the two modes above are the most important for shooting. It seems that the requirements of the parts can be satisfied.

However, the lens device 2 side is not always used by aligning the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 with the index 7, and sometimes the aperture value display 9 on the aperture setting ring 8 is aligned with the index 7. There is also a possibility that manipulation will take place. In such a case,
The camera device is in an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.

At this time, depending on the setting position of the mode selector 38, the dial 34 sets the shutter speed preferentially and then manually sets the aperture value on the lens device 2 side.
There are two possible modes: setting the aperture value preferentially in step 4 and then manually setting the same aperture value on the lens mounting device 2 side.

Now, if the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the dial 34 will be used as a dial for setting the shutter speed, and by rotating this dial 34, you can set the desired shutter speed. The shutter speed can be selected and set.The selected shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 as shown in FIGS. 10(a)-(m), while the camera device is Lens device 2
10(a)-(II[)
The image is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in FIG. Note that at this time, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is not controlled from the body 4 side, but is controlled by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. The aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 of the value display 9 is indicated by the index 7.
It is preset in the lens device 2gI by adjusting the value to . In this way, the third display in the viewfinder is used to inform the photographer that the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 needs to be manually set on the aperture/zoom device 2 side. 252 displays the letter "M". Also, when the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the dial 34 is used as a dial for setting the aperture value. By rotating the dial 34, an arbitrary aperture value can be selected and set.

The selected aperture value is shown in Figure 10 (a) - (I
It is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in I[). On the other hand, the camera device calculates the shutter speed necessary to obtain proper exposure based on the subject brightness information measured through the lens device 2, the set aperture value, etc.
) is displayed on the second display section 244. In addition,
At this time, the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 is not controlled from the body 4 side, but is determined by the aperture setting value 8 on the lens device 2 side. On the display 9, by matching the same aperture value as the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250, that is, the aperture value set by the dial 34, to the index 7, the aperture value can be adjusted on the lens device 2 side. Preset. In this way, the third display section 252 in the viewfinder is used to inform the photographer that the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 needs to be manually set on the lens device 2 side. The letter “M” is displayed.

As described above, by setting the shutter speed or aperture value with the dial 34 and manually presetting the aperture value on the lens device 2 side according to the display on the second display section 250 in the finder, At the time of shutter release, the lens device 2 is manually stopped down to a preset position,
In the body 4, the shutter is released at a shutter speed set by the dial 34 or at a shutter speed determined as a result of calculation, allowing photographing with proper exposure.

Note that even in this aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, especially when the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side are different. By setting in advance so that the aperture value and the aperture value always match, this camera device performs an AH photographing operation that gives priority to the aperture value. That is, since aperture priority AE photography is controlled by calculating the exposure time for a set aperture value, when presetting the lens device 2 for a preset aperture value, This is because the operation of the system is the same whether it is performed from the body 4 side or from the lens device side. However, in this case, the aperture value should be set to body 4.
Since the settings must be made with both the lens device 2 and the lens device 2, it is unavoidable that operability is significantly impaired.

In addition, in the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the aperture value calculated for the set shutter speed may be smaller than the aperture value of the lens device 2, or the maximum aperture value may be smaller than the aperture value of the lens device 2. There may be cases where the value is larger than the maximum aperture value, but in that case, it should be assumed that the value is possible for a certain year, and the maximum aperture value should be displayed or the maximum aperture value should be displayed to let the photographer know. Gives a warning by flashing the display.

In addition, in this 7' mode, the shutter speed calculated for the set aperture value may be smaller than the minimum shutter speed (low speed) that can be controlled by the body 4, or the maximum shutter speed may be smaller than the minimum shutter speed (low speed) that can be controlled by the body 4. (high speed) may occur, but in that case, the minimum shutter speed, ivy speed, or maximum shutter speed is displayed to let the photographer know that it is an uncontrollable value. flashes to warn you.

In addition, in this mode, especially the mode selector 38
When the aperture priority side is set, the range of the aperture value set by the dial 34 and the range of the aperture value that can be set by the lens device 2 side are dramatically different.

In other words, there is an upper limit and a lower limit for the aperture, that is, the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 used, and if the aperture of the lens set by the dial 34 on the side of the body 4 is larger than the maximum aperture of the photographic lens device 2. , it is impossible to control the aperture with the set aperture value.Q In such a case, the aperture value has been set incorrectly, and some countermeasure is required, but in this example, Such erroneous settings are treated as if the aperture value of the maximum aperture of the photographic lens, that is, the maximum aperture value has been set. This matter is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.

Conversely, if the aperture of the lens set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side is smaller than the minimum aperture of the photographic lens device 2, it is impossible to control the aperture at the set aperture value. In such a case, the aperture value has been set incorrectly, and some kind of countermeasure is required. However, in this example, in order to prevent such incorrect setting, It is assumed that the aperture value of , that is, the maximum aperture value has been set. This matter is exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode.

The above-mentioned shutter speed priority, aperture priority AE shooting and aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting modes all perform only aperture metering, and therefore the viewfinder's focusing and
There is a problem in that the screen 234 makes it impossible to check the effect of the aperture, especially the depth of field effect of the shutter release.

In particular, when shooting with AE, the aperture value displayed on the second display in the viewfinder is preset after the shutter is released, so the aperture value is set before the shutter is released. It is not possible to check the narrowing down based on 64. As is clear from the explanation of FIG. 2, when the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is set to mark black for AE photography, operating the aperture setting lever 64◆ will charge the AE. This is because the aperture control from the body 4' side to the lens device 2 side becomes impossible because the aperture lever 64 is locked and cannot be operated as described above. It seems like there isn't.

On the other hand, in the case of the light manual exposure adjustment shooting mode on the open side, the aperture is closed down and depending on the operation of l<-64, the
Through this operation, the photographer can adjust the aperture position to the aperture position preset with the ib setting ring 8 on the focusing screen 2.
Through 34, it is possible to know the state of the image when the lens device 2 is stopped down to the set position. By the way, depending on the aperture-down operation at this time, the camera device switches from aperture metering to aperture-down metering, and the camera changes depending on whether the mode selector switch 38 has selected shutter priority or aperture priority. The control operation of the device will be different. If the mode changeover switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the camera device will be in the aperture-priority AE shooting mode, and if the switch 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the camera device will be in the aperture-priority AE shooting mode. The camera enters photometry manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.

Now, to explain the aperture metering priority AE photography, the lens device 2 is always in a closed state, and its aperture p value changes depending on the setting position of the aperture setting ring 8. On the other hand, whatever aperture value is set on the dial 34 at this time, it is ignored. At this time, in the body 4, the brightness is measured by taking into account the aperture value of the subject through the lens device 2, which has been stopped down to the position set by the aperture p setting/gage 8, and the appropriate exposure is determined based on this. A shutter that seems to give. A speed calculation is performed. The shutter speed calculated in this way is displayed in the first display section in the viewfinder.
It is displayed as shown in Figure 0 (a)-1.

After the above operations, when the shutter is released, the lens device 2 side maintains the rh value in the narrowed down state.
The shutter is released in accordance with the shutter speed displayed at 44, allowing photographing with proper exposure.

Note that even in this mode, if the shutter speed calculated as a result of stop-down photometry is slower than the shutter speed that can be controlled by f with the body 4, shutter control at the calculated shutter speed is impossible. In such a case, in order to notify the photographer of this fact, the first display section 244 flashes a shutter speed corresponding to the longest time that shutter control is possible.

Furthermore, if the shutter speed calculated as a result of aperture photometry is faster than the shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, it is impossible to control the shutter at the calculated shutter speed. In such cases, the first step is to inform the photographer of the situation.
The fastest shutter speed at which shutter control is possible is displayed blinking on the display section.

Note that in this mode, the aperture value υ is not displayed on the second display section 250 in the finder. This is because, as described in the explanation of FIG. 2, the body 4 is not provided with means for inputting the aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.

Next, description will be given of manual exposure adjustment photography using aperture depth metering.The lens device 2 is always in the aperture-restricted state, and its aperture value changes depending on the setting position of the aperture setting ring 8.

On the other hand, the shutter speed is set using the dial 34 at this time, and the set shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 in the viewfinder. At this time, body 4
Then, the brightness is measured by taking into account the aperture value of the subject through the lens device 2, which has been apertured down to the position set by the aperture setting ring 8, and the appropriate exposure is determined using the set shutter speed. Determine whether it can be obtained or not. If it is determined that the combination of aperture value and shutter speed at this time will result in proper exposure or an exposure amount within a certain allowable range for proper exposure, then
00” on the second display section 250 as shown in ).

is displayed, informing the photographer that the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount can be obtained with the currently set aperture value and shutter speed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set combination of aperture value and shutter speed is underexposed for the proper exposure or allowable exposure amount, the second display section 250 will display the image shown in Figure 1O. a) As shown in -ff), a blinking ``OP'' is displayed, informing the photographer that the set aperture value and shutter speed are underexposed for the appropriate exposure. The user operates the aperture setting ring 8 to reset the aperture of the photographic lens device 20 to a larger diameter side, or operates the dial 34 to reset the shutter speed to a lower speed. Then, the set exposure is corrected until the second display section 250 shows 'OO' indicating proper exposure, and then the aperture or shutter speed necessary to obtain the proper exposure or allowable exposure amount is set. I can do things.

Conversely, m1 of the currently set aperture value and shutter speed
If it is determined that the exposure is overexposed with respect to the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount, a blinking "cL" is displayed on the second display section 250 as shown in FIG. 10(a)-ff). The photographer is notified that the set aperture value and shutter speed are overexposed compared to the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount.In response, the photographer operates the aperture setting ring 8 to take the picture. Adjust the aperture of the lens device 20 to a smaller diameter side, or operate the dial 34 to set the shutter speed to a higher speed side, and adjust the set exposure compensation to the second level. "00" indicates the appropriate exposure number on the display section 250 of
By doing so until the display is found, you can set the aperture or shutter speed necessary to obtain the appropriate exposure or allowable exposure amount.

In this aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the third display section 252 in the viewfinder displays "M" indicating the manual mode.

After the above operation, when you perform the shutter release, the lens device 2 maintains the aperture value in the closed state, and the shutter is released in the body 4 at the shutter speed set by the dial 34. Photographing with proper exposure is possible.Next, when the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the shutter speed priority mode, the pulp mode can be selected using the dial 34. When this dial 34 is set to normal, the shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button 18 is pressed, so the shutter speed follows the operator's will. is used for long-term evacuation.

Now, when performing pulp photography, when setting the pulp using the dial 34 and aligning the mark 12 with the index 7 using the aperture setting ring 8' on the lens device 2 side, the shutter speed is not set. Therefore, it is not possible to calculate the aperture value that should be controlled. Therefore, it is desirable that the aperture value is manually set to some value, but in this example, especially when the aperture value is not set, the pulp is generally used on the low brightness side. Focusing on this, the aperture value is configured to be controlled to an open aperture value. At this time, the first display section 244 in the viewfinder displays "buLb", and the second display section 250 displays the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use, as shown in FIG. b) −(I)
This is the circular shown in .

On the other hand, when performing pulp photography, when the pulp is set using the dial 34 and the aperture value is set on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value display 9 on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. , the camera device is in completely manual mode. At this time, the display in the finder is Fig. 10(b)-'
As shown in (1), buLb” is displayed on the first display section 244.
is displayed, and "M" is displayed on the third display section 252.

At this time, the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side is displayed on the second display section 250, which is dangerous, as has been stated many times before. This is because the body 4 side is not equipped with a means for inputting values.

Next, strobe photography will be described. This camera device, especially the camera system of this embodiment, mainly adopts a configuration to which the strobe shown in FIG. 5 is applied.
Automatic exposure control photography using a strobe is possible.

As mentioned above, the strobe shown in FIG.
, synchro contact 138, control signal contact 1
40, each of the data signal contacts 142 connects to the body 4.
It is electrically coupled to the side synchronization contact 52, control terminal 5.4, and data terminal 56.

Note that when considering this strobe, it is necessary to consider it in two ways: when it is used in automatic light control mode and when it is used in full emission mode.

The automatic light control mode is selected when a desired aperture value is set using the aperture setting dial 108, and is designed to provide an appropriate amount of exposure to the film surface at the set aperture bi. As mentioned above, the light emitting unit 102 emits a flash of light, and the light detection unit 104 detects the reflected light from the subject to dim the flash of light emitted from the light emitting unit 102. At this time, the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is applied to the body 4 side as an analog signal from the data signal contact 142 through the data terminal 56.

On the other hand, the full flash mode is selected when the mark "M" is set without setting the aperture value using the aperture setting dial 108, and the flash light emitted from the light emitting unit 102 is not set. The full amount of output possible with this strobe is emitted without being controlled. At this time, the fact that the strobe is in the full emission mode is given to the body 4 side from the data signal contact 142 through the data terminal 56 by analog interference at a predetermined level.

In addition, this su)? The camera device provides a signal to the camera device body 4 to control the shutter speed whether it is in the automatic light control mode or the full flash mode. This was considered in response to the fact that currently known focal brain shutters cannot synchronize the strobe at shutter speeds of 1/60th or 1/125th of a second or higher. In this case, the above-mentioned system is followed, but this control is applied in a manner that allows the user to freely select between two types: fully automatic or semi-automatic. - This switching between fully automatic and semi-automatic is performed by selecting the changeover switch 146, and if the fully automatic method is selected, what shutter speed can be selected using the dial 34 of the body 4. Even if the strobe is completely charged, the control signal contact 14 is released from the strobe side.
0. , a charging completion signal is input as a first level analog signal through the control terminal 54, the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN is set as the shutter speed on the body 4 side, and the semi-automatic method is selected, the dial on the body 4 '34 - strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN
Only when the above shutter speed is selected, a charging completion signal is given as a second level analog signal input from the strobe side through the control signal contact 140 and the control terminal 54 at the same time as the charging of the strobe is completed. The strobe synchronization speed TSYN is automatically set as the shutter speed on the body 4 side, and the shutter speed that was set below the strobe synchronization speed TSYN using the dial 34 on the body 4 remains as the shutter speed for control. It is said that

Furthermore, regardless of whether the strobe-side selector switch 146 is set to fully automatic mode or semi-automatic mode, if pulp is set using the O-dial 34 on the body 4 side, pulp will be given top priority. The shutter of the camera device will be pulp controlled.

On the other hand, no matter how the camera device body 4 and strobe 2 are set, the operation of the camera device will differ greatly depending on the position of the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. come. This depends on whether the mark 12 is selected to point to the index 7 by the aperture setting ring 8 or not.

Note that when a charging completion signal is input from the strobe side to the body 4 during flash photography, the first display section 2 in the viewfinder
In the lower two digits of 44, "EF" is displayed to inform the photographer that charging is complete and the strobe can fire. This display is as shown in FIG. 10(C).

Various control or operation methods will be listed below, but it goes without saying that the various methods described below need to be used appropriately depending on the purpose of photographing.

First, if the strobe is in auto-flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34. , the aperture setting ring 8 is set to mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but the strobe When charging is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to fully automatic, automatic light control, and automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to 1/60th of a second, for example, 1/60th of a second, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set to the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. Therefore, the aperture value set is controlled from the body 4 side. At this time, a display as shown in Figure 1O (C)-(I) is displayed in the finder.
The first display section 244 displays the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, for example, 1/60th of a second, and "EF" to notify the photographer that the strobe has been fully charged. is performed, and the second display section 250 shows
The aperture value set on the flash will be displayed. Note that if you release the shutter in this state, the flash will perform automatic flash control and the camera device will be controlled at the same shutter speed and aperture value as displayed in the viewfinder. , the flash is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set. In the case where mark 12 is not selected, at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged and When a signal indicating this is applied to the body 4', the camera device switches to fully automatic/automatic light control/manual strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to a strobe synchronized shutter speed, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, Figure 10 fc) is displayed in the viewfinder.
- The display as shown in (I[) will be displayed.The first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronization shutter speed and the EF to notify the photographer that strobe charging has been completed.
' is displayed on the second display section 250, the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250, and the aperture value set on the flash side is displayed on the second display section 250.
2 is displayed with an "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer needs to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side. When the shutter is released in this condition, the strobe will automatically control the flash and the camera device will be controlled using the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set on the lens device 2. Become.

Third, the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position and the aperture setting. This is the case when ring 8 is selected at mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting with the aperture open. When the robot is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to the normal, automatic flash, and automatic strobe shooting modes.At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is prioritized. ), and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is controlled from the body 4 side at the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. At this time, the image in the finder is shown in Figure 10 (c) - (I[[)
The first display section 24 displays a display as shown in FIG.
4, there is a "b" display to indicate that the flash is being shot, and an "E" display to notify the photographer that the strobe has been fully charged.
F" is displayed, and the aperture value set on the strobe side is displayed on the second display section 250. Note that if you release the shutter in this state, the strobe will automatically control the flash by itself. Then, the camera device is controlled by an arbitrary shutter speed according to the photographer's intention and an aperture value of τ, which is the same as that displayed in the viewfinder.

Fourth, the strobe is in automatic flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic, the shutter speed is set by dial 34, the valve position is set, and the aperture is set. This is a case where ring 8 does not select mark 12, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode, and lens device 2
Pulp photography is possible at the aperture value set on the side, but when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device will switch to Pulp, autoflash, and manual strobe. Switch to shooting mode. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographing lane 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(C)-([V) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display a "b" indicating that there is a situation regarding pulp photography. , "EF" is displayed to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete, and the second display section 250 displays -
The aperture value is displayed, and 'M' is displayed on the third display section 252 to indicate that the aperture needs to be adjusted manually using the aperture setting ring 8. It is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value displayed on the display section 252 of the lens device 2, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side. Automatically adjusts light emission independently,
The camera device is controlled by an arbitrary shutter speed depending on the photographer's intention and an aperture value manually set in the lens device 2.

Fifth, the flash is in automatic flash mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture is set. Picture 8 shows when mark 12 is selected. Before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE shooting, but when the strobe is fully charged, When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic/automatic light control/automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater than or equal to the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN.
Also, if the strobe synchronization shutter speed is lower than TSYN, the second setting is set with the dial 34, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is set with the aperture setting dial 1'0 on the strobe side.
It will be controlled from the body 4 side with the aperture value set by 8. At this time, the 10th mark is displayed in the finder.
A display as shown in FIGS.
The second display section 250 displays the aperture value set on the strobe side. is displayed. Note that when the shutter is released in this state, the strobe automatically performs automatic flash control and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed and aperture value as displayed in the viewfinder.

Sixth, if the flash is in autoflash mode, the shutter is set to semi-auto, and the shirt speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture is set to This is a case where the setting ring 8 does not select the mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but the strobe When charging is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic/automatic light control/manual strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 will be the strobe synchronization shutter speed if the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater than or equal to the strobe synchronization speed, and even if it is less than the strobe synchronization shutter speed. Ba,
The setting speed is set using the dial 34, and the aperture for shooting/zoom 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8.

At this time, a display as shown in FIG.
4 displays the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN or the set shutter speed and "EP" to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is completed, and the second display section 250 displays the strobe side The aperture value set in is displayed, and the third display section 252 displays "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture value using the aperture setting ring 8. In this case, it is necessary to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value S displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side. - When the camera is released, the strobe flash automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device is controlled using the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set on the lens device 2.

Seventh, if the strobe is in automatic dimming mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the shutter speed depends on the dial 34. This is a case where the setting ring 8 is set to mark 12. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the pulp shooting mode and is ready for pulp shooting at the maximum aperture value. When the strobe has completed charging and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp/automatic light control/automatic strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographing lens 20 is controlled from the body 4 side with the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side. It will be done. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(C)-■ will be displayed in the finder. The first display 244 displays "b" to indicate pulp photography and "EF" to notify the photographer that strobe charging is complete, and the second display 'fJ250 , the aperture value set on the flash will be displayed. Furthermore, when the shutter is released in this state, the flash automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device is controlled at the desired shutter speed and aperture value that is the same as the one displayed in the viewfinder. It happens.

Eighth, when the strobe is in automatic light control mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic, and the shutter speed is set to pulp position by dial 34, and the aperture is set to semi-automatic. This is a case where the setting ring 8 does not select mark 12, but at this time, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode before the strobe is fully charged, and pulp shooting is performed at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side. However, when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, automatic light control, and manual strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(C)-1 will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display "b" indicating pulp photography, and a strobe light. "EF" is displayed to notify the photographer that charging has been completed, and the second display section 250
The aperture value set on the flash side is displayed, and the second
The display section 252 displays "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture setting ring 8.
Therefore, the photographer needs to set the aperture on the lens device 2 side according to the aperture value displayed on the second display section 252 in the viewfinder, that is, the aperture value set on the strobe side. When the shutter is released, the flash automatically adjusts and emits light independently, and the camera device is controlled by an arbitrary shutter speed according to the photographer's intention and an aperture value manually set on the lens device 2. It happens.

Ninth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set in full automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is the case where mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority AE shooting mode and ready for AE-photography, but when the strobe is fully charged. When a signal indicating this is given to the body, the camera device switches to a fully automatic, full-power flash, minimum aperture strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed for body 4 is automatically set to flash.

The synchronized shutter speed TSYN is set to, for example, 1/60th of a second, and the aperture of the photographic lens device 2 is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10 Cdl-(I) will be displayed in the window, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed, for example, 1/60th of a second. The shutter speed will be displayed, and "EF" will be displayed to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete. Note that nothing is displayed on the second display section 250, but this does not necessarily mean that the lens device 2 is stopped down to the maximum aperture value to give a proper exposure, but rather warns the photographer of an incorrect operation. This is for the purpose of giving.

When the shutter is released in this state, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 as displayed in the viewfinder.

Tenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture is set to shutter speed. Setting ring 8 shows the case where mark 12 is not selected. At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged When a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to a fully automatic/full-power flash/manual strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is automatically set to a strobe synchronized shutter speed, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIGS. 10(d) to (11) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronization shutter speed and the strobe synchronization shutter speed. The photographer is informed that charging has been completed, and the false "EF" is displayed, and the third display section 252 shows "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the setting ring 8. A display is made. Therefore, the photographer uses the guide number calculation board 106 attached to the strobe to determine the aperture value to be set on the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject, and then uses the aperture setting ring 8
Depending on the situation, it is necessary to manually set the aperture.

When the shutter is released in this state, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set in the lens device 2.

11th, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to fully automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position using the dial 34, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position and the aperture setting. Ring 8 shows the case where mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting at maximum aperture, but when the strobe is charging When the process is completed and a signal indicating the completion is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to the pulp/full flash/minimum aperture strobe photography mode. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use. In addition, at this time, in the finder there is a message shown in Figure 10 (
d) - A display as shown in (II) shall be made;
The first indication part 244 includes a b indicating that pulp photography is being performed.
'' is displayed, and a temporary ``EF'' message is displayed to notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled at an arbitrary shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 according to the photographer's intention.

Twelfth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to full automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position by the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring. 8 has selected mark 12! However, at this time, the camera device is in the pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 before the strobe is fully charged, but the strobe is not fully charged. The signal indicating completion is body 4.
When given, the camera device switches to pulp, full flash, and manual strobe shooting modes. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is preferentially set to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8.

In addition, at this time, in the finder, there is a screen shown in FIG.
A display as shown in [v) will be displayed, and the first display section 244 will display 'b' to indicate that pulp photography is being performed, and will notify the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete. "EF" is displayed, and "M" is displayed on the third display section 252, indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer uses the guide number calculation board 106 attached to the strobe to determine the aperture value to be set on the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject, and then uses the aperture setting ring 8 Depending on the situation, it is necessary to manually set the aperture.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled by the arbitrary shutter speed and aperture value manually set on the lens device 2, depending on the photographer's intention. becomes.

Thirteenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set in semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is set in seconds using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8 is set. is the case where mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in shutter priority, AE shooting mode, and Al
The camera is ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic, full flash, and minimum aperture strobe shooting modes. If the shutter speed set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is higher than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TS", then the shutter speed is the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, and if the shutter speed is higher than the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN, or below the strobe synchronization shutter speed TSYN. If it is on the low speed side of
The aperture value of the photographic lens 2 is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. At this time, the 1st O
A display as shown in the figure (dl-ff) will be made, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed or the set shutter speed and notify the photographer that strobe charging has been completed. "E'F" is displayed.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe emits all light, and the camera device is controlled with the same shutter speed and maximum aperture value of the lens device 2 as displayed in the viewfinder.

Fourteenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to seconds using the dial 34, and the shutter speed and aperture settings are set. /g8 is the case when mark 12 is not selected.At this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode and ready to take pictures, but when the strobe is When charging is completed and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to semi-automatic, full flash, and manual strobe photography modes. At this time, in body 4. The shutter speed is body 4.
If the shutter speed set by the dial 34 is higher than the strobe synchronization shutter speed, it will be the strobe synchronization shutter speed, and if it is lower than the strobe synchronization shutter speed, the shutter speed set by the dial 34 will be used. The aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(d)-(■) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and the first display section 244 will display the strobe synchronized shutter speed or the set shutter speed. "EF" is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is completed, and the third display section 252 shows that the aperture needs to be adjusted manually using the setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer uses the guide number calculation board 106 attached to the strobe to determine the distance from the camera device to the subject.
Determine the aperture p value to be set on the aperture setting ring 8.
Depending on the situation, it is necessary to manually set the aperture.

In this state, when you release the shutter, the strobe will fire at full capacity, and the camera device will be controlled with the same shutter speed as displayed in the viewfinder and the aperture value manually set on lens device 2. .

Fifteenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set to semi-automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set to the pulp position using the dial 34, and the aperture setting ring 8. This is the case when mark 12 is selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in pulp shooting mode and ready for pulp shooting at maximum aperture, but when the strobe is fully charged When a signal indicative of this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to the pulp, full emission, and minimum diameter strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed in the body 4 is set preferentially to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is controlled to the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 in use. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10 (dl-(a)) will be displayed in the viewfinder, and a message "b" will be displayed on the first display section 244 indicating that pulp photography is being performed.
is displayed, and EF'' is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is complete.

When the shutter is released in this state, the strobe emits the full amount of light, and the camera device is controlled by the photographer's intention (an arbitrary shutter speed and the maximum aperture value of the lens device 2).

Sixteenth, the strobe is in full flash mode, the shutter is set in semi-automatic mode, and the shutter speed is set with the pulp position set by the dial 34 and the aperture setting ring 8. This is the case when mark 12 is not selected, but at this time, before the strobe is fully charged, the camera device is in the pulp shooting mode, and pulp photography is possible at the aperture value set on the lens device 2 side. However, when the strobe is fully charged and a signal indicating this is given to the body 4, the camera device switches to pulp, full flash, and manual strobe photography modes. At this time, the shutter speed of the body 4 is preferentially set to maintain the pulp, and the aperture of the photographic lens 2 is manually set and controlled by the aperture setting ring 8. At this time, a display as shown in FIG. 10(d)-1 will be displayed in the viewfinder.
b" is displayed and 'EF' is displayed to inform the photographer that charging of the strobe is completed, and the third display section 25
2 is displayed with "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually adjust the aperture using the setting ring 8. Therefore, the photographer must use the guide number calculation board 10 that comes with the strobe.
It is necessary to determine the aperture value to be set in the lens device 2 based on the distance from the camera device to the subject using the aperture setting ring 8, and to manually set the aperture using the aperture setting ring 8.

In this state, when the shutter is released, the strobe will fire at full capacity, and the camera device will be controlled by the arbitrary shutter speed and aperture value manually set on the lens device 2, depending on the photographer's intention. .

Note that in the above-mentioned strobe shooting mode, if the mode changeover switch 38 on the camera device body 4 side is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture setting value set by the dial 34 is completely ignored, and the aperture value is set on the strobe side. The aperture value set by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side or the maximum aperture value is controlled.

Now, when the strobe is in full automatic mode, the shutter speed is automatically set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed, for example 1/60th of a second, but when the strobe is in semi-automatic mode, the shutter speed is automatically set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed, e.g. If there is no shutter speed set on the side, there is a risk that it will not be possible to control the shutter speed below the strobe synchronization shutter speed. Therefore, in principle, each mode described above requires that the mode selector switch 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, but sometimes semi-automatic strobe photography is performed with the mode selector switch 38 set to the aperture priority side. It is also possible that it will be done.

Therefore, in order to deal with this problem, the camera of this embodiment
In the system, when in strobe shooting mode, the mote.

When the selector switch 38 is set to the aperture priority side,
Even if the semi-automatic mode is set on the strobe side, the shutter speed is set to the strobe synchronized shutter speed regardless of the state of the changeover switch 146, so that the control is controlled in a so-called fully automatic mode. This is based on the opinion that the semi-automatic mode is used only when there is some kind of intended rotation with respect to the shutter speed, so it is not used on the aperture priority side.

These are the shooting modes for strobe photography explained above.

Figure 11 depicts this in a diagram. however.

Although this diagram does not specifically mention the case of pulp photography, it is the same if you replace the knob with the shutter speed. The prevention system will be explained.

Originally, if a camera system is based on a comprehensive and rational system design, it must be designed to prevent erroneous operation or malfunction, but currently, as far as we know, Most of the exposure control means that can obtain the most accurate and good photographic images, such as the shutter device and the aperture device, are composed of mechanical components, and their operation is also a fairly complex mechanism. This is done by a mechanical sequence mechanism. On the other hand, in order to view the camera device as an overall system and apply rational control, it is necessary to introduce a wide range of electrical control mechanisms. Due to the limitations of the camera's interface and the complicated mechanism of the camera device, it is extremely difficult to create a configuration that completely prevents erroneous operations and malfunctions.In contrast, in this embodiment, the photographer If an erroneous operation is performed, the system detects the erroneous operation and notifies the photographer of the error. 1. A system that locks the shutter release so that it does not occur in order to prevent malfunctions caused by the erroneous operation. are being discontinued.

Regarding the camera device applied to this embodiment, what operations are considered to be erroneous operations?
The explanation will be given below according to the logical explanatory diagram () in FIG. 11. The erroneous operation described here is closely related to the operating characteristics of the lever 84 of the lens device 2 and the AE lever 94 on the body 4 side, as explained in FIG. In other words, when the mark 12 is selected and set with the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, the lens device 2 side considers it to be equivalent to the case where the maximum aperture value is selected as the aperture value. If no aperture control is performed by the AE lever 94, the lens device will be unconditionally stopped down to the minimum aperture position and cannot be controlled. Also, A
When attempting to perform E-photography, if the AI lever 94 is not charged, it is impossible to control the aperture of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side. In this embodiment, the above two cases are considered to be malfunctions and a warning lock is performed, but these cases are (1), (II), (
2), corresponds to the state shown by the hood. But especially @)
, mosquito) must be in the state after film winding is completed by operating the film winding lever 14. This is because the AE lever 94 is in the AE discharge state unless a special operation is performed before the AE charge is performed by film winding, and this state is not necessarily a malfunction state. Note that, as is clear from the explanation in Fig. 2, the AE charging state cannot exist when the aperture of the lens device 2 is narrowed down by the aperture lever 64, so () in Fig. 11 is blank. .

Let's consider in what cases the erroneous operation states shown in )-(11 to -) of FIG. 11 occur. The camera device is in the AE shooting mode with shutter speed priority or aperture priority depending on the state of the mode selector switch, and the viewfinder (1) in Figure 10(a) is displayed.
) or (II). In this state, the photographer actually stops down the lens device 2 to the aperture value displayed on the second display section 250 and tries to check the depth of field on the finder screen 234. Due to the structure of the lens device 94, it is not possible to narrow down the lens device 2 to the aperture value set or calculated on the body 4 side.If the lens device 2 were to be narrowed down by the aperture lever 64 despite these conditions, Since the aperture position set by the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 corresponds to the minimum aperture aperture position of this lens device 2, the lens device 2 is stopped down to the minimum aperture aperture position. This state corresponds to the states shown in FIG. 11(B)-(1) and (II), and clearly results in an erroneous operation. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 When the mark 12 is selected, the operation of the aperture lever 64 is restricted, so that such a situation is prevented from occurring. On the other hand, in order to confirm the depth of field, the photographer first takes the first step by setting the mark 12 on the aperture setting ring 8 of the bins device 2.
There is no problem in canceling the selection, manually setting the aperture value you want to check on the lens device 2 side, and then operating the aperture lever 64 to narrow down the lens device 2 to the set position. At this time, the camera device is in the stop-down photometering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode or the stop-down photometry aperture-priority AE shooting mode, and the depth of field can be confirmed.

In this state, as is clear from Fig. 2) and et al.
Lever 94 is in the AE discharge state.

However, if the photographer resets the mark 12t on the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 from this state, the first
The state shown in Figure 1(B)-(1) or (II) is reached, but as mentioned earlier, this is clearly an erroneous operation, and the viewfinder displays "EEEE EE" as shown in Figure 10(f).
” will be displayed flashing to indicate a warning lock, and the shutter will be locked so that the shutter cannot be released.

Furthermore, if the photographer cancels the aperture of the lens device 2 by pressing the aperture release button 66 from the state of FIG. 11 (03)-(1) or (If), then in the state of FIG.
Bait), as shown in a), the AE lever 94 returned to the AE shooting mode with the AE discharged and charged, and this was also an erroneous operation in that AE shooting was impossible.
In the finder, there is a message such as "EEEE" as shown in Figure 10(f).
A blinking display indicating a warning lock of "EE" is displayed, and the shutter is locked so that the shutter release cannot be performed.

Figure 1103) - (1), (II) In the O state, the 10th
The photographer who received a warning of an erroneous operation as shown in Figure (f) Ic,
By releasing the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 from the mark 1''2, it becomes possible to perform aperture tightening metering manual-ratio adjustment shooting or aperture tightening metering and aperture priority AE shooting. It is also possible to perform open metering manual exposure adjustment photography by opening the lens device 2.Furthermore, from this state, the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is opened.
When mark 12 is set in Figure 11 (B) -@),
As shown in (IV), the warning lock state is entered again, but this warning lock can be released by the following method.

Fig. 11 (8) - On), ff) o state, Fig. 10 (
f) The photographer who has received a warning of an erroneous operation as shown in K can release the aperture of the lens device 2 from the setting ring 8t-mark 12 to perform full-open photometry manual exposure adjustment photography. Alternatively, by operating the film winding lever 1'4 while holding down the multiple exposure button 16 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the AE lever 94 can be recharged to give shutter priority or aperture priority. It is also possible to perform AE photography.

Note that 03)-011)JV) in Figure 11 is determined to be a malfunction only when film winding is completed, and when film winding is not completed, it is treated as a shutter-priority or aperture-priority AE shooting mode. Figure 11 (B) =(
The states 1) and (...) are determined to be malfunctions regardless of whether film winding is completed or not.

As mentioned above, in the camera system of this embodiment, there is a gap between the mechanical configuration or the traditional lens device configuration and the various control mechanisms introduced for new improvements and functional enhancements. We actively try to improve the various constraints that occur to improve performance and expand the range, and we also issue warnings in the finder in case of unavoidable erroneous operations or malfunctions. The configuration is such that the photographer is notified and the shutter mechanism is closed to prevent photography from taking place.

Next, specific configurations provided to the first illustrated camera device for realizing various performances will be described in detail.

Conventionally known camera devices are equipped with an aperture control mechanism that determines the aperture of the lens device and a shutter mechanism that determines the exposure time for the film surface.
The two mechanisms are traditional.

In the future as well, configurations that include mechanical control mechanisms are expected to be common. However, in recent years, configurations in which electrical control mechanisms are added to various control mechanisms constituting camera systems have been proposed and realized. Most of the configurations with these electrical mechanisms are concentrated in the exposure control mechanism including the photometry system of the camera device, but this is because the general photometry system relies on the light guide conversion function. Since information such as subject brightness is input into the camera system as an electrical signal, in order to perform automatic exposure control,
This is because it is necessary to go through an interface between electricity and machinery.

A simple mechanism is sufficient for such an interface to perform a single function in a camera system, and the specific configuration has been known for a long time.
As the functions required of camera systems increase, their configurations also tend to become more complex. In contrast, currently
Many known camera systems apply relatively simple analog electrical control systems, but these are simply configured to perform either shutter speed priority or aperture priority functions. This is because it can be realized with a relatively simple and economical circuit configuration.

However, a configuration that has both shutter speed priority and aperture priority functions as well as various discrimination and judgment functions, such as the camera system of the above embodiment, is expected to be a considerably complicated configuration, but especially Applying a pure analog electric circuit to such a configuration not only poses problems in terms of accuracy, but also complicates the configuration, resulting in poor economic efficiency and an increase in the size of the device, so it is not the preferred method. I can't say that.

On the other hand, one possibility is to configure most of the control circuits with digital electrical circuits that can be integrated, but this would be useful for cameras with various functions, such as the camera system shown in Figure 1. This can be said to be an extremely rational method for realizing the device. This digital electric circuit is easier to design than analog electric circuits, and can easily implement various control modes. It also has the feature of being able to respond immediately to changes in specifications. The present invention is extremely suitable for application to equipment having various discrimination/judgment functions, measurement, and display functions, such as systems.

Therefore, most of the control system applied to the camera system of this embodiment is composed of digital electric circuits to improve reliability and economical efficiency.

Before explaining the system by which the camera device shown in the first diagram operates, we will explain how the camera device shown in the first diagram receives inputs regarding photometry data, setting data, operating conditions, operating states, etc. , I will explain how this is done through configuration. Considering the input of such various information is relatively important when constructing a digital system, especially when it comes to compactly housing various mechanical operating parts in a small space, such as a camera system. This is a major issue that must be taken into consideration in any system that uses this technology.

The camera device basically performs TTL photometry, and a photoelectric conversion element such as a CdS or silicon light-receiving element is used as a light-receiving element. The output of the photoelectric conversion element is an analog signal, which is then logarithmically compressed, that is, apex value converted, and then converted into digital information through an AD converter. The information obtained from such a photometry system is expressed as BVo in the apex value in the case of open photometry.
, and when BvS is the case of aperture metering, BVo=BV-AVo −, AVc (8)B, respectively.
Vs - BV AV AVc'<4) In the above formula, AVo is the open aperture value of the lens device 2, AV is the actual aperture value depending on the aperture, and AvC
corresponds to the bending error when the lens device 2 is opened, and AV (!' corresponds to the bending error when the lens device 2 is stopped down. Note that the above-mentioned confession errors A V c and A V ” correspond to the bending error when the lens device 2 is opened, and AV (!' corresponds to the bend error when the lens device 2 is stopped down. The necessary force is calculated based on the aperture value of No. 2; however, the curve error at the time of opening can be easily calculated because the aperture value is input from the lens device 2 side. Regarding the bending error during narrowing down,
Since there is no means to input the actual aperture value from the lens device 2 side to the body 491j, it is impossible to calculate it. Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, the bending error at the time of aperture is ignored, and it is assumed that BVs = BV - AV (5). The obtained data is data regarding the subject brightness expressed by the above equation (8) or (5).

The above data will later be converted to 8-bit digital data through an A-D converter, but the digital data of 1 and 2 have a weight of 1 1/8'' and a weight of The upper bit is binary data with a weight of "16". That is, the photometric data is converted into h-level precision digital data using the apex value.

For TTL photometry, a well-known circuit is used which logarithmically compresses an analog voltage signal proportional to the amount of received light, converts it into an analog signal corresponding to an apex value, and outputs the analog signal.

Further, as described above, this power camera device is provided with a photographic film ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 on the top surface of the body 4. This ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is used to set the ASA sensitivity of the film to be used, and the current tendency of commercially available films is that the ASA sensitivity is set in steps of one stop using the apex value. . Therefore, depending on this ASA sensitivity setting dial 40, the film sensitivity is ASA 16.20, 25.32.40.50.6.
4.80.100.125.160.200.250.
320.400.500.640, 800...
In this way, the T-stage stacking degree is input and set using the apex value. However, of course, the film sensitivity data set by this ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 will also be imported as a digital value, but it is not necessary to input a value equivalent to 1 in decimal in binary code. It's possible. On the other hand, all other data of this camera system is binary value code, but all other data of this camera system is binary value code.
Since the value is taken with precision of steps, it is not possible to match it with other data for digital operations, and it becomes necessary to perform complex arithmetic operations including multiplication and division. On the other hand, since the arithmetic results for actual control are obtained as binary values with a precision of one level, such complicated arithmetic operations become meaningless. Therefore, this camera system method is adopted.

"1" f That is, , 3 are respectively in 1 1 1 ■? +T= o, 375 ・・・・・・・・・・・・
...(6) can be approximated by one step, but the error that occurs at this time is ±0.042 steps, which is sufficiently acceptable compared to one step, that is, 0.125 steps. This is the error range obtained. Therefore, the film sensitivity set by the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 is directly input as a binary value code of i-stage stacking. In this camera 2 system, the film sensitivity is treated as 7-bit digital data, but the lowest bit of this digital data has a weight of "f" and the most significant bit has a weight of "8".
Of course, this binary data has a weight of (6). Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, the film sensitivity can be set from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 without looking in particular. 6-bit binary code was input as the data regarding the
The structure is such that the data is converted into bit data.

FIG. 12 shows a specific configuration for inputting digital data regarding film sensitivity from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40, which is connected to the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40 and rotates as the dial rotates. The dial rotation position is configured such that digital data corresponding to the dial rotation position can be obtained from the digital data setting plate 254 that is rotated. The digital data setting board 254 is connected to the insulation board 2.
A plurality of concentric conductive rings 256 corresponding to each bit of the film sensitivity setting data are disposed on the data setting plate 55, and electrical continuity is maintained with all of the conductive rings 256 through conductors 262 extending in the radial direction of the data setting plate 2540. common return 25
8. In addition, the common ring 258
is always in contact with the brush 260, but this brush 2
60 is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 261 and is also connected to an inverter 263. Note that between each conductive ring 256 there is a data track corresponding to each bit of film sensitivity setting data, and for each track there are 6 lira 7264 corresponding to each bit of data.
are facing each other. The track corresponds to each setting position of the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40, which sets the film sensitivity one step at a time, in each bit of the digital value of the setting data.
In order to establish electrical contact between the brush 264 corresponding to the weight 2'' and the conductive ring 256, a conductive portion 266 extending in the radial direction from the conductive ring 256 is provided at a portion facing each of the brushes 264. It is made up of

As will be explained in more detail below, this camera system is controlled by eight timing pulses. Such timing pulses are <TBO to TB7 as shown in FIG. This is no exception in the case of importing film sensitivity data, and in order to input various setting data or setting conditions, 6.
timing pulses are used.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 12, the timing pulse TBI is connected to each brush 264 through a diode 265.
~TB6t- is applied, but in this configuration, the brush 2 to which the timing pulse is applied
64 is not in contact with the conductive part 266, the power supply Vcc
is applied to the inverter 263 through the resistor 261, so the inverter 263 outputs a low level, and when the brush 264 is in contact with the conductive part 266, the input of the inverter 263 is the conductive ring 256, the brush 264.
, and the inverter 263 outputs a high level output.

That is, a six-digit digital value corresponding to the apex value of the ASA sensitivity set by the AsAm degree setting dial 40 is output from the master inverter 263 as the timing pulse T.
The bits are sequentially output from the lower digit bits in synchronization with BI to TB6. The lower 2 bits of this 6-bit ``1''``1'' are data related to - and T, and as mentioned earlier, if 1'' is set in any of the lower 11'' 2 bits. , ``1'' is set in the lower bit with a weight of ■, and in the end, ``r or''
It is converted into 7-bit 3-bit data including approximation data of "Y".As described above, the data Sv (apex value) related to film sensitivity is finally converted into 7-bit digital data of i-stage density. Through the configuration described above, the first illustrated camera device captures a digital value corresponding to the film sensitivity 5Vt-apex value of the photographic film used.

Furthermore, as described above, this camera device has a configuration for capturing the open aperture value AVo (apex value) of the photographic lens device 2 to be used as a digital value. This is because, as has been made clear in the explanation of FIG. An open mold 796 is provided for detecting mold. This open input pin 96 is connected to a mechanism that detects the amount of movement thereof and takes in the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 as a digital value. The detailed structure of this mechanism is shown in FIG. 14, and the open mold 796 has one end abutted against the open pin 90 and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the bottle 90. The amount is replaced by the amount of swinging around the axis 270 of the swinging lever <-268 which abuts the other end of the open input pin 96. The amount of this oscillation is determined according to its size.
A fan-shaped open aperture value detection plate 272 centered on the axis 270 is provided for this purpose. This open aperture value detection plate 2
Numeral 72 includes four concentric conductive rings 274 centered on an axis 270 corresponding to each bit of digital data of the open aperture value AVo, and arranged concentrically with respect to the pattern 274 on an insulating substrate. A common ring 2 connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 275 and further connected to an inverter 279.
76. Note that between each of the conductive rings 274 are data tracks corresponding to each bit of the open aperture value AVo data of the lens device 2, and for each track there are four data tracks provided at one end of the swing lever 268. brush 2
80 corresponds. The brush 280 is a common brush 2 that is juxtaposed with the brush 280 and is always in contact with the common ring 276.
It is in electrical continuity with 82. The conductive ring 27
4 corresponds to the amount of swing of the swing lever 268, and is electrically connected to the brush 280 corresponding to the track corresponding to "l" among the bits of the open aperture value AVo of the lens. A conductive portion 282 extends from a portion of each track that comes into contact with the brush 280, and extends from the release pin 90 of the lens device 2 to the release input pin 9 of the body 4.
The maximum aperture value A of the lens device 2 input through 6
V.

The digital value corresponding to the apex value is the brush 280.
and selective contact of the conductive portion 282.

Note that the timing pulse shown in FIG. 13 is also involved in taking in the open aperture value AVo of this lens device 2. Four timing pulses TB3 to TB6 are used to capture the open aperture value AVo.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 14, the timing pulses TB3 are connected to conductive rings 274 through diodes 277 respectively
~TB6 is applied, but in such a configuration, the conductive ring 27 to which the timing pulse is applied.
When the brush 280 is not in contact with the conductive part 282 extending from the conductive part 282, the power supply Vcc is applied to the inverter 279 through the resistor 275, so the inverter 279 goes low and outputs a bell. brush 280
When the inverter 279 is in contact with the inverter 279, the input of the inverter 279 is pulled to a low level through the common ring 276, the common brush 283, the brush 280, the conductive ring 274, and the diode 277. In other words, from the inverter 279, a 4-digit digital value corresponding to the maximum aperture value of the photographing lens device 2 input from the maximum aperture pin y90 through the maximum aperture input pin 92 is output.
The bits are sequentially output from the upper bits in synchronization with timing nodes TB3 to TB6. In this 4-bit data, the most significant ``1'' digit has a weight of 4'' and the least significant digit has a weight of 100.

When importing data regarding the open aperture value AVo, the issue is the open aperture value AV of the open aperture pin 90 provided in the lens device 2.

This is the difference in the amount of protrusion corresponding to . That is, in both the lens device 2 and the camera body 4, it is not possible to greatly change the amount of protrusion of the opening pin 90 for each open aperture value AVo due to space constraints. Since it has a removable structure, it is difficult to accurately read minute differences in protrusion amount. This is especially true for 2
When attempting to read the digital data of the decimal code from the open aperture value detection plate 272 as shown in FIG. If the brush 280 is located between the two positions, there is a risk of misreading due to limitations on the accuracy of the brush 280. The erroneously read data at this time is never intermediate data with adjacent data, but is taken out as completely different data, so such erroneously read data poses a major problem in the operation of the system. Therefore, when reading the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 in use, a method was considered in which a gray code is used instead of a binary code. As is well known in the Gray code, there is a difference between adjacent digital data.
Only the bits differ in content, and the 14th
Through the illustrated mechanism, it can be very effectively applied to reading digital data corresponding to the amount of movement of the open mold 796. Therefore, in the camera system of this embodiment, a gray code is applied to the mechanism for taking in the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2, and the binary value is used as data for processing such as calculation later. The structure is such that it is converted into a code.

To explain in more detail, the Gray code is the 15th
As shown in the comparison table in the figure, unlike normal binary codes, adjacent codes differ by only one bit, and l
The correspondence is shown to the O-adic number and the binary code '. Now, when we think about the relationship between Gray code and binary code, we find that the two do not have a completely random relationship. In other words, if we compare each digit of the binary code with each digit of the Gray code and then look at this binary °-code, we can see that the gray code "
The digit corresponding to the digit ``0'' has the same content as the digit one above it, and the digit corresponding to the digit ``I II'' in the Gray code has the same content as the digit next above it. I can see what's happening.

Therefore, the Gray code data taken in from the upper digits in synchronization with timing pulses TB3 to TB6 is converted into binary code by being taken out through a circuit as shown in Figure 16. You can get it.

That is, a J-type flip-flop produces a Q output as shown in FIG. 17 when the input to the J-type is the same human power. In other words, when both inputs to J- are "1", the Q output is inverted in synchronization with the next clock pulse, and when both inputs to J- are "O", the Q output maintains the same content. Therefore, if the Gray code is sequentially applied to the input terminal of the freetub flop J- from the most significant digits through a circuit as shown in Figure 16, the clock signal will be output from its Q output terminal.
The data obtained sequentially in synchronization with the pulse is
This is data for converting code into binary code.

As described above, the first illustrated camera device has the above-described configuration, and the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device used.
is imported as a digital value equivalent to the Apex value.

In this camera device, the lens device 2 has two modes: a manual state in which the aperture is set manually, that is, the aperture value desired by the photographer is preset using the aperture setting ring 8; As described above, the provision of a mechanism for transmitting to the body 4 whether the mark 12 is in the automatic state in which the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 is provided as described above.

That is, there is an aperture setting on the lens device 2 side, and an AE pin 92 that protrudes when the mark 12 is selected by the ring 8.
is provided on the body 4 side, facing the AE pin 92 and detecting that the AE pin 92 has protruded.
Although a detection section 100 is provided, this AE detection section 10
0 is interlocked with switch 284 as shown in FIG. This switch 284 is a normally closed contact, and one end is connected to a resistor 2.
It is connected to the power supply Vcc through 75 and to the input end of the inverter 279, and the other end is connected to the diode 2.
77, a realignment pulse TB1 is applied. That is, the state of the switch 284 is sensed by the timing pulse T''Bl, and in the closed state, the input of the inverter 279 is pulled to a low level through the switch 284 and the diode 277. The inverter 279 outputs a high level, and in the open state, the power supply Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the inverter 279 through the resistor 275.
The inverter 279 provides a low level output.

Therefore, when the AE pin 92 is not protruding, that is, in the manual state, the inverter 279 outputs a high level in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1, and when the AE pin is protruding, that is, in the automatic state. In this state, the inverter 279 outputs a low level output in synchronization with the timing pulse TBz.

Through the above-described configuration, the camera system of this embodiment is in a state where the aperture setting conditions are determined by the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, that is, the aperture presetting is performed on the lens side. It incorporates conditions such as whether it exists or whether it is in a state that is performed on the body side. In addition, in the following explanation, the timing signal from the inverter 279 is
A high level signal output in synchronization with pulse TBI is called an MNAL signal.

The first illustrated camera device also includes a lens device 2 and a body 4.
As mentioned above, the configuration is such that the lens can be narrowed down by operating the side aperture lever 64, but this aperture lever 64Fi only has the function of mechanically narrowing down the lens device 2. Not Kx
As shown in FIG. 4, it is linked to a switch 286 for detecting that the lens device 2 is in the aperture state.

The switch 286 is a normally open contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 27.
5 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
It is connected to the input end of 79, and the other end is connected to the diode 27.
7, a timing pulse TB2 is applied. That is, the switch 2-86 has its state sensed by the timing pulse TB2, and when it is in the open state, the resistor 27 is connected to the input terminal of the inverter 279.
5, the power supply Vcc is applied through the inverter 2.
79 outputs a low level, and in the closed state, the input of the inverter 279 is pulled to a low level through the switch 286 and the diode 277, so the inverter 279 outputs a high level. Therefore,
When the aperture lever 64 is operated to bring the photographic lens 2 into the aperture state, the inverter 279 outputs a high level in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2.

Through the configuration as described above, the camera system of this embodiment incorporates the condition regarding whether or not the lens device 2 is in the stopped-down state. In the following description, the no-i level signal outputted from the inverter 279 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2 will be referred to as a 5PDW signal.

As is clear from the above explanation, the MNAL signal is output from the fourteenth illustrated inverter 279 in synchronization with the timing of the timing pulse TBI.
This means that the 5PDW signal is output in synchronization with the timing pulse of B2, and the data regarding the open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used is output sequentially from the upper digit side in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6. However, the output of the inverter 279 corresponds to the timing pulses TB1 to TB.
They will be separated as appropriate according to 6. Note that this configuration will be detailed later.

As described above, the first illustrated camera device 1 includes a dial 34 on the front surface of the body 4 for setting the shutter speed or aperture value desired by the photographer. This dial 34 controls the shutter speed TV (apex value) when shooting with shutter priority, and the aperture value AV (apex value) when shooting with aperture priority.
The specific configuration is similar to the configuration for inputting the digital value of film sensitivity from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40. That is, as shown in FIG. 18, the dial 34 is constructed so that digital data corresponding to the rotational position of the dial is input into the system from a digital data setting plate 288 that is rotated together with the dial 34.

The digital data setting board 288 has a plurality of concentric conductive rings 292 corresponding to digital reminder bits of shutter speed TV or aperture value AV data on an insulating substrate, and a plurality of concentric conductive rings 292 extending in the radial direction of the data setting board 288. Conductor 2
A common ring 294 maintains electrical continuity with all of the conductive rings 292 through a common ring 294. Note that the common ring 294 is always in contact with the brush 296, and this brush 296 is connected to the power supply Vc through a resistor 297.
c and is also connected to an inverter 299.

Note that between each conductive ring 292 there is a data track corresponding to each bit of digital data of shutter speed TV or aperture value AV, and for each track there are five brushes corresponding to each bit of data. 290 are in contact. The track has shutter speed TV or aperture value AV
Electrical contact is made between the brush 290 and the conductive ring 292 corresponding to each bit of the digital value of the setting data that is "l" corresponding to each setting position of the dial 34 for setting the setting data. To this end, a conductive portion 300 extending radially from the conductive ring 256 is disposed at a portion that contacts each of the brushes 290.

Note that from this configuration, the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV
Timing pulses are also involved in order to capture the information. In the configuration shown in FIG. 18, there are five brushes 29.
Among the timing pulses, TB2 to TB6 are applied to the timing pulses TB2 to TB6 through the diodes 301, respectively. If they are not connected, the power supply Vcc is applied to the inverter 299 through the resistor 297, so the inverter 263 is in the low
A level output is performed, and the brush 290 is connected to the conductive part 300.
, the input of the inverter 299 is connected to the conductive ring 292, the brush 290 . Since it is pulled to the low level through the diode 301, the inno(-299) outputs the i-level. That is, the inverter 29
From 9, a 5-digit digital value corresponding to the apex value of the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV set by the dial 34 is sequentially output from the lower digit bit in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. . The least significant bit of this 5-bit data has a weight of 1'', and the most significant bit has a weight of 8''.

By the way, depending on the setting of the dial 34, it is necessary to specify whether the digital data obtained through the above-mentioned configuration is data related to the shutter speed TV or data related to the aperture value AV, but this distinction cannot be made. A mode changeover switch 38 provided on the top surface of the body 4 is provided for this purpose. This mode changeover switch 38
is interlocked with a switch 302 that closes when the aperture priority mode is set.

This switch 302 is a normally open contact, and one end is connected to the resistor 29.
7 to the power supply Vcc and the inverter 2
It is connected to the input end of 99, and the narrow end is connected to the diode 30.
1, i.e., the switch 302 is applied with the timing pulse TBI through the timing pulse TBI.
Its state is sensed by Bl, and when it is in the open state, the power supply Vcc is applied to the input terminal of the inverter 299 through the resistor 297, so the inverter 299 outputs a low level and is in the closed state. In this case, the input of the inverter 299 is connected to the switch 302 and the diode 3.
Since the inverter 299 is pulled to a low level through 01, the inverter 299 outputs a high level. Therefore, when the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the aperture priority mode side, the inverter 299 outputs a noise level in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI, and the mode selector switch 38 is switched to the shutter priority mode. When switching to the priority mode side, the inverter 29? A low level output is made from.

Through the configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment determines whether the data set by the dial 34 is related to the shutter speed TV or the aperture value. In the following description, the no-i level signal outputted from the inverter 299 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1 will be referred to as an ASLC signal.

In this embodiment, the shutter speed TV is selected and set from values in 1-step increments using the dial 34, and the aperture value is selected from values in 7-step increments. It is composed of: In other words, even though the shutter speed is set in 1 step increments, the dial 34 also needs to set the aperture value including the data in λ steps. The shutter speed including the stage data will be set. In order to deal with this problem, in this embodiment, the data regarding the shutter speed is set by multiplying the necessary setting digital value by 7, and the digital value read out according to the setting position of the dial 34 is set. The data is later doubled and converted into a digital value equivalent to the apex value related to shutter speed.
It is used as a data TV.

As mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device has an inverter 29
9, an AsLC signal is output in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI to determine whether the data set by the dial 34 is related to the shutter speed or the aperture value. - The data set as pulses will be output sequentially from the upper digit side, but the output of the inverter 299 will be appropriately divided according to the timing pulses TBI-TB6. Note that this configuration will be detailed later.

Through the configuration described above, the camera system of this embodiment captures the shutter speed TV or aperture value AV set by the photographer through the dial 34 as a digital value equivalent to the apex value.

Further, this camera device has a configuration for detecting the minimum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used. This is the second
As clarified in the explanation of the figure, the lens device 2′′ is
A minimum aperture pin 91 having a protrusion amount corresponding to the minimum aperture value of the lens is provided, and the body 4 side is provided with a minimum aperture pin 97 for mainly detecting the protrusion amount of the minimum aperture pin 91. This minimum aperture manual pin 97 is connected to a mechanism for detecting the amount of movement thereof and determining to which value the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2 belongs among a plurality of predetermined aperture values. Ru.

The detailed configuration of this mechanism is shown in FIG. 19, in which a minimum diameter input pin 97 of 7 mm has one end in contact with the minimum diameter pin 91, and moves according to the amount of protrusion of the pin 91. However, this amount of movement is replaced by the amount of swinging of the swinging lever 304, which contacts the other end of the minimum diameter input pin 97, about the shaft 303. This amount of oscillation is F11, F16. F22. F32. A fan-shaped minimum aperture aperture detection plate 306 centered on the axis 303 is used for selecting one of the aperture values of F45° and F64. This minimum aperture aperture detection plate 306 is mounted on an insulating substrate with F-number Fil, F16. F22. F32. Six electrodes 308 are arranged in the circumferential direction of the detection plate so that the aperture value of F45° to F64 can be selected. The lever 304 can be brought into contact selectively depending on the amount of swinging of the lever 304.

At the same time, the minimum diameter aperture detection plate 3061 has a common electrode 310 extending in its circumferential direction, and the brush 305
is always connected to the common type [310
The common electrode 310 is in sliding contact with the common electrode 310 and is configured to bridge between one of the electrodes 30'8 and the common electrode 310. The common electrode 310 is connected to the power supply Vcc through a resistor 314 and to the input terminal of an inverter 316, and the six electrodes 308 are applied with timing pulses TBI to TB5 through diodes 312, respectively. .

In this configuration, the amount of protrusion of the minimum aperture pin 91 having a protrusion amount corresponding to the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2 is detected by the minimum aperture input pin 97 on the body 4 side, and the brush 305 is According to the amount of movement of the aperture input pin 97, one of the six electrodes 308 is selected and electrically connected to the common electrode 3i0. Now, a diode 312 is connected to the electrode 308 that is in contact with the brush 305.
If the corresponding timing pulse is not input through the inverter 308, the input terminal of the inverter 316 will be at a high level depending on the power supply Vcc, so its output will be at a low level. When a timing pulse is input, the input terminal of the inverter 3160 becomes a low level, so its output becomes a high level. That is, the above-mentioned input ζ-Y 316
From then on, a high level output is performed in synchronization with the timing pulse corresponding to the detected minimum aperture value, and the output of the inverter 316 is divided based on the timing pulses TBI and TB6. Therefore, the detected minimum aperture value is Fll.

F16. F22. F32. F45. It is possible to detect which value of F64 the value corresponds to.

As mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device can input the minimum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used, but in the following explanation, the output signal of the inverter 316 will be collectively referred to as AMAX. It is called AX'.

As is clear from the above explanation, the maximum aperture value data A of the photographic lens device using the set film sensitivity degota Sv1
VO, manual state, automatic state discrimination signal MNAL,
Lens device aperture signal 5PDW, shutter speed TV
Alternatively, the setting data of the aperture value AV, the aperture priority mode selection signal ASLC, the minimum aperture aperture detection signal AMAX of the photographic lens device used, etc. are all taken in in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1 to TB6.

That is, as shown in FIG.
SV) having a weight of "8" with respect to the film sensitivity SV is sequentially output in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6. This film sensitivity S
As mentioned above, the data related to v is converted. In addition, the inverter 279 (Fig. 14) outputs a MNAL signal indicating that the aperture is selected on the lens device 2 side in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI, and in synchronization with the timing pulse %, A 5PDW signal indicating that the lens device 2 is in the aperture state is output, and in synchronization with the timing pulse TB321r], the gray "1" code regarding the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 in use is output.・Data AVoGC has a weight of 100 and pit A
The signals are sequentially output up to Vo. The gray code data AVooc regarding the open aperture value AVo of the GC lens device 2 is later converted into binary code data AvO, as described above. Further, the inverter 299 (FIG. 18) outputs a signal ASLC indicating the aperture priority mode in synchronization with the timing pulse TB1, and also outputs a signal ASLC indicating the aperture priority mode.
~ In synchronization with TB6, data regarding the set shutter speed TV or aperture value AV is output. Note that the data output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2 has a weight of 100, and the data output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB3 has a weight of ``1'', and the data output in synchronization with the timing pulse TB2 has a weight of 100. (The data output in synchronization with pulse TB4 has a weight of 2", and the timing pulse T■
The data output in synchronization with timing pulse T has a weight of 4, and the data output in synchronization with timing pulse TB6 has a weight of 8. In contrast, the shutter speed input from the common dial 34 is 1.
``Since it is set by amateurs, the shutter speed is 1.''
The bit Tv1 with a weight of is the timing pulse TB2
Bit TV2 has a weight of 2' as data with a weight of "1" in synchronization with the timing pulse TB3. Bit TV4 is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4 as data with a weight of "2", and pit TV8 with a weight of 18" is synchronized with the timing pulse TBS as data with a weight of "4". The TV16 with a weight of ``8'' is respectively taken in as data with a weight of ``8'' in synchronization with the timing pulse TB5. To put it another way, the data regarding the shutter speed TV is multiplied by 100, and after matching the accuracy of the aperture value data as 7-stop accuracy data,
This is the same as the setting in .

Therefore, the timing pulse TB from inverter 299
When handling the data output in synchronization with TB2 to TB6 as shutter speed TV, it is doubled and used.

Further, from the inverter 316 (FIG. 19), the minimum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used is the F number, Fil, F.
16. F22. F32. F45. A signal A MA be done.

The first illustrated camera device has other switch mechanisms for setting various operating conditions, and the switch mechanism linked to the shutter release button 18 is one of eleven of them.

This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21. When the shutter release button 18 is pressed, the switch S1 is closed and a high level output is generated through the inverter II, which is necessary after the shutter release. This starts the camera operation. Note that these movements are caused by the lifting of the reflex mirror,
This includes operations such as closing down the aperture of the lens device 2 to a preset position, and starting to run the front curtain of a two-curtain running type/focal plane/shutter. In the following description, this switch mechanism will be referred to as SW2, and its output signal will be referred to as SR.

Further, the selector lever 22 is linked to two switch mechanisms. One is a switch mechanism for AE lock, and this switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21. When the selector lever 22 is set to the position where the mark 26 is selected, the switch 81 is Close and
A high level output is made through the inverter 1, and the amount of photometry is held fixed based on the high level output.

In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5AELK.
, its output signal is called AELK. The other one is °, a switch mechanism for self-timer cent.
This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21, and when the selector lever 22 is set to the position where the mark 28 is selected, the switch mechanism is closed and a high level output is made through the inverter If. , high with
So-called self-timer photography is performed in which the shutter is released after a certain period of time has elapsed after the shutter e-release button/18 is pressed depending on the level output. In the following explanation, the switch mechanism will be referred to as 5SEL.
F.

The output signal is called 5ELP.

In addition, the first illustrated camera device includes other switches or mechanisms for determining various operating states. First, body 4
An AE charge detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether or not the AE lever 94 provided on the side is in the AE charge state. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 21, and is configured such that when the AE lever 94 is in the AH charging state, the switch S closes the circuit and outputs "1" from the inverter 1. be. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5AEC.
G1 The output signal is called AECG.

Further, a winding completion detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether or not winding of the film is completed. This switch mechanism has a seven-opening mechanism as shown in FIG. S1 is closed and the inverter If is configured to output "1". Note that the switch S1 is a shutter
After the k-rise, the required actions are performed in sequence, and the two-act running type
The rear curtain of the focal plane shutter remains closed until the end of its travel. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5WNUP, and its output signal will be referred to as W.
It is called the NUP signal.

Furthermore, a front curtain running detection switch mechanism is provided to detect whether the front curtain of the focal plane shutter has started running. This switch mechanism has a configuration as shown in FIG. 22. When the front curtain starts running, switch S2, which had been closed until then, opens, and the "1" output that had been made until then changes to "0". ``It is configured so that it becomes an output. The output of this switch mechanism is used to time the shutter speed and control the travel start time of the trailing curtain. In the following explanation, this switch mechanism will be referred to as 5CTST, and its output signal will be referred to as CTST.0 Also, as mentioned above, the first illustrated camera device has an aperture switch for controlling the lens device 2. A mechanism is provided for presetting from the body 4 side, and the outline of the operation of this mechanism has already been described in the explanation of FIG.

That is, in the state immediately before shutter release, the AE lever 94 is locked in the A'E charge position, and the aperture presetting lever 84 on the lens device 2 side is moved to the open aperture of the lens device 2. It is held in the sift reset position. This locked state is released when the shutter is released, but due to the release of the lock, the AE lever 94 is released from holding the Leno (-84), which is biased toward the minimum aperture preset side. Start traveling towards the caliber preset side.

At the same time, by detecting the amount of movement of the lever 84 by pulse means, the preset number of aperture stages of the aperture by the moving lever 84 (which increases as the lever 84 moves) can be determined. When the number of aperture stages for control matches, the AE lever 94 is cranked to stop the lever 84 at a position where it has traveled by the number of nine aperture stages for control. Through the above operations, it is possible to reset the aperture of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side.
What is shown in FIG. 23 is a mechanism for converting and detecting the travel distance of the Leno (-84). AE Renoku-94 is integrated with arm 318, and this arm 3.18
A bin 324 is attached to an arm 322 that can swing around an axis 320.
It is rotatably held by. With this configuration, the AE lever 94 is movable in the direction of arrow a or σ, and is lightly biased in the direction of arrow a by a spring (not shown). Renoku-326 is rotatably supported by a shaft 327, and part of it is connected to the arm 32 by a pin 328.
8 is rotatably connected to the AE lever 94, and this reno <-326 is provided in order to obtain a nox number corresponding to the traveling distance of the AE lever 94. The reno (-326) is equipped with a brush 330 at its tip and swings about a shaft 327 in the direction of the arrow a or a with respect to the movement of the AE lever 94 in the direction of the arrow a or σ. The brush 330
is always in sliding contact with the fan-shaped pulse generating plate 322, and a part thereof is always in contact with the common electrode 334 which is connected to the ground.
A comb-shaped electrode 336 with other parts protruding in the fan-shaped radial direction
is facing. The circular electrodes 336 are electrically connected to each other and are connected to a power source Vcc through a resistor 338 and to an input terminal of an inverter 340. power 1
If the AE lever 94 moves in the direction of the arrow a or σ while applying force, the brush 330 moves toward the nocilus generating plate 33? At this time, the brush 33 slides in contact with the arrow and moves in the direction of arrow a.
0 moves while repeating contact and non-contact with the comb-shaped electrode 336, but when in contact, the inno (-
The input terminal of the inverter 340 is pulled to the ground side and becomes a low level, and its output becomes a].I level. When the one-way valve is in contact, the input terminal of the inverter 340 becomes a high level due to the power supply Vcc. The output becomes low level. Therefore, if the AE lens (-94) moves from the locked position in the AE charging state in the direction of the arrow σ according to the biasing force of the lever 84 on the lens device 2 side, the brush 330 will naturally also move in the direction of the arrow a. , a pulse signal corresponding to the traveling distance of the AB bar 94 is obtained from the inverter 340. Therefore, by counting the number of pulses of this pulse signal, the traveling distance of the AE lever 94, that is, depending on the lever 84, is obtained. By knowing the preset position of the number of aperture stages and clamping the AE lever 94 when the desired number of aperture stages is reached, the aperture can be preset using the lever 84 of the lens device 2.

Note that there is naturally a difference in operating time between mechanical operating means such as the AE lever mechanism and clamp mechanism, and electrical means for counting the output pulse signals of the inverter 340. Needless to say, the problem must be solved by mechanical or electrical correction based on empirical data.

Further, a pulse generating plate 33 having a configuration as shown in FIG.
Although the pulses obtained through a contact mechanism such as 2 are not necessarily shaped pulses whose waveforms are suitable for counting, they are shaped to some extent when inverted through the inverter 340. However, if necessary, further waveform shaping may be performed using a waveform shaping means.

Through the configuration described above, this camera system can preset and set the aperture of the lens/lens device 2 from the body side, and the aperture can be preset by digital means of counting the number of pulses. Since the clamp position of the lever is determined for the purpose, extremely accurate aperture presetting is possible. In addition, in the following explanation,
The pulse signal for detecting the position of the AE lever 94, including the output of the inverter 340, is collectively referred to as FPC.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment automatically performs strobe photography when a strobe is inserted. Explain. In the same figure, 342
is an automatic flash unit that controls the amount of light emitted according to the reflected light from the subject.The elements for controlling the amount of light are the film sensitivity information from the film sensitivity setting dial 106 and the information from the aperture setting dial 108. Aperture value information is used.

The configuration of the strobe unit 342 is well known, so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the strobe unit 342 will not be described in detail.
In order for the unit 342 to emit strobe light, a discharge capacitor (not shown) must be charged to a required voltage. Upon completion of charging of the capacitor, the strobe unit 342 becomes capable of emitting light, and in order to inform the outside of this, a signal indicating the completion of charging of the discharging capacitor is outputted through the signal line 344. This signal is introduced into the current circuit 346, but at this time, this current circuit 346 operates according to the state of the changeover switch 146.
A first current amount signal as a fully automatic charging completion signal and a second current amount signal as a semi-automatic charging completion signal can be received from the control contact 140. Note that when the first current amount or the second current amount can flow from the control terminal 54 to the control contact 140, the camera device detects this and automatically switches the camera to strobe photography mode. Then, instead of the analog information from the TTL photometry system (not shown) built into the body 4, the circuit switches to a circuit that converts analog information from the data terminal 56 into digital data and takes in the analog information. As mentioned earlier, when the camera device switches to strobe photography mode in response to the first current amount (fully automatic charging completion signal), the shutter speed will be automatically activated regardless of what shutter speed is set on the body 4 side. target 60
When the camera device switches to strobe photography mode based on the second current amount (semi-automatic charge completion signal), the shutter speed is controlled to be 1/60th of a second or more on the body 4 side. Only when the speed is set, it will be automatically controlled to 1/60th of a second. - 10,000, the date Ushioko 56 receives data regarding the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe side from the data contact 142 as analog information through the level setting device 348 directly connected to the aperture setting dial 108. taking it. This analog information is A-D converted, taken into the camera device as digital information, and used as data for aperture control.

When the camera device enters the system strobe shooting mode by receiving a fully automatic or semi-automatic charging completion signal from the strobe side, when the shutter is released, the flash is sent to the strobe unit 342 through the synchronization contact 52.138 to the body 4. A light emission command is given in synchronization with the shutter movement of the
The strobe unit 342 operates automatically, while the camera device releases the shutter at a shutter speed of 1/60th of a second or less (in the case of semi-automatic mode), and also releases the shutter according to the aperture value set on the strobe side. Performs aperture control.

In the following explanation, the signal indicating the completion of fully automatic charging including the first current amount detected through the control terminal 54 will be referred to as the C8Al signal, and the signal indicating the completion of semi-automatic charging including the second amount of current will be referred to as the C8Al signal. The C8A2 signal and these two signals indicating the completion of charging are collectively referred to as the C8A signal. Also,
Data regarding the aperture value input through the data terminal 56 is collectively referred to as a VSA signal.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment is equipped with an external photometer to enable a wider range of exposure control.
The operation of the external photometer will be described in detail according to the illustrated block diagram of the external photometer.

In FIG. 25, 350 is a reflected light type photometer, which has a function of directly measuring the reflected light from an object without passing through a photographic lens or the like. This external photometer 350 is equipped with a current circuit 352 into which a third current amount as an external photometry mode signal can flow from a terminal 54 on the camera device side through a contact 146. On the camera device side, when a current with the third current amount can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 146, it detects this and automatically switches to the external photometry mode, In place of the analog information from the TTL photometry system, a circuit is selected that converts the analog information from the data terminal 56 into digital data. At the same time, from the external photometer 350, subject brightness information obtained as a result of photometry is given as analog information from the data contact 148- to the data terminal 56, but this analog information is converted from A to D and converted into digital information. The data is imported into the camera device and used as data for exposure control.

Further, in FIG. 26, 354 is an incident light type photometer, which has a function of directly measuring the illuminance of the subject area. This external photometer 354, like the photometer shown in FIG. On the side of the camera device equipped with the incident light type photometer, when the current of the third current amount can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 166, it detects this and automatically switches to the external photometry mode, and the body In place of the analog information from the TTL photometry system (not shown) built in the data terminal 56, a circuit is selected that converts the analog information from the data terminal 56 into digital data and takes it in. At the same time, from the external photometer 354, illuminance information obtained as a result of photometry is provided from the data contact 168 to the data terminal 56 as analog information, and the analog information is A-D converted and sent to the camera device as digital information. and used as data for exposure control. At this time, the data input to the camera device is illuminance information measured using the incident light method, but it is formatted in advance so that it can be treated equivalently to subject brightness information measured using the reflected light method. No particular problem will occur if you convert it.

As is clear from the above explanation, it is possible to treat both reflected light type and incident light type external photometers in the same way, but there are particular differences in the incident light type. , it has an AE lock function for the camera device.

That is, the incident light type photometer 354 is configured to perform photometry and output photometry data to the terminal 168 only while the photometry button 174 is pressed. Therefore, the metering button 17
4 is not pressed and no photometric data is output to the terminal 168, it is preferable that the camera 2 device be in the A Eo sock state. Therefore, the photometry button 7174'
is operated in conjunction with a normally closed switch (not shown), and the switch has a contact 170. 'AE lock t7) switch 5AEL built into the body 2 via the AE lock terminal 58
I (connected in series.

As mentioned above, the camera system of this embodiment can be applied with a reflected light type or an incident light type external photometer. A signal indicating the external photometry mode including the current amount of
These signals are collectively referred to as LM signals, and data related to the photometric amount inputted through the data terminal 56 are referred to as OB double signals.

With this OB double signal apex value, the subject brightness BVt7c
be equivalent.

Through the mechanical configuration described in detail above, the camera system of this embodiment receives various input data, setting data, and information regarding the operating state of setting conditions.
I'm reading.

As is clear from the above explanation, the camera system of this embodiment inputs data necessary for exposure control and information regarding operating conditions and operating states through various means. It is processed by the digital control system described next.

As previously explained, the camera system of this embodiment performs operation control that organically links the overall system, and
We have applied a digital control system as a control system in order to simplify the adjustment during manufacturing due to its small size and high precision, and to enable the most rational expansion of production based on a large number of input information. There is.

An example of a digital control system applied to the camera system of the present invention will be explained below. The system has not been deployed properly. The reason is that the camera device mechanism applied to this embodiment has not reached the point where it has an ideal configuration that is a huge leap forward from the concept of a conventionally known camera mechanism, and the camera system of this embodiment also does not have an ideal configuration. This is because it cannot exceed that. FIG. 27 is a schematic block diagram of a digital control system adopted for the camera device shown in FIG. 1 to satisfy the various performances described above. For a mechanism part 358 that includes various mechanisms, such as a shutter travel mechanism, a diaphragm mechanism, a mirror up mechanism, a quick return mechanism, etc., as well as functions for setting various numerical data or operating conditions, and a function for determining the operating state of each mechanism. Divided into three large blocks. These three large blocks are an input control section 360, a central control section 362, and an output control section 364, each of which is connected to one bus line 366.
are connected. Note that the mechanism section 358 includes the information input section described above, that is, a photometry section, various data setting sections,
In addition to various condition setting sections, various operating state discriminating sections, etc., various exposure control mechanisms and various display mechanisms are provided.

The input control section 360 receives photometric analog data, various condition setting signals, and operating state determination function codes from the mechanism section 358 through an input system 368, and the data, signals, etc. are input here. It is converted into digital information suitable for difficult processing and transferred to the central control unit 362 via an input bus line 370.

The central control section 362 receives various setting data, various condition setting signals, etc. from the mechanical section 358 through the input system 372, and here the data, signals, etc. are converted into an optimal form for information processing. Necessary arithmetic processing is added to the digital information from the input control section 360, and after the calculation is completed, the output bus is used as information necessary for controlling various exposure control mechanisms and various display mechanisms included in the mechanism section 358. The signal is transmitted to the output control section 364 through a line 374. On the other hand, the central control section 362
Throughout the life 376, timing signals for taking in various setting data and various condition setting signals and timing signals for dynamic driving of various display mechanisms are provided to the mechanism section 358.

The output control section 364 controls various exposure control mechanisms of the mechanism section 358 based on various condition setting signals and various operation state determination signals input from the mechanism section 358 and control information input from the central control section 362. It provides control signals and causes various display mechanisms to display necessary information.

The functional configuration of the mechanical parts of the camera shown in FIG. 27 will be explained in more detail with reference to the schematic configuration diagram in FIG. 28.

The lock mechanism part 358 is involved in all operations related to input/output and control display of the camera device, and includes various setting switches or detection switches or measurement devices for input, various switches and lines for output, and control. In the figure, 378 is the TTL photometry means described earlier, and its output signal is logarithmically compressed through means not shown in the figure, and the output signal is logarithmically compressed through means not shown. In the case, BVo2 BY-AVO-AVc, aperture, Rikomi III Hikari no jli Goha BVs -BV AV-
An analog value corresponding to the apex called AV"c is output. The output analog signal of the TTL photometry means 378 is applied to the A-D converter 382 through the ° signal switching circuit 380 of the input control section 360, and is converted into a digital signal. It will be converted into data and then imported into the system.
The signal switching circuit 380 is connected to other fA! I light means, that is, reflected light type photometer 3501
It is provided to commonly use the A-D converter 382 when converting analog signals from the human-light photometer 354 and the strobe device 384 into digital values.

A simple block diagram of the strobe device 384 is shown in FIG. 24. When this strobe device 384 is inserted into the camera device body 4, the data contact 142, the control contact 14o1, and the synchronization contact 138 of the strobe device 384 are connected. are in contact with a data terminal 56, a control terminal 54, and a synchronization contact 52 provided on an accessory shoe 50 of the body 4, respectively. In this state, when the power switch 132 (FIG. 5) of the strobe device 384 is turned on, data VSA regarding the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is input from the data contact 142 through the data terminal 56, and the input control section 360 signal switching circuit 380. In this state, if the strobe device 384 has not completed charging for strobe light emission, the signal C8A indicating charging completion is not input, and therefore the data VSA is input regulated by the signal switching circuit 380. Become. When charging of the strobe device 384 is completed, the control terminal 5
4, current can flow into the charging completion detection circuit 386 through the data contact 140 on the strobe device 384 side. That is, a signal C8A indicating the completion of charging is input from the strobe device 384 through the data contact 140 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal C8A is detected by the current detector 386 provided in the input control section 360. This will result in

When a current flows out from the control terminal 54, the current detector 386 supplies a control signal to the signal switching circuit 380 to generate an analog signal input from the terminal 56 in place of the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378. to the A-D converter 382, and detecting the magnitude of the current,
It has a function of determining the control signal included in the amount of current. Therefore, when the signal C8A indicating the completion of charging is inputted from the strobe device 384, the signal switching circuit 380 transfers the data VSA't-A-D converter 382 regarding the aperture value inputted from the terminal 54 as an analog value. Since this data is input, the data VSA regarding the aperture value is converted into digital data and then input into the system. On the other hand, the current detector 386 detects the C8A signal and outputs a charge completion signal CGUP to set the system to strobe photography mode, and the changeover switch 146 changes the current amount of the charge completion signal into two levels. According to the current amount of the C8A signal, which is selectively given two levels of current amount by the charge completion detection circuit 346 which has a switching function, the current detector 386 detects whether this strobe photography mode is 9 fully automatic. Distinguish whether it is related to automatic or semi-automatic,
When the system is fully automatic, a fully automatic signal FAT is output. Therefore, depending on the input of the charge completion signal CGUP, which is the output of the current detector 386, and the presence or absence of the fully automatic signal FAT, the system enters the fully automatic or semi-automatic strobe photography mode.

Note that the flash emission trigger of the strobe device 384 for strobe photography is performed by a synchro switch 388 provided on the mechanism portion 358 side, and the strobe device 384 is triggered by the synchro switch 388 provided on the mechanism portion 358 side.
connected to. As is well known, this synchro switch 388 detects when the front curtain has finished running in the case of a two-curtain running focal plane shutter.
It is turned on by the member 390 that is turned on.

This synchronization switch 388 is used to synchronize not only the strobe device 384 attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4 but also other general strobes or flash devices to configure the camera system of this embodiment. It is also used to remove the contact, and for that purpose it is also connected to the X contact 64.

A simple block diagram of the reflected light type photometer 350 is shown in FIG. The data terminal 56 and the control terminal 54 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of No. 4 are in contact with each other. At this time, from the control terminal 54 to the contact 14 on the photometer 350 side
6, current can flow into it. That is, a signal OLM indicating that an external photometer is attached is input from the photometer 350 through the contact 146 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal.
This signal OLM is detected by the i-digit current detector 386 in the input control section 360. Therefore, a control signal is given from this current detector 386 to the signal switching circuit 380, and data OB related to the photometric amount input as an analog value from the data terminal 56 instead of the analog signal from the TTL photometry means 378 is transmitted. The data OB is input to the A/D converter 382, converted into digital data, and then taken into the system. Note that this photometric amount data OB is not obtained by photometry through a photographic lens device, so various Ω corrections are unnecessary, and the obtained signal directly corresponds to the subject brightness BY. . - The current detector 386 determines the OLM signal from its current amount and outputs a control signal OLM to put the system into external photometry mode. In response to the input of the control signal OLM, the system performs various operations based on external photometry data.

A simple block diagram of the incident light type photometer 354 is shown in FIG.
Each of the 56 contacts 168, 166, and 170 connects to the data terminal 5 provided on the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4.
6. Contact with each of the control terminal 54 and the AE lock terminal 58. At this time, current can flow from the control terminal 54 to the contact 166 on the photometer 354 side.

That is, a signal OLM indicating that an external photometer is attached is input from the photometer 354 through the contact 166 and the control terminal 54 in the form of a negative current signal, and this signal OLM is input to the input control section 3.
It will be detected by the current detector 386 provided at 60. Therefore, a control signal is given from this current detector 386 to the signal switching circuit 380, and the TTL photometry means 37
The data OB regarding the photometric amount input as an analog value from the data terminal 56 instead of the analog signal from 8 is A-D.
It becomes possible to input to the converter 382.

Note that this incident light type photometer 354 has a normally closed AE lock.
Equipped with switch 392, Cub? -156 is attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the body 4, the contact 170 of the coupler 156, the A of the accessory shoe and the SO
The AE lock switch 3 through the E lock terminal 58
Since the switch 92 short-circuits the commonly used AE lock switch 5AELK included in this mechanism portion 358, this camera device is placed in the A and E lock states. This AE lock e switch 392 works in conjunction with the photometry button F4 for checking the photometry on the photometer 354, and is opened depending on the operation of this button, so the photometer 354 side Photometry is started and the AE lock state of the urine and camera device is released.

At this time, data OB regarding the amount of photometry is output from the photometer 354 to the contact 168 as an analog value, and this data O
B is inputted from the data terminal 56 through the signal switching path 380 to the A/D converter 382, converted to digital data, and then taken into the system.

Note that this photometric amount data OB is not obtained by photometry using the reflected light method, so it is data related to illuminance that is completely different from the subject brightness information BV, but it is handled in the Apex calculation formula as a subject. Since it is exactly the same as the brightness information BV, by appropriately adjusting the output analog value of the photometer 354, the obtained photometric amount data OB can be directly made to correspond to the subject brightness BY. On the other hand, the current detector 386 determines the OLM signal from its current amount,
A control signal OLM is issued to place the system in external photometry mode. The system performs various operations based on external photometry data in response to the input of the control signal OLM, which is exactly the same as when a reflected light type photometer is used.

That is, in this camera system, the reflected light type 41
Regardless of whether an optical meter or an incident light type photometer is used as an external photometry adapter, the system operates exactly the same, except for the presence or absence of an A Botsock and usability issues.

As is clear from the above explanation, the output digital signal of the A-D converter 382 is output from the current detector 386 to 77).
7 signals CGUP and FATloLM, and the system also changes its operation to the required mode of operation depending on the output of the current detector 386. In the following description, the output digital signal of the A-D converter 382 will be collectively referred to as DD.

Note that this input control section 360 detects and imports various conditions and operating states set in the mechanism section 358, and uses a 5ABLK 1 winding completion detection switch having a switch configuration similar to that shown in FIG. 5WNUP
, through the AE charge detection switch 5AECG, the AE
AELK signal for cocking, winding completion detection switch! The NUP1 AE lever 94 receives an AECG signal indicating that the AE lever 94 is in the AE charging state.

By the way, the AE lock switch 5AELK is located on the selector lever 22 provided on the top of the body 4.

The switch 5WNUP is operated by a mechanism operated by the winding lever 14, and the switch AECG is operated by a mechanism operated by the AE lever 94.

The data and condition setting signals inputted to the input control section 360 as described above are sent to the central control section 360 via the input bus line 370 after being appropriately time-aligned.
will be forwarded to.

The central control section 362 takes in various setting data and setting conditions from the mechanism section 358. This central control section 362 outputs a timing pulse as shown in FIG. 13 through a timing line 394, and in synchronization with this timing pulse, data sv' related to film sensitivity SV and the maximum aperture speed of the photographic lens device are output. Data AVo (gray code) related to the value AVO, signal M indicating that the aperture of the photographic lens device is set on the lens device side
NAL, signal 5PDW indicating that the photographing lens device is stopped down, data regarding the set aperture value AV or shutter speed TV, signal ASLC indicating that this data is related to the aperture value AV, photographing lens device It takes in signal 1 AMAX, etc., which indicates what the minimum aperture value is.

The various data, setting conditions, and other signals described above are taken in through the configurations shown in FIGS. 12 to 19, and the details are as described above.

In this central control section 362, various calculation controls are performed, and data signals for controlling each exposure control mechanism of the camera mechanism section 358 and data signals for display are outputted via an output bus line 374. 364.

This output control unit 364 performs shutter release control that starts the operation of the camera device, aperture control that controls the aperture value of the lens device to a set or calculated aperture value, and shutter speed control that controls the shutter speed to a set or calculated speed. It has the following control functions: shutter speed control, display control to display necessary information, and includes a shutter release means 396, an aperture control means 398, a shutter speed control means 400, and a digital display provided in the mechanism section 358. The means 402 outputs a control signal to the blinking display means 404. - This output control section 364 detects various setting conditions and operating states of the mechanical section 358 and takes in those signals, and is connected to a switch m configuration similar to that shown in FIG.
- a self-timer set switch 5SBLF, having
The shutter release switch SW2 indicates that the self-timer is set through the front curtain running start switch 5CTST, which has a switch configuration similar to that shown in FIG. A shutter release 0 button is applied to start the operation, and a CTST signal indicating that the leading curtain of the two-curtain running type focal plane shutter has run is applied. Furthermore, the output control section 364 has the configuration shown in FIG.
It also receives an FPC signal obtained by converting the distance traveled by the AE lever 94 from the AE charge position into pulses.

The switch 5SBLP is connected to the selector lever 22 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the shutter release switch SW2 is connected to the shutter release 0 button 18, and the switch 5CTST is connected to the front curtain travel start detection member 406.
are linked to each other.

The mechanism part 358 of this camera device is a mechanical sequence control mechanism and an electric control mechanism using an electromagnetic solenoid. Control means 4
00 is a part related to electrical control.

The shutter release means 396 provides a trigger for starting the mechanical sequence of the camera device 1, and performs the required operation using an extremely small electromagnetic solenoid. Note that this shutter release means 396
The operation is based on the shutter input input to the input control section 360.
Release signal SR, self-time set signal 5EL
F, and the winding completion signal WNUP inputted to this output control section 364.

In the mechanical sequence that starts running due to the operation of the shutter release means 396, the AE lever 94
This also includes the operation of moving the vehicle from the charging position. This A
As mentioned before, the E lever 94 moves from the charging position to
It has a function of presetting the aperture value of the lens device 2 by being clamped at an appropriate position while traveling toward the discharge position, and this clamp position is determined by the AE of the AE lever 94. This is the distance traveled from the charging position.

In other words, as is clear from the explanation of FIG.
Since this corresponds to the preset value of the number of control aperture stages, while detecting the traveling amount of the AE lever 940, when the detected amount reaches a value corresponding to the number of control aperture stages, the AE lever 94 is clamped. By holding the amount of travel at that time, the aperture can be preset in the lens device 2.

During this operation, a BPC signal is input to the output control section in response to the amount of travel of the AE lever 94. This FPC signal is a pulse signal whose number is equal to the amount of travel of the AB lever 94. Therefore, by counting this FPC signal with a counter or the like, it is possible to easily move the lever 94.
You can know the amount of travel.

The aperture control means 398 controls the aperture control means 398 when the amount of travel of the AE lever 94 from the AE charge position reaches an amount corresponding to the number of aperture control stages given from the central control section 362.
It operates a mechanism for flipping the E lever 94, and this also uses a small electromagnetic solenoid to perform the required operation.

Note that the mechanical sequence started by the operation of the shutter release means 396 is the same as that of the AE lever 7.
In addition to the operation of moving the 94 from the charging position, it also includes operations such as flipping up the mirror, setting the preset aperture of the photographic lens device 2, and starting the front curtain of the two-curtain traveling type focal plane shutter. It is something that

In general, the evening speed of the shirt 1 using the two-curtain running type focal plane shirt system is controlled by controlling the time from the time when the leading curtain starts traveling to the time when the trailing curtain starts traveling. Camera devices are no exception.In other words, after the front curtain of the shutter starts running, it measures the time while regulating the run of the rear curtain, and measures the time corresponding to the shutter speed given from the central control unit 362. This camera device attempts to obtain the required shutter speed by starting the trailing curtain after the period of time has elapsed.Of course, in this camera device, the time is measured by electrical means.

When the front curtain of the shutter starts running, the mechanism part 358
A signal CTST indicating this fact is output from. This C
The output control section 364 that has received the TST signal measures time based on the shutter speed data given from the central control section 362, and after the time corresponding to the shutter speed has elapsed, the output control section 364 causes the shutter trailing curtain to run. For this purpose, a shutter speed control means 400 is provided, which is also configured to perform the required operation using a small electromagnetic solenoid.

As mentioned above, the shutter φ release means 396
, the aperture control means 398, and the shutter speed control means 400 are the parts in this camera system in which the electrical control system is directly involved in controlling exposure, and therefore occupy an extremely important position.

Note that even while the electrical control means is in operation, the mechanical sequence of the camera device itself continues to operate.
After the trailing shutter curtain has finished running, a mechanical control mechanism is involved in the quick return of the shutter and the release of the aperture drive of the lens device.

Another function of the output control section 346 is a display function that presents information necessary for photographing to the photographer. 1st
As mentioned above, the camera device shown in the figure is equipped with a display device in the viewfinder 13 that displays the data necessary for photographing.
8 and is indicated by 402. The data display 402 receives information regarding data to be displayed, that is, a decode signal for display, from the output control section 364, and receives timing for dynamic display driving from the central control section 362 through a timing/2 input 394. The signal is being received. This dynamic display drive is a well-known display method that provides common display information that changes over time to all display units that make up the display, and selects the display unit based on a timing signal. It is a display method that displays desired data on a desired display unit depending on the drive, and is widely used because it has the characteristics of simplifying the circuit configuration and reducing power consumption. . This dynamic display drive tends to be limited by space, especially in camera equipment.
This is particularly advantageous when it is not possible to incorporate a large-capacity power supply.

Further, an LED lamp 32 is provided on the upper surface of the first camera device body 4 shown in the figure, and the function of this LED lamp 32 is also important. Specifically, one is a function that lights up when checking the battery to indicate that there is sufficient battery power remaining, and the other is a function that flashes when using the self-timer to take pictures. This function indicates that the self-timer is in operation. This LED lamp 32
A control signal is also given from the output control section 364 to the output control section 364.

As mentioned above, the mechanism portion 358 is the input control section 3.
60. The central control unit 362 and the output control unit 364 closely control and display photometric data, external input data, setting data, setting conditions, input conditions such as discrimination status, shutter release, aperture, shutter speed, etc. It's tied together.

Next, the details of the J motor drive device are shown in FIG.
It is represented by 5. This motor drive device 405 is connected from its contact 210 to the switch 5WNUP through a contact 216 of the body 4. Said switch 5WN
As previously mentioned, the UP is the 7-shot release performed after the film winding is completed in the camera device, and remains on until the rear curtain of the shutter finishes running. However, it is therefore possible to obtain the WNUP signal which is at the no-y level during the above-mentioned period through the inverter. The motor drive device is controlled by receiving the WNUP signal before passing through the inverter. This WNUP signal is at a high level during a period other than the above-mentioned period in the camera operation cycle, that is, from the end of the shutter trailing curtain until the film winding is completed. 4
05 drives a film winding motor based on this WNUP signal. That is, according to the motor drive device, the film winding operation starts immediately after the shutter release and the shutter trailing curtain finishes traveling,
The film winding operation is stopped when the film winding is completed, so there is no risk of malfunction, and rapid film winding operation is possible.

As shown in FIG. 8, this motor drive device 405 is equipped with a shutter release device 220 that can remotely release the shutter of a camera device. It has no electrical circuit connection with the device 405. The operation button 2128 provided on this shutter Q-release device 220 is functionally linked to the shutter release switch SW2 of the mechanism part 358 and the switch R8W2 which is connected in parallel in a circuit through contacts 212 and 218. is exactly the same as the release button 18 provided on the top surface of the body 4.

Now, the input control section 360, the central control section 362, and the output control section 364 share various functions as described above, but their operations are related to each other through the bus line 366. Together with portion 358, it forms a reasonable system number.

The main operation of this system is to perform calculations based on external conditions (photometry data, etc.) according to data or conditions set by the photographer, derive control data necessary for exposure control, and The camera apparatus displays necessary data from the data to notify the photographer and performs exposure control based on the control data.The operations of this camera apparatus in various modes will be outlined below.

Now, the data DD digitally converted and outputted to the A-D converter 382 of the input control unit 360 are photometry data BVO1 based on open photometry, photometry data BVs based on stop-down photometry.
, aperture control data VSA from the strobe device 384, external photometry data O from the external photometry adapter 350.354
B, these correspond to the charge completion signal CGUP which is the output of the current detector 386.
, the external photometry mode control signal OLM, and the stop-down signal 5PDW which is the output of the switch 286 linked to the stop-down lever 64, and the corresponding processes are performed.

Now, the strobe device 384 and external photometry adapter 350, 354 are attached to the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device body 4.
Consider the case where the camera is not installed, in which case the camera device can take five shooting modes (excluding pulp shooting).

These five modes depend on the state of the mode selector 38 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the state of the aperture setting lever 64 provided on the front surface of the body 4, and the state of the aperture setting ring of the lens device 2. The following modes can be selected: AE shooting mode, shutter-priority AE shooting mode, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, and aperture-priority AE shooting mode with aperture metering, as shown in Figure 11. As shown in
In particular, when performing arithmetic processing of data, the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode is the same as each AE shooting mode of aperture priority or shutter priority, so the required calculation routines are roughly divided into four.

Now, the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture reduction lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting switch 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the aperture priority side.
are respectively set at the positions where mark 12 is selected, the system enters the aperture priority AE shooting mode. At this time, the photometric amount BV regarding the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry.

As mentioned above, includes the open aperture value AVo of the lens device 2 and the bending error AVc, and the relationship BVo=BY-AVo-AVc holds for the actual subject brightness data BV. This is the same as shown in the previous equation (3). On the other hand, on the mechanical part 358 side, data sv1 regarding film sensitivity and data AV regarding the open aperture υ value of the lens/speed device 2 are provided.
o. The aperture value AV, etc. desired by the photographer is set,
Further, data AVc regarding the bending error AVc is also derived from the a-missing i-data AVo.

The derivation of this curvature error A V c does not depend on any particular calculation, as will be described in detail later, but is calculated from the middle degree of a plurality of preset curvature error data, and the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. It relies on a configuration that selects and derives those corresponding to AVo.

Prior to starting calculations for exposure control, in this camera system, the aperture value AV set by the dial 34 is set as the aperture value AV of the photographic lens device 2 in use.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether the aperture value is above and below the maximum aperture value AMAX. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AY set with the dial 34 is smaller than the open aperture value AVo, the open aperture value AVo is replaced as the set aperture value AV, and conversely the aperture value AY set with the dial 34 is If the aperture value AV set in step 34 is larger than the maximum aperture value AMAX, a table operation is performed to replace the maximum aperture value AMAX as the set aperture value AV.

This is because, as mentioned earlier, the aperture value AV is set on the dial 34 side rather than on the lens device 2 side, so the setting value can sometimes be controlled by the shooting/photography device 2. This is because there may be cases where the range is exceeded, and in that case, the upper or lower limit aperture value AVo or AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 is applied as the aperture value AV for control.

It is for this purpose.

Note that the TTL photometry means 3 provided in the mechanism portion 358
78 to the input control unit 360 through the A-D converter 382
The photometric data BVo input into the central control unit 36
2 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is added to the photometric data BVo captured as described above.

That is, BVo +SV = BV +SV -AVo -AV
c ・-== ... (This means that the calculation 8J is performed, but from the above equation (2), BVo + 5V = EV - AVo - AVc ... .
-f9). Next, the open aperture value data AVo and the curvature error data AVc of the aperture/zip device 2 are added to the above calculation result.

That is, BVo + SV + AVo + AVc = EV
--.--QO), and through the above calculations, an appropriate exposure amount EV for the film used is calculated based on the photometric data.

Note that this calculation is a digital calculation as mentioned above, but (8), (91, QOl.

If the calculation register exceeds 7 degrees due to the calculation of the formula, the maximum capacity of this calculation register is taken as the calculation result.

Next, dial 3 from the exposure amount EV obtained as described above.
4, the aperture value data and AVo are subtracted, and as is clear from equation (1), the result is EV-AV = TV... Song... -Concave curve...curve (11), and the shutter speed TV required to obtain proper exposure for the set aperture value AV can be found.

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is control data to satisfy the exposure amount EV of the set p aperture value AV. There is a risk that the shutter speed limit given to the body 4 of the device will be exceeded, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation.

, Therefore, in this camera system, the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of calculation is the maximum shutter speed TMAX of the shutter mechanism built into the body 4 of the camera device.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether or not the minimum shutter speed TM'IN is greater than or equal to the minimum shutter speed TM'IN.

, If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of the calculation is equal to the maximum shutter speed, TMAX
Or if the minimum shutter speed TMIN limit is exceeded,
The limit value TMAX or TMIN is used as the shutter speed TV for control instead of the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of the calculation, but at the same time, of course, an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this. It is.

Next, the open aperture value data AVo of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control.
...Old...(22) Number of aperture stages AV for aperture control
s is calculated. The reason why this camera 7 stem controls the number of steps AVs of the i-fold for aperture control is because the control mechanism of the photographic lens device 2 shown in FIG. 2 adopts the step a control mechanism. It is from.

Through the calculation operations described above, the set aperture value A
Based on V, the speed TV and the number of control aperture stages A'Vs are derived.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (a).
), the aperture value set with the dial 34 and the shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation are displayed together. Incidentally, the form of this display is as already explained.

Based on the above calculation results, exposure control is performed after the camera device i-shutter release. Since the aperture setting ring 8 of the camera device 2 has selected the mark 22, the camera device 2 Preset control of the number of aperture stages AVs is performed from the side.

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
If you have not selected `` Lens device 2 from the body 4 side.''
It is impossible to preset the number of aperture stops AVs, and during actual exposure control, the lens device 2 will be stopped down to the preset aperture position by the aperture setting button 8. Become.・Therefore, in this car camera system, such cases can be handled using the full aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode 1.
- Based on the aperture value displayed in the eyeliner 13, that is, the aperture value set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side, the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side
By presetting the aperture value according to , it is possible to control exposure using the calculated shutter speed □ and the preset aperture value. In addition, in such an aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, there is no information in the viewfinder 13 other than the aperture value set with the dial 34 or the calculated shutter speed, as shown in FIGS. 10(a)-(1). As previously explained, the character "M" is displayed on the screen to inform the photographer that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 according to the display. Note that this manual exposure adjustment photographing mode can be said to have an aperture-prioritizing character since the aperture value is first set using the dial 34. What is particularly interesting is this manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, where the aperture value is set in a preset or aperture setting on the lens device 2 and the aperture value is set on the dial 3.
By taking care that the aperture value set according to step 4 is always the same value, this camera device performs an aperture-priority AE photographing operation.

Now, mode selector 3 & is set to shutter speed priority side.
When the aperture reduction lever 64 is set to the open side and the aperture setting/gage 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the position where the mark 12 is selected, the system enters the shutter speed priority AE photography mode.

At this time, the photometric amount BVo related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry is as described above, but the maximum aperture value A of the lens device 2 is
Since Vo and the bending error AVc are included, BVo=BV-AVo-AVc for the actual subject brightness data BV.
There are 6 things in this relationship that I mentioned earlier. on the other hand,
In the mechanism part 358, data regarding film sensitivity Sv
Data regarding the open aperture value of the lens device 2 A V o,
The shutter speed TV, etc. desired by the photographer is set, and the data AVc regarding the bending error AVc is also derived from the previous open aperture shift data AVo, which is the same as in the case of aperture priority.

Now, the TTL west measurement means 37 installed in the mechanism part 358
8 to the input control unit 360 through the A-'D converter 382.
The photometric data BVo input into the central control unit 36
2 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data 8V2 is added to the photometric data BVo captured as described above.

In other words, the calculation BTo + 5V = BV + 5V - AVo - AVc is performed, but this equation is different from the above-mentioned equation (2) BVo + SV = gV - AVo -, AVc. , is the same as in the case of aperture priority.Next, the open aperture value data AVo and the bending error data AVc of the lens device 2 are added to the above calculation result.In other words, the calculation BVo+SV+AVo+AVc=Ev is performed. However, through the above calculation, an appropriate exposure amount EXr for the film used is calculated based on the photometric data.

As mentioned earlier, this operation is a digital operation. 21) ζ If the above series of operations causes the operation register to overflow, the maximum capacity of this operation register is used as the result of the operation. shall be.

Next, determine the exposure amount as described above. The shutter speed data TV set by the dial 34 is subtracted from Ev, and as is clear from equation (1), the result is EV -TV :AY...'・-...
(13), and the aperture value AV required to obtain proper exposure for the set shutter speed TV can be found.

Note that the aperture value AV obtained in this way is control data for satisfying the exposure amount EV calculated for the set shutter speed TV, but sometimes this calculation result is used in the lens device 2. There is a risk that the limit of the aperture value that can be controlled will be exceeded, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. Therefore, 1. In this camera system, the aperture value AV obtained as a result of calculation is the large aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2.
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether or not the aperture value is equal to or greater than the minimum aperture value AVO. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AV obtained as a result of the calculation exceeds the limit of the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value A V o, then the limit value A
The aperture value AV for control is used instead of the aperture value AV obtained as a result of the MAX or A V o , f calculation, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact. be.

Next, from the aperture value data A and V for control, the maximum aperture value data AVo of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted AV - AY
o=AVs is performed, and the number of aperture stages AVs for aperture control is calculated. Note that the reason why this camera system performs aperture step number AVs control for aperture control is because the control mechanism of the photographic lens device 2 shown in FIG. 2 employs a step number control mechanism. As mentioned before.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, the number of control aperture stages AVs based on the set shutter speed TV is derived.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is shown in Figure 10 (al.
As shown in (1), the aperture value obtained as a result of calculation with the shutter speed set by the dial 34 is also displayed. Note that the format of this display is as already described.

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after shutter release, but since the lens device 2 has its aperture setting ring selecting mark 22, the aperture setting ring is selected from the body 4 side. Preset control of the number of aperture steps AVs is performed. Since the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 21 selects the mark 22, the preset control of the aperture step number AVs is performed from the body 4 side. 4 Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 22.
If you have not selected lens device 2 from the body 4 side.
It is impossible to preset the number of aperture steps AVs, and during actual exposure control, the lens device 2 is stopped down to the preset aperture position by the aperture setting ring 8. Therefore, in this camera system, in such a case, the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13 and the aperture value derived as a result of the j calculation are used to set the lens to the aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode. By presetting the aperture value using the aperture setting ring 8 on the device 2 side, exposure control can be performed using the set shutter speed and the aperture value preset by the lens device 2.

In addition, in such an open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the images shown in Figs. 10(a)-(1) are displayed in the viewfinder 13.
As described above, an M"-shaped display is displayed to inform the photographer that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 according to the display. It should be noted that this manual exposure adjustment photographing mode can be said to have the character of giving priority to the shutter speed, since the shutter speed is first set by the lens 34.

Next, the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture tightening lever 64 is set to the aperture tightening side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to a position that presets a specific aperture value. At this time, the system is aperture priority AE.
At this time, the photometry amount BVs related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry includes the aperture stop value AVζ bending error AYc' of the lens device 2 as an element. In this system, since there is no means for taking in the aperture value AV, it is impossible to determine the bending error, and therefore the bending error AVc' is ignored. Therefore, as shown in equation (5) above, the photometric amount BVs has the relationship BVs = BV - AV with respect to the actual subject brightness data BY.

On the other hand, on the mechanism portion 358 side, data Sv regarding film sensitivity is set.

TTL photometry means 378 provided in the mechanism portion 358
to input control unit 360 through A-'D conversion 1382
The aperture reduction photometry data BVs taken in is further introduced into the central control section 362 and subjected to the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data Sv is added to the photometric data BVs captured as described above.

That is, BVs + 5V = BV - AV + SV...
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・0 calculation is performed, but this formula is the above-mentioned (1), (
From formula 21, BVs + SV = EV - AV = '['V...
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・0
9, and through this calculation the appropriate exposure Ev
It is possible to derive the shutter speed TV required to obtain .

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is control data for satisfying the formula exposure amount EV for the aperture value AV of the lens device 2, but sometimes this calculation result is applied to the body 4 of the camera device, and there is a risk that the shutter speed limit will be exceeded, and in such a case, it is necessary to notify the photographer of this fact to prevent erroneous operation. Therefore, in this camera system, the shutter speed TV calculated as a result of calculation is
Maximum shutter speed TMA of the shutter mechanism built into
A comparison calculation is made to determine whether the shutter speed is less than or equal to X and greater than or equal to the minimum shutter speed TMIN. If the result of such a comparison operation is
If the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of calculation exceeds the limits of the maximum shutter speed TMAX and minimum shutter speed TMIN, the limit value TMAX or TMIN is replaced with the shutter speed TV obtained as a result of calculation. Although the shutter speed is set to TV, it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Incidentally, in this shooting mode, the aperture value set using the dial 34 is completely ignored.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, the shooting speed based on the narrowed down aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 is derived.

Note that the photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13 (2), but the display at this time is as shown in Figure 10 (a).
) in the format shown in (IVI).The format of this display has already been explained.

Based on the above calculation results, the camera device performs exposure control after shutter release, but the shutter is
The aperture of the lens device 2 is controlled by the shutter speed TV on the side, and the aperture of the lens device 2 is held at the manually set aperture position until i, which is the aperture state.

Next (c) The mode selector 38 is set to the speed priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the aperture side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to a position that presets a specific aperture value. At this time, the system enters the aperture metering manual exposure control shooting mode.At this time, the photometric amount BVs related to the subject brightness obtained as a result of photometry is determined by the aperture value AV of the lens device 2 and the aperture value AV of the lens device 2. Since this system does not have a means to take in the aperture value AV, the bending error is ignored.As stated above, the self-photometering amount BVs is based on the actual subject brightness data BV. As mentioned above, there is a relationship of BVs = BY - AV.On the other hand, the mechanical part 3
On the 58 side, data SV regarding film sensitivity, shutter speed TV desired by the photographer, etc. are set.

The focused photometry data BVs input from the TTL photometry means 378 provided in the front mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360 via the A-D converter 382 is further transmitted to the central control section 3.
62 and undergoes the following arithmetic processing.

First, film sensitivity data 'Sv is added to the photometric data BVs captured as described above.

In other words, BVs + 5V = BV - AV: + - 8V Null calculation power is performed, but as mentioned earlier, this formula is 1
cBVs +5V=EV-AV=equivalent to TViC Note: Through this calculation, the shutter speed TV required to obtain the appropriate exposure EV can be derived.

Note that the shutter speed TV obtained in this way is calculated data for satisfying the exposure amount Ev with respect to the aperture value AV of the lens device 2, but this calculated data does not necessarily depend on the camera device body. It is not the same as the shutter speed TV' for control set by the dial 34 of No. 4.

Therefore, if the photographer wants to achieve proper exposure EV, he or she should operate the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 to adjust the aperture so that the calculated data TV becomes equal to the setting data TV', or adjust the aperture so that the calculated data TV becomes equal to the set data TV'. It is necessary to adjust the shutter speed by changing the data of the shutter speed TV' so that it becomes equal to the calculated data TV.

In this camera system, a permissible error range of 10 Kl, . The configuration is such that the photographer is instructed through the display in the finder 3 to perform manual operations that fall within the error range.

The calculation operation will be explained below. First, a constant of 1 is added to the shutter speed data TV obtained as a result of the calculation. If the data TV10 obtained as a result of this addition overflows the capacity of the calculation register,
The maximum capacity of this calculation register is taken as the criterion result.

Next, the shutter speed data TV' set by the data TV+K1 color dial 34 obtained as described above is subtracted, and if a carry is obtained as a result of the subtraction, the set shutter speed data TV' is This indicates that the error is not within the allowable error range, and in this camera system, the photographer is asked to reduce the aperture of the lens device 2, that is, adjust the aperture to the open side, or read the shutter speed data from the TV.
It operates to give an instruction to reduce the setting data of '. In addition, if no carry is obtained as a result of this subtraction, 2 is further subtracted from the constant from the result of the subtraction TV+K 1- TV' to obtain TV+1-TV'-2=TV-(
K2-Kl) -TV'・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
...obtains the result Oe. If the result of this subtraction is a carry, then
The set shutter speed data W' is assumed to be within the tolerance range of 1/10 - (K2 - Kl) with respect to the calculated shutter speed TV, and an operation is performed to inform the photographer of this fact, but the opposite is true. If there is no carry, this indicates that the set shutter speed TV' is not within the allowable error range, and in this camera system, the photographer is instructed to increase the aperture of the lens device 2, that is, to increase the aperture. It operates to give an instruction to adjust the shutter speed to the small aperture side or to increase the setting data of the shutter speed data TV'.

Through the arithmetic operations as described above, the appropriateness of the aperture reduction amount of the photographic lens device 2 that has been stopped down with respect to the set shutter speed TV', or conversely, the setting for the aperture amount of the photographic lens device 2 that has been apertured down. It is determined whether the shutter speed W' is appropriate or not. - The photographer can check the result of the above discrimination in the viewfinder 13, and the display at this time takes the format shown in (v) of Figure 10 fa). The form of this display has already been explained, but based on this display, the photographer can adjust the optimal combination of shutter speed TV and aperture amount of the lens device 2 to obtain the proper exposure. be.

In this mode, the camera device controls its shutter on the body 4 side based on the shutter speed W' set by the photographer using the dial 34, and the aperture of the lens device 2 is controlled by the photographer in the aperture state. Therefore, the aperture position is held at the manually set aperture position.

Note that the display and manual operations by the photographer regarding this aperture manual exposure adjustment photography have been described above. By the way, detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As mentioned above, aperture priority AE shooting, shutter priority A, E shooting, aperture metering manual exposure adjustment shooting, aperture priority AE with aperture
Each mode of photography, aperture metering, manual exposure adjustment, and photography are all operated based on the amount of light metering by the TTL metering means 378 provided in the mechanism section 358, but as mentioned earlier, this camera system It is possible to apply an external photometry adapter.

Next, the accessory shoe 50 of the camera device body 4
Consider the case where an external photometry adapter such as a reflected light photometer 350 or an incident light photometer 354 is attached to the camera. At this time, the camera device adopts three shooting modes (excluding bulb shooting). I can do things.

These three modes depend on the state of the mode selector 38 provided on the top surface of the body 4, the aperture setting ring of the lens device 2, and the aperture reduction lever 64. You can select between manual external metering and exposure adjustment shooting modes.

Each of the above modes will be explained below, but they are not essentially different from the case where the TTL photometry means 378 is applied. However, at this time, special attention must be paid to the fact that the photometric amount obtained when the external photometric adapter is applied is completely different in nature from the photometric amount obtained through the TTL photometric means 378. This requires arithmetic operations.

In other words, the amount of photometry measured by an external photometer '350.354 is based on the incident light method even if the photometry method is based on the reflected light method! However, it is given as data corresponding to the subject and brightness BV. Therefore, since the photometric amount does not include elements related to the open aperture value AVo, bending error AVc, etc. of the photographic lens device 2 used, there is no need for the process of calculating the subject brightness BV.

When taking pictures using this external metering adapter, the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture priority side, the aperture lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to mark 1.
2, the system enters the external metering aperture priority AE shooting mode. At this time,
The photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry is the subject brightness BV.
Therefore, there is no need to add the open aperture value AVo or the curvature error AVc.

Other than this point, the subsequent calculation operations are exactly the same as in the aperture priority AE shooting mode described above. Furthermore, the display of the calculation results is exactly the same as in the aperture-priority AE shooting mode in this case, and is as shown in FIG. 10 (al-(11).

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
If this is not selected, it is impossible to preset the aperture stop number AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the aperture is set in the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. Therefore, it is controlled to the set value.

This means that it is necessary to manually set the same aperture value on the lens device 2 as that set on the dial 34 of the body 4.

In this case, since the photometric amount is measured through an external photometric adapter, the same operation can be applied regardless of whether the lens device 2 is in an open or stopped-down state. Therefore, in this camera system, the lens device 2
If the aperture setting ring 8 on the side does not select YARK 12, the external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode is set regardless of whether the lens device 2 is open or stopped, and the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13, i.e. Based on the aperture value set by the dial 34 on the body 4 side, the aperture value is preset or aperture setting is performed using the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, and the calculated shutter speed and preset are set. Alternatively, exposure control can be performed using a set aperture value. In addition, in this external metering manual exposure adjustment photography mode, the first lens is displayed in the viewfinder 13, just as in the case of the open metering manual exposure adjustment photography mode.
As shown in Figure 0 (al-(11), the aperture value set using the dial 34, the calculated shutter speed, and "M" indicating that it is necessary to manually set the lens device 2 are displayed. .

Also, when shooting using this external metering adapter,
When the mode selector 38 is set to the shutter speed priority side, the aperture focusing lever 64 is set to the open side, and the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 is set to the position where mark 12 is selected, the system sets the external photometry shutter speed. It becomes priority AE shooting mode. At this time, the photometric amount obtained as a result of photometry directly corresponds to the subject brightness BV, so
There is no need to add the open aperture value AVo or the curvature error AVc. Other than this point, the subsequent calculation operations are exactly the same as in the shutter speed priority AE photography mode described above. In addition, the display of the calculation results is exactly the same as in the shutter speed priority AE shooting mode, and is shown in Figures 10(a)-(11).
As shown.

Note that the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side is marked 12.
If not selected, it is impossible to preset the number of aperture steps AVs of the lens device 2 from the body 4 side, and during actual exposure control, the aperture depends on the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side. Controlled to the value set by This means that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value calculated based on the shutter speed, photometry amount, etc. set on the dial 34 on the lens device 2 side. In this case, since the photometric amount is measured through an external photometric adapter, the same operation can be applied regardless of whether the lens device 2 is fully opened or closed. Therefore,
In this camera system, if the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side does not select the mark 12,
Regardless of whether the lens device 2 is open or stopped down, the lens device 2 is set in the external photometry manual exposure adjustment shooting mode based on the aperture value displayed in the viewfinder 13, that is, the aperture value derived as a result of calculation. By presetting the aperture value or setting the aperture depth using the aperture setting ring 8 on the side, it is possible to control exposure using the set shutter speed and the calculated aperture value. In addition, in this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode, the 10th meter is displayed in the viewfinder 13, exactly the same as in the open metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode.
As shown in Figure (al-f), the shutter speed falsely set on the dial 34, the calculated aperture value, and M'' indicating that it is necessary to manually set the lens device 2 are displayed.

Note that this external metering manual exposure adjustment shooting mode also has an aperture-priority character depending on whether the mode selector 38 is set to aperture-priority (III) or shutter speed priority. There are two types that have speed-priority characteristics, but there is no essential difference.However, if the mode selector 38 is set to the aperture-priority side, the lens device 2 can change the preset setting or As long as the aperture value set for aperture and the aperture value set by the dial 34 are always the same value, this camera device performs an aperture-priority AE photographing operation.

As mentioned above, when taking pictures using an external metering adapter, the calculation routine is T
This is the same as in the case of photographing using the TL photometry means.

The explanatory diagram in FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the photographing modes based on TTL photometry and external 11111 light and the corresponding calculation routines as described above. The figure shows the state of the mode selector 38, the state of the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, the state of the aperture lever 64, and the differences in light metering methods. It shows two calculation routines. In addition, when the mark 12 is selected with the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2 and the aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring 8, and the aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring 8, and the aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring 8, when the aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring 8, the aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring 8, the aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8 is aperture setting ring, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring 8, aperture setting ring <-64 force; As already explained.

On the other hand, as mentioned earlier, this camera 2 system has the ability to work in close cooperation with an auto-flash type strobe.Next, this strobe device 384 is applied to photography. Let's think about what happens if you do. This strobe device 384 is attached to the accessor 1 of the camera device body 4.
After being attached to the no-shoe 50 and electrically connected to the body 4, the strobe device 384'dE
When the camera device is ready to emit light, i.e., when charging for emitting light is completed, the camera device switches to strobe photography mode. As already explained, the operations performed within the camera device in this strobe photography mode can be roughly divided into four routines.

These four calculation routines are selected as appropriate depending on the states of the aperture setting dial lO8 of the strobe device 384 and the changeover switch 146. This determines the corresponding mode in the system and operates it.

Note that the operation mode of this system depending on the setting status of each part of the robot device 384 and the camera device is also shown in FIG. The routines correspond to fully automatic, automatic dimming, automatic mode, semi-automatic, automatic dimming, automatic mode, fully automatic, full flash, manual mode, and semi-automatic, full flash, manual mode. The operation is also the same as 4 above.
It is summarized in operations based on the calculation results of two calculation routines.

Now, in the case of fully automatic/automatic light control/automatic mode, the strobe device 384 is in a state where it can automatically control light emission according to the aperture value and film sensitivity set by the aperture setting dial 108 and film sensitivity setting dial 106. However, on the camera device side, analog signal data VSA corresponding to the aperture value set by the aperture setting dial 108 is stored.
is given, and at the same time, a charge completion signal C8A is given. This charge completion signal O8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to fully automatic/semi-automatic mode, but as mentioned above, the fully automatic mode is determined by this charge completion signal O8A.
This is a case where A contains a control signal for the fully automatic mode, or the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to aperture priority.

The aperture value data taken into the camera device side is converted into a digital value by an A-D converter 3-82, and then sent to the central control unit 3.
62, but the data regarding this aperture value VS
A is biased by a constant 08T2 with respect to the aperture value AV actually used for control. This is because data related to the aperture value, VSA, is taken in as an analog value, and this analog value has a large number of stages, so there is a risk of incorrect input in the minute voltage range, so bias should be set appropriately. The digital conversion data DD is also the aperture value data AV that is actually used.
This is because the data is large enough to correspond to Nokuiasu. Therefore, first VSA-C3T2=AV ・・・・・・・・・・・・
. . . . . . . Performs the calculation aη to derive control data AV regarding the aperture input from the strobe side. The aperture value AV obtained in this way is the aperture setting dial 1 on the strobe device 384 side.
08, but sometimes the result of this calculation exceeds the limit of the aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2, and in such cases, the photographer should be informed of this to prevent erroneous operation. It is necessary to prevent this. Therefore, in this camera system, it is determined whether the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side is less than the maximum aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2, and is greater than or equal to the minimum aperture value AVo. Perform a comparison operation. If the result of such comparison operation is
The aperture value AV is the maximum aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value A
If the limit of Vo is exceeded, the limit value AMAX or AVo is changed to the aperture value A set on the strobe device 384 side.
The aperture value AV is used for control instead of V, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Next, the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 is subtracted from the aperture value data AV for control, AV - AV.

= AVs is performed, number of drawing stages A for drawing control
Vs is calculated.

Note that the above calculations are performed in exactly the same way in the fully automatic, automatic dimming, and manual modes. However, in this mode, data regarding the control diaphragm reduction stage number AVs is not used for diaphragm control.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, and the display at this time or as shown in FIG. When the shutter speed of 1/60 second and charging of the strobe device 384 are completed, "EF" is displayed to indicate that the flash photography mode is set, and the aperture value AV used for control is displayed. Ru. In addition, in the case of manual mode, the aperture value AY displayed in the finder 13
It is necessary for the photographer to manually set this on the lens device 2 side, and therefore an "M" indicating this is also displayed, as shown in (II) of Fig. 10 (C). That's right.

The operations of the camera device 9 and the strobe device 384 in the fully automatic, automatic light control/automatic mode, and the fully automatic/automatic light control/manual mode have already been explained previously.

Next, in the case of semi-automatic/auto dimming/auto mode, the strobe mounting 384 is i! 9#) Automatic flash control becomes possible according to the aperture value and film sensitivity set by the setting dial 108 and film sensitivity setting dial 106, but on the other hand, the camera device side is set to the aperture setting dial 1.0.
The analog signal data VSA corresponding to the aperture value set by O8A is given, and the charging completion signal O8A is also given.
is given. This charging completion signal O8A includes a control signal depending on the amount of current related to fully automatic/semi-automatic,
As explained above, the semi-automatic mode is set because the charging completion signal C8A includes a semi-automatic mode control signal, and the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to prioritize the shutter speed. This is the case.

In this case, first, a comparison calculation is performed to determine which of the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN of the camera device body 4 and the shutter speed TV set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater. As a result of this comparison calculation, the shutter speed on the lower speed side is set as the shutter speed TV for control. Next, the aperture value data is transferred from the strobe device 384 to the camera device side and converted into digital data. Subtraction of constant 08T2 corresponding to bias from VSA vSA-C8T2=
AV is performed to derive control data AV regarding the aperture input from the strobe side. Note that the aperture value AV obtained in this way corresponds to the aperture setting dial 108 on the strobe device 384 side, but sometimes the result of this calculation corresponds to the aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2. Sometimes the limits are exceeded, and in such cases it is necessary to notify the photographer of this to prevent erroneous operation. For this purpose, this camera system performs a comparison calculation to determine whether the aperture value AV set on the strobe device 384 side is less than the maximum aperture value AMAX that can be controlled by the lens device 2 and is greater than or equal to the minimum aperture value AVo. do. If, as a result of such comparison calculation, the aperture value AV exceeds the limit of the large aperture value AMAX or the minimum aperture value λ■0, the limit value AMAX or AVo is value A
The aperture value AV is used for control instead of V, but it goes without saying that at the same time an operation is performed to notify the photographer of this fact.

Next, for control, ``subtraction AV - AV of the open aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 from the aperture value data AV.

= AVs is performed, number of drawing stages A for drawing control
Vs is calculated.

Note that the above calculations are performed in exactly the same way in the semi-automatic, intransitive, and manual modes. However, in this mode, data regarding the number of control aperture stages AVs is not used for aperture control.

The photographer can check the result of the above calculation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is (V
l, as shown in (Vl), which indicates that the selected shutter speed TV for control as a result of the comparison calculation and charging of the strobe device 384 have been completed and the flash photography mode is set. "BF" and the aperture value AV used for control are displayed. In addition, in the case of manual mode, the aperture value AV displayed in the finder 13 must be manually set by the photographer on the lens device 2 side, and therefore "M" indicating this is also displayed. This is also shown in (Vl) of FIG. 10(C).

The operations of the camera and strobe device 384 in the semi-automatic/automatic dimming/automatic mode and the semi-automatic/automatic dimming/manual mode are the same as those described above.

Next, in the case of fully automatic/full flash/manual mode, the strobe device 384 is in a state where it can fire at full power without specially setting the aperture value with the aperture setting dial 108, but on the other hand, the camera device side , analog signal data VSA of a level indicating that no aperture value is set to the aperture setting dial 108 is provided, and a charging completion signal C8A is also provided. This charging completion signal C8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to fully automatic/semi-automatic, but the fully automatic mode is determined by the charging completion signal O8A as described above. This is the case when the control signal is included or the mode selector 38 on the camera device side is set to give priority to aperture.

7. The data VSA imported into the camera device side is
In order to show that no aperture value is set on the strobe side, an analog value is set such that the A-D conversion at the A-D converter 382 and the result overflow.

Therefore, in the strobe photography mode, the A-D converter 3
82 overflows, this is taken into the camera device side as a signal indicating the full emission mode, and at this time, preset control of the aperture of the lens device 2 is not performed when the body 4 of the camera device is raised. Therefore, in such a case, it is necessary to manually preset the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side.

Such a control routine is carried out in exactly the same way in the fully automatic/full-power emission/minimum aperture mode.

However, in this mode, since the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side,
The lens device 2 is in a state equivalent to being preset to the minimum aperture position, and its aperture is eventually controlled to the minimum aperture.

The photographer can check the status of the mode set by the above-described discrimination operation on the file radar 13, but the display at this time is as shown in Figure 1O ((+l of di, (w)
), the strobe synchronization speed TSYN, for example, the shutter speed of 1/60 second, and the strobe device 38.
4 is completed and "EF" is displayed indicating that the camera is in strobe photography mode. In addition, in the case of manual mode, the "M" display indicating that the photographer needs to manually preset the aperture value of the lens device 2 is also shown in the (mark) of Fig. 10 (dl). As it is,
In the minimum aperture mode, the aperture of the lens device 2 is not set, so no information about the aperture is displayed at all, as shown in Figure 10 (dl) (rl'), in order to inform the photographer of this fact. do not.

The operations of the camera device and strobe device 384 in the fully automatic, full flash, manual mode, and the fully automatic, full flash, minimum aperture mode have already been explained previously, so further details will be provided here. No explanation given◇Next, in the case of semi-automatic, full flash, and manual mode, the strobe device 384 does not need to specially set the aperture p value with the aperture setting dial 108, that is, the manual mode display 110
By setting the aperture setting dial 108, the camera device becomes able to emit the full amount of light, but on the other hand, data VSA of an analog signal at a level indicating that no aperture value is set on the aperture setting dial 108 is given to the camera device. Along with the charging completion signal (,S
A is given. This charging completion signal O8A includes a control signal that depends on the amount of current related to full automatic mode and semi-automatic mode, but as explained earlier, the semi-automatic mode is the control signal for semi-automatic mode in this charging completion signal O8A. , and the mode selector 38 on the camera device side gives priority to the shutter speed.

In this case, first, a comparison calculation is performed to determine which of the strobe synchronized shutter speed TSYN of the camera device body 4 and the shutter speed TV set by the dial 34 of the body 4 is greater. As a result of this comparison calculation, one of the lower shutter speeds is set as the shutter speed TV for control.

Next, the data VSA imported from the strobe device 384 to the camera device side indicates that no aperture value has been set on the strobe side, as a result of A-D conversion by the A-D converter 382.・The analog amount is set so that it flows. Therefore, when the Dano A-D converter 382 overflows in strobe photography mode, this is sent to the camera device as a signal indicating full flash mode, and at this time, the body of the camera device The aperture reset control of the lens device 2 is not performed from the 4 side. Therefore, in this case, the aperture setting IJ of the lens device 2 side
It is necessary to manually preset the light by using the 7 and 8 controls.This control routine is performed in exactly the same way in the semi-automatic, full emission, and minimum aperture modes. However, in this mode 4, the mark 12 is selected by the aperture setting ring 8 on the lens device 2 side, so the lens device 2 is in a state equivalent to being preset to the minimum aperture position. Eventually, the aperture will be controlled to the minimum aperture.

The photographer can check the state of the mode set by the above-mentioned discrimination operation in the viewfinder 13, but the display at this time is as shown in Fig. 10(d) -(Vl (V
As shown in ll, the shutter speed TV and strobe device 38 for control selected as a result of the previous comparison calculation are selected.
4 completed charging and struck.

"EF" is displayed to indicate that the camera is in the Ropo photography mode. In addition, in the case of manual mode, "M" is displayed indicating that the photographer needs to manually preset the aperture value of the lens device 2. As shown in (11) of Fig. 10 (dl), However, in the case of the minimum aperture mode, the aperture of the lens device 2 is not set. No information will be displayed.

Note that the operations of the camera device and the strobe device 384 in the semi-automatic/full-power flash mode/manual mode and the semi-automatic/full-power flash mode/minimum aperture mode have already been explained, so further detailed explanations will not be given.

In addition, if Pulp is selected on the body 4 side of the camera device in the strobe photography mode, the control regarding fully automatic or semi-automatic in each strobe photography mode described above, that is, the automatic speed regarding the shutter speed. Priority is given to decision control, and pulp photography becomes possible.

Therefore, in the pulp strobe photography mode, no special calculation is performed, and the same calculation control as in each strobe photography mode described above is performed only to control the aperture of the photographic lens device. It will be.

/ Therefore, in this camera system, there are 4 routines for calculations for exposure control based on photometry results and 4 routines for calculations for exposure control based on strobe photography, for a total of 8 general calculation controls. It includes routines, and various photographing modes are realized by irregularly applying these eight rough calculation control routines.

This camera system, which includes the calculation routines described above, takes in setting input data, setting conditions, and operating conditions, and performs calculations and controls each mechanism based on comprehensive judgment. The control system applied to the system will need to be arranged efficiently based on rational considerations.

In other words, with the eight calculation routines mentioned above as the core of the system, data input from the outside is automatically determined and input into the system in response to the various shooting modes desired by the photographer. It detects erroneous settings or erroneous operations associated with various mechanical constraints of the camera mechanism, notifies the photographer of the situation, and displays information necessary for various types of photography, and controls the mechanical operation of the camera mechanism. There is a need to realize a control system that allows effective control signals and control sequences to be set.

From this point of view, a control circuit as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 30 was constructed.
64 is shown more specifically.

This system is basically controlled by a clock pulse CP, and for this purpose, a clock pulse generator 542 is provided in the central control section 362. This clock pulse CP is used to control the entire system. Specifically, this clock pulse generator 542 can be realized through a configuration as shown in FIG. The clock period of this clock pulse CP is extremely important for measuring real time, which will be explained later.
1. It is necessary to sufficiently adjust and set the variable resistor 542A shown in the figure.

This clock pulse CP is introduced into a system pulse generator 544, which generates a system pulse as shown in FIG. 32 based on the clock pulse CP. The 0 system pulse consists of counter pulses CT1 to OT4 and timing pulses TBO° to TB7, etc., and various operations of this camera system are performed based on the system pulses. Note that in this system, the period between timing pulses TBO to TB7 is one word time.

The system pulse generator 544, whose specific configuration is shown in FIG. 33, has counter pulses OTI, OT2. 6D40 to generate OT4
29 (manufactured by AAA) using a binary 7-p counter using an integrated circuit element.
0D4028 (ROA
It uses a decoder that uses integrated circuit elements manufactured by Manufacturer Co., Ltd.

The integrated circuit element C! D4029, whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 34, is functionally an up/down counter, but in this embodiment it is a binary up/down converter that operates in synchronization with the clock pulse CP.・It is used as a counter. In such a configuration,
The clock pulse C is applied to the clock pulse terminal CLK.
By inputting P, counter pulses OTI to OT4 as shown in FIG. 32 can be obtained from the output terminals Q1 to Q3, respectively.

The integrated circuit element 0D4028, whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 35, functionally constitutes a binary value decoder. In this system, by inputting the counter pulses CTx, CT2°OT4 to the A to C terminals of this element,! It is possible to obtain timing noises TBO-TB7 as shown in FIG. 32 from the output terminals QO-Q7.
TB6 is applied to a driver circuit 546, which outputs timing pulses TB1-TB6. These timing pulses TB1 to TB6 are given to the display means 402 through the timing line 394 as digit pulses for dynamically driving the digital display means 402, and are also input to the film sensitivity input mechanism 518, the open aperture value, MNAL and 5PDW signals. The timing pulse is applied to the setting input mechanism 522, AV/TV, ASLO setting mechanism 528, and maximum aperture setting mechanism 536 through the timing line 394 as a timing pulse for data acquisition.

Here, the film sensitivity input mechanism 518 has a configuration as shown in FIG. 12, and the film sensitivity Sv' can be sequentially extracted from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6.

Regarding this i-detail, it is already mentioned in the previous section 9.

The data Sv regarding film sensitivity is input by approximating data set with 1/3 step accuracy to 1/8 step precision. That is, initially, from the film sensitivity input mechanism 518, °1'' is set to the bit having the weight of h stage for the weight of 4 stages, and to the bit having the weight of b stage for the weight of 1 stage. It has already been mentioned in Section 7 that the film sensitivity data Sv' is taken into the camera system by this method.However, as it is, it does not become an approximation data for the amateur level, so it corresponds to the weight of 2 steps or 1 step. The scanty data Sv' regarding the film sensitivity, which is captured by setting "1" in the pit, is processed as data approximated by 4-stage stacking by unconditionally setting "1" in the bit corresponding to the weight of h-stage. - I have already mentioned that there is one thing that needs to be incorporated into the system.This is just an approximation of equation (61, (7)) as it is.

Here, the role of setting °1" to the h-level weighted bit of the data S■' related to the film sensitivity S■ and converting it to the desired film sensitivity data Sv of the h amateur level is as follows.
This is a set circuit 520. This set circuit 520 receives data Sv regarding film sensitivity, which is sequentially input from the lower digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to T B'6.
' bit with a weight of -, that is, a bit input in synchronization with TBI, or a bit with a weight of 4, that is, T
When "1" is detected in the bit input in synchronization with B2, "1" is set at the TBO timing of the next word time, and 14-step precision film sensitivity data Sv synchronized with 'rBo to TB6 is generated. It is something that can be obtained.

The detailed circuit diagram of the set circuit 520 is shown in FIG. 36, and as is clear from the figure, the timing pulse TBI! The lower two digits of the film/sensitivity data S■' input sequentially from the lower digit in synchronization with ~TB6, that is,
Bi, node or TB with 14 stages of weights synchronized with TBI
It is detected through the AND gate AND1 that a bit with a four-stage weight synchronized with 2 is set to "1" depending on the timing signal inputted through the OR gate ORI. By using the output of the AND gate AND1 as the input signal to the J input terminal of the flip-flop F1, "1" is set in the upper stage of the input data S' or the bit having the weight of one stage. At this time, the Q output of the flip-flop F1 becomes "1", and this °1" output is the first timing pulse TBO of the next word time.
is read out through AND2 in synchronization with . The output of this AND gate AND2 is output through OR2 as a four-stage weighted bit of the film sensitivity data Sv in synchronization with the timing node TBO. Sensitivity Sv
will be taken out as a 1/8-accuracy data synchronized with the timing noculus TBO-6-RA TB6.

In the following explanation, the output (2) of the OR gate OR2 will be referred to as film sensitivity setting data DT8V.

In addition, the open aperture value/MNAL, 8PDW setting mechanism 5
22 has a configuration as shown in FIG. 14, and outputs the MNAL signal in synchronization with the timing node TBI, and the 5PDW signal in synchronization with the timing node TB2.
In synchronization with the timing/I pulses TB3 to TB6, the open aperture value AvOK of the lens device 2 is generated.
(Gray code) sequentially from the high-order digits (75). ) is the open aperture value, MN
It has already been mentioned that the AL, 8 PDW setting mechanism 522 sequentially inputs from the upper digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, but among the information inputted to the pheasant setting mechanism 522, MNAL signal and 5
Since the PDW' signal is also included, it is necessary to separate out only the data AVo (gray code) related to the open aperture value AVo. The signal separation circuit 524 serves as the key to this purpose. This signal separation circuit 52
4 separates data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo inputted in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6 based on the timing pulses, and is separated by this signal separation circuit 524. The data AVoJ (gray code) is the following Bremachi code/
The open aperture value is determined AV through the binary code converter 526.

is converted to As already mentioned above, it is necessary to set the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 to be used in accordance with the Gray code. It has a configuration based on a similar principle, and data AVo' (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo, which is input sequentially from the upper digit 1 in synchronization with timing pulses TB3 to TB6, is a binary -
・Converted to code, timing pulse TB2 to T
It is possible to obtain the data AVo of level B in synchronization with B5. The detailed circuit diagram of the signal separation circuit 524 and the gray code binary code converter 526 is shown in FIG. As is clear from the figure, data regarding the open aperture value AVo, which is input sequentially from the upper digits in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, AVo (gray code) is the timing pulse. M
It is separated from the NAL signal, 5PDW signal, etc., and is a 4-bit parallel signal. Co-parallel output shift register CD403
5 (manufactured by ROA) directly to the J terminal, and the K terminal to the I7 inverter I.
Given through NV 1.

This integrated circuit element C! FIG. 38 shows a detailed logic circuit configuration diagram of D4035, and FIG. 39 shows its logic configuration.

This C! D4035 operates as a serial shift register when "0" is input to its P/s terminal, and "0" is input to its P/s terminal.
It is configured to operate as a parallel shift register when there is a 1" hand force, and these 5 terminals have a flip register that receives timing pulse TB2 at the J hand power end and timing pulse TB6 at the J hand power end. Q of flop F2
0 to which the output is input, that is, this slimmuff 0 tsug F
2 is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock pulse CP following the rising edge of timing pulse TB2, that is, the rising edge of TBa, and the rising edge of the clock pulse CP following the rising edge of TB6. , that is, it is reset in synchronization with the falling edge of TB6, and data AV regarding the open aperture value AVo.
TB3 to TB where o (gray code) is input
During 6, give “0・” input to the false terminal of 0D4035',
t, 0D4035 operates as a serial type shift register.

Now, the integrated circuit element C! While the D4035 is operating as a serial shift register, if serial data of mutually inverted Gray codes is input to the J terminal one by one from the high-order digits, in other words, the J ,
This corresponds to inputting the same serial data to the terminals, but the Gray code serial data is converted to binary code serial data and stored. This operation is performed while timing pulses TB3 to TB6 are being generated to which data AVo (gray code) regarding the open aperture value AVo is input. -5- After the above operations, moving to the timing of timing pulse TB7,
Flip-flop F2 is reset and its Q output becomes “
CD4 receives the Q output to the false terminal in order to become
035 will operate as a parallel type shift register, but this (!l: D4035 gives its Q3 output to D2 manual power, Q2 output to D1 manual power, and Q1 output to DO manual power, respectively. This CD4035 operates while "1" input is given to the false terminal, that is, TB7 to T
It will operate as a register in series with B2. At this time, the open aperture value data A which is binary-converted and stored from the QO" terminal is sequentially stored in this register starting from the upper digit.
Vo sequentially starts from the lower digit, timing pulse TB7~
This data AV will be output in synchronization with TB2.
o is taken out through AND4 which receives the Q output of flip-flop F2 which is in the reset state between timing pulses TB7 and TB20, but this data AVo is determined by the weight and timing of each bit. - Correspondence with pulse is different from other data.

Therefore, after providing a delay time of 3 bits through flip-flops F3 to F5, flip-flop F
From the Q output terminal of 5, timing pulses TB2 to T
The data that has been stored in B6 will be retrieved. In this way, the open aperture value AVo is taken out as data with precision that is synchronized with the timing pulses TB2 and TB6.

In the following description, the Q output of the flip-flop F5 will be referred to as open aperture value data DTAO.

The aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used as described above has a close relationship with the curvature error AVc during aperture metering, and calculations for exposure control based on aperture metering are performed. In this case, it is necessary to take this curvature error AVc into consideration. This curve error AVc is the maximum aperture value AV of the photographic lens device 2 used.

-, but in the system of this embodiment, the maximum aperture value AV that is considered to be input
The bending error data AVc corresponding to each of o is prepared in advance, and the bending error data AVc corresponding to the input aperture value AVo is selected and imported.・The error data AVc is stored in the fixed data ROM 528, and is selected appropriately according to the input aperture value AVo, and the timing and
This data is sequentially output from the lower digits as data of h amateur level synchronized from pulse TBO to TB3.

The detailed configuration for capturing the curve error as described above is shown in FIG. 37, and register OD40a
The data from each terminal of QO to Q3 of 5 is sent to the decoder CD.
40.28, and any one of the outputs Q2 to Q9 of this decoder is set to "1" output.The output of the decoder is stored in a ROM that stores more than a dozen bending errors AVc. 4-pit bending error data AVc given and written in the address corresponding to the decoder output.
Output. The output of this ROM is output from each timing buffer OD4042 D1, D2, . D3. It is applied to the D4 input terminal. This timing buffer 0D4042 is R
This is an integrated circuit device manufactured by OA Corporation, and a block configuration diagram thereof is shown in FIG. This timing buffer has Vcc applied to its Pol terminal, and therefore has the function of taking in the output of the ROM at the timing of TB7 and storing and outputting it at a timing other than TB7. It is at the rising timing of TB7 that the register 0D4035 converts the open aperture value AVo into binary and completes the capture, and at this point, the register OD4035's QO, Ql, Q2 . Since it is the binary-converted open aperture value AVo that begins to be output in parallel from the Q3 terminal, the output S of the ROM is
=Bending error AV corresponding to large input aperture value AVo
c is at the timing of TB7, so the output at this time is taken in at the timing of TB7.
This is to obtain the necessary music p error AVc.

As described above, the timing buffer 0D40
The music error data AVc stored in 42 are QO, Ql,
Q2. X of the integrated circuit element MO14539 (manufactured by Motorola) that is output from the Q3 terminal and then converted to serial data.
The signals are input to the O, Xi, and X2 and X3 terminals, respectively. The block diagram of this integrated circuit element Me14539 is shown in FIG. 41, the truth table is shown in FIG. 42, and the specific logic diagram is shown in FIG. 43.
2. The bending error data AVc input in parallel through the
4, it is output from the Z terminal as serial data synchronized with timing pulses TBO to 'TB3. In this way, the bending error AVc is determined by the timing pulse TB.
It will be taken out from the Z terminal of the integrated circuit element MC14539 as h-accuracy data synchronized with O-TB3.

In the following description, the integrated circuit element MC1
The Z terminal output Q of 4539 is the bending error data DTAO.
It is called.

The TV-AV-ASLO setting mechanism 528 has a configuration as shown in FIG. The shutter speed TV or aperture value AV set by the dial 34 can be taken out. The details have already been described.

Shutter speed set by dial 34, aperture value AV % O, AV, TV ・A
SLC! Timing pulse T through setting mechanism 528
As mentioned above, the data from the setting device 11!528 is taken in in synchronization with B2 to TB6, but the data from the setting device 11!528 corresponds to the shutter speed TV or the aperture value AV. There is no distinction as to whether the However, whether the data is captured as shutter speed TV or aperture value is determined by TBI.
The determination is made based on the aperture 9 setting signal ASLC, which is taken in in synchronization with the timing pulse. Note that the data is transmitted to the AV-TV-A together with the aperture setting signal ASLC.
The timing pulse TB2 is taken in from the SLO setting mechanism 528, and the timing pulse TB2 is taken in from the output signal of the setting mechanism 528.
The signal classification circuit 532 separates the data taken in in synchronization with ~TB6. The data separated by the signal separation circuit 532 can be used as is as data AV related to the aperture υ value, but in order to use this data as data related to the Scheitor speed TV, it is necessary to , we need to double it.

This is because the minimum unit 1' for setting the aperture value AV using the dial 34 is 7 steps, whereas the minimum unit 1' for the shutter speed TV set through the common dial 34 is 1 step. The speed TV is multiplied by one and set after matching the minimum unit of data with the aperture value AV, and when this data is later used as a shutter speed, it is multiplied by two. To achieve this purpose, the
In the doubling circuit 530, the data is output as data TV regarding the shutter speed through the doubling circuit 530.

Note that the action of the doubling circuit 530 is such that the data inputted in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6 is outputted as data synchronized with the timing pulses TB3 to TB7. The point is that it provides a delay of one.

As described above, the data TV regarding the set shutter speed is input as one-stage stack data in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB7.
Further, the data AV regarding the set aperture value is inputted as the data of the b amateur degree in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB,6.

The specific circuit configuration diagram of the signal separation circuit 532 and the doubling circuit 530 described above is as shown in FIG.
, the output of the AV/ASLO setting mechanism 528 is an AND gate AND4 to which the timing pulse TBI is input through the inverter INV2, and only signals related to the TV-AV that are synchronized with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6 are separated. . If the data separated in this way is to be used as information about the aperture value, it can be left as is, but if it is to be used as data about the shutter speed, it should be delayed by one clock time using the flip-prop F6. The data will be extracted as one-stage stack data synchronized with pulses TB3 to TB7.

In addition, in the following explanation, 1.
The output of ND4 is called aperture setting data DTAV.
The Q output (2) of the flip-flop F6 is referred to as shutter speed setting data DTTV.

Further, the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 has a configuration as shown in FIG.
In synchronization with ~TB6, data AMAX' regarding the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 in use can be extracted, but this has already been described.

This maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 does not generate the maximum aperture value data AMAX by itself, but rather generates the required maximum aperture value data AMAX from among the large number of fixed data stored in the fixed data ROM 534. This is for selective output. That is, as shown in FIG. 20, the data AMAX input from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1 to TB6 corresponds to each F of the actual maximum aperture value AMAX. Number Fl Minoh, F16
．． F22. F32. Timing pulses TBI to TBS correspond to each F45°P64, so data is introduced and accumulated in series from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 to the serial manual-parallel output register 538, and then the data is input to the register 538. If you look at which bit is outputting 1", you can see that it is the maximum aperture value AM of the photographic lens device 2 used.
AX is Fil, F16°P22. F32. F45. F
64. Therefore, the register 538 for parallel use is led to the fixed data ROM 534,
When a signal specifying the maximum aperture value AMAX is inputted to the fixed data ROM 534 from the instruction ROM 504 described later, the maximum aperture value AMAX specified by the register 538 is output.

The specific configuration for deriving the maximum aperture value AMAX from the fixed data ROM 534 will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, the timing pulse TBI is output from the open aperture value/MNAL-5PDW setting mechanism 522.

MNAL signal and 5PDW input in synchronization with TB2
The signal is introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548 and the timing
Both signals are separated based on the pulse and then stored!
As a result, from the condition signal storage path 548, MNAL
to MNAL signal and S'PDW to 5PDW signal can be obtained.

The condition signal storage circuit 548, whose detailed configuration is shown in FIG. 45, receives timing pulses TB1. Of the MNAL signal and 5PDW signal input in synchronization with each of TB2, the MNAL signal is detected and stored by the flip-flop F1o which uses the timing pulse TB2 as a clock input, and the 5PDW signal is detected by the timing pulse TB2.
The signal is detected and stored by a single flip-flop F11 which receives the pulse TB3 as a clock input.

As a result, the MNA L signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F10, and the MNA L signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F10.
The L signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop Fil, and the 5PDW signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop Fil.
Each signal will be output.

In addition, the TV, AV, ASL (ASLO inputted from the J foot mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI)
The signals are introduced into the condition signal storage circuit 548 where they are separated and stored based on timing pulses. the result,
The ASLO signal to A8LO signal can be obtained from the condition signal storage circuit 548.

The details of this are also shown in FIG. 45, and the AsLO signal inputted from the TV, AV/ASLC setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBI is a 7.
It will be detected and memorized by the lip 70 knob F9.
．． Therefore, the ASLC signal is output from the Q output terminal of the F9, and the ASLO signal is output from the mutual output terminal.

On the other hand, the condition signal storage circuit 548 takes in the data separated by the signal separation circuit 532 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB2 to TB6. , in order to determine this. That is, in this system, the valve mode is set when all the pits of the data set by the dial 34 are "0", and therefore, only the "0" signal is generated between the timing pulses TB2 and TB36. If only one input is input, the valve/
Determining the mode.

That is, the condition signal storage circuit 548 does not output one "1" from the output terminal of the signal discriminator circuit 532 during the timing pulses TB2 to TB6.

If the shutter speed is in the pulp mode, this storage signal is output from the condition signal storage circuit 548 as a BLB signal or a reverse BLB signal indicating that the shutter speed is in the pulp mode.

The details are also shown in FIG. 45, and the data sent from the TV/AV/ASLO setting mechanism 528 in synchronization with the timing pulses TB1 to TB6 is passed through the input terminal INV3.・The ASLO signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBI is removed by the AND gate AND5 to which the timing pulse TBI is input, and then input to the J input terminal of the flip-flop F7 at J-. Flip to this J-)
The knob F7 receives the clock pulse C as its input.
In addition, the timing signal TBI is input to the input terminal of P.The Q output of this flip-flop F7 is further input to the input terminal of another J- input terminal of flip-flop F8. Furthermore, the Q output is applied to the J input terminal. Note that a clock pulse TBO is input to the J- terminal as a clock input of the flip-flop F8.

In this configuration, when the timing pulse TBI is input to the input terminal of the flip-flop F7,
Flip-flop F7 is temporarily placed in the reset state in synchronization with the rise of the next clock pulse CP. At this time, if there is even one 1" output from the AND gate AND5 between the timing pulses TBI to TB6, the flip-flop F7 becomes set and its Q output becomes "1". “1” output is flip
Since it becomes a terminal input to the flop P, 80, this flip
Even if TBO is input as the clock input of flop F8, flip-flop F8 is in the reset state.
The Q output ratio is maintained at "0". Conversely, if there is no 1" output from AND5 to timing pulses TBI to TB6, this flip-flop F7 maintains the reset state and its Q output also becomes "1".
This "L" output becomes the J terminal input of flip-flop F8, so when TBO is input as the clock input of this clip/70-tube F8, 7-lip-flop F8 is set. , its Q output is “1”
”.This state is held as “and goo)”.
D5. .

If even one output is "1" at the timing from TB2 to TB6, it will be resolved at the time of the next TBO. As described above, the BLB signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F8, and the BLB signal is output from the Q output terminal.

Through the configuration described above, the condition signal storage circuit 5
From 48, the MNAL signal is generated depending on the settings of various conditions in the mechanism part 358.

The MNAL signal, BLB signal, BLB signal, S, PDW signal, 5PDW signal, ASLO signal, and ASLO signal will be output.

On the other hand, various data, condition setting signals, state determination signals, etc. are also input from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360.

Analog output from TTL photometry means 378 or terminal 56
The analog signal input from the A
-D converter, this A-D converter generates a reference signal 550. A-D conversion control circuit 552. Integrator 554. Integrator control means 555. Comparator 556° force ρ lid 558. It consists of a flip-flop 560° 562 and a buffer register 564.

This A-D converter is generally a dual lamp -A
- A well-known A-to-D converter called a D converter, which integrates input analog data in the positive direction for a certain period of time to obtain an integration level proportional to the input analog data. Thereafter, from the integration level, integration is performed in the negative direction based on a predetermined constant level signal, and the initially input analog data corresponds to the time from the start to the end of this integration in the negative direction. Then, by counting reference pulse signals during the time period, a digital conversion value of the input analog data is obtained.

In the A-D converter having such a configuration, the integrator 554 is used to integrate the input analog data in the positive direction and the reference level signal in the negative direction, and also integrates the reference level signal in the negative direction. Means 550 is for generating said reference level signal and said integrator control means 55.
In order to clear the residual integral value of 5, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 also controls the signal input to the integrator 554,
That is, in order to switch between the analog data and reference level signals and to switch the integrator 554 between positive and negative ramps, the comparator 556 connects the output of the integrator 554 to the reference level (in this embodiment, ground level). ) to detect that the negative direction integration has been completed, the counter 55
Reference numeral 8 denotes a buffer register 564 for measuring a certain time when input analog data is integrated for a certain period of time in the forward direction and also for measuring an integration time when integrating the reference level signal in the reverse direction. At the point when the integrator 554 completes the constant integration of the reference level signal in the opposite direction, the flip-flop 56.0 is operated to capture and store the contents of the counter 558. The clip-flop 562 is used to generate a signal for switching the signal taken in through the circuit 552 and applied to the integrator 5547 and for switching the integration direction of the integrator 554, that is, for switching the ramp. As a result, the counter 558 is used to output a detection command signal for detecting an overflow event.

The comparator 556 is configured to output "1" when there is an input integral value, and output "0" when the input integral value falls below a certain level.

When starting A-D conversion in such a configuration,
Initially, the A/D conversion control circuit 552 takes in analog data input from its a input terminal and supplies it to the integrator 554. At this time, the flip-flop 560 is still in the reset state, and therefore the integrator 554 is set to integrate in the positive direction, so the input analog data is integrated in the positive direction by the integrator 554. Ru. At the same time, counter 558 begins counting in synchronization with clock pulse CP. As mentioned above, the counter 558 is used for time control and for taking in A-D conversion data, and divides the input clock pulse CP appropriately to create a reference time. A configuration is adopted in which this reference time is counted.

After the counting operation as described above, when the counter 558 overflows, that is, the counting starts.

After a certain period of time has passed after the start, the contents of the counter 558 become all "0", and at the same time the flip-flop 56
0 is set, that is, flip-flop 560
The fact that is set indicates that a certain period of time has passed since the counter 558 started counting, and this means that the integrator 554 has been integrating the input analog data for a certain period of time. It means that something has happened. The integrator 554 at this time. The output of the input analog
There is no need to explain that it is proportional to the data.

The output of the flip-flop 560 is given to an A-to-digital conversion control circuit 552, and the input to the integrator 554 is provided to a reference level generating means 550 connected to the b terminal side of the A-to-digital conversion control circuit 55a. By setting the integrator 554 to integrate in the positive direction at the same time as switching to the reference voltage signal from the current source, the integrator 554 integrates the reference voltage signal in the opposite direction. follow, te, and b
Based on the reference voltage from the input terminal, the data stored in the integrator 554 as a result of the previous data integration is inversely integrated. On the other hand, the counter 558, which previously overflowed and its contents became all "0", continues counting.

At this time, it is obvious that the amount counted by the counter 558 and the amount of inverse integration by the integrator 554 are in a proportional relationship. As a result of this inverse integration, when the output of this integrator 554 reaches a certain value, that is, when the inverse integration corresponding to the integrated amount of analog data previously integrated for a certain period of time is completed, the output of the comparator 556 becomes 1. This is detected because the output changes from "O" to "O", but immediately based on the change in the output of the comparator 556, the buffer register 564 receives and stores the counted quantity of the counter 558. At this time, the counted amount of the counter 558 stored in the buffer register 564 corresponds to the amount of inverse integration by the integrator 554, that is, the analog data that was previously integrated for a certain period of time by the integrator 554. In the system of this embodiment, after such an operation, the buffer register 564
The counted amount of the counter 558 introduced and stored in the input analog data is used as digital conversion data corresponding to the input analog data. - Note that even after the above operation, the counter 558 continues counting, and as a result of this counting, if the counter 558 overflows again, the contents of the counter 558 will be changed to "
0'', and at the same time the flip-flop 560 is reset, the flip-flop 562 is also set. By resetting the flip-flop 560, the A-D conversion control circuit 552 temporarily controls the integration After clearing the integrator 554 through the integrator control means 555, the analog horse data input from the a input terminal is taken in and given to the integrator 554, and the analog data is integrated again. As described above, since this A-D converter repeats the same operation thereafter, the system of this embodiment does not always have to repeatedly take in new analog data through A-D conversion. , the contents of buffer register 564 are constantly updated with digital data corresponding to new input analog data.

Note that the operating state of the A/D converter always needs to be detected by the stem, and a logic circuit 566 is provided for this purpose. This logic circuit 5.66
is the comparator 556 flip-flop 560.56
When the output signal of 2 is taken in, the INT signal indicating that the input analog data is being integrated by the integrator 554, the A-D conversion is completed, and the A-D conversion data can be transferred and read. As a result of A-D conversion, the input analog data is too large, and the counter 558 outputs an ADOF signal indicating that the counter 558 has flown.

As described above, the analog data introduced from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 360 is stored in the buffer register 564 as digital conversion data DD, and this data DD is transferred to the signal switching circuit 5'. 68, based on the command from the logic circuit 566, input signals are sequentially input from the lower digits as digital data synchronized with the timing pulses TB0-TB7.
70 and transferred to the central control unit 362.

On the other hand, the INT signal output from the logic circuit 566 is placed on the bus line 366 as a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7, and the ADOB signal is sent as a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB6.

Note that the details will be explained later.

Terminal 54 of mechanism portion 358 receives strobe photoelectric completion signal C8A and signal OLM indicating external photometry adapter mode.
As mentioned above, these signals are the CGUP signal that indicates whether or not charging of the strobe is completed by the current detector 386, and the shutter speed during strobe shooting is fully automatic. The FAT signal indicates that the external photometry adapter is applied, and the OLM signal indicates that the external photometry adapter is applied. These signals are further converted into two signals OU, AO by an encoder 570.9 These OU and AO multiplied signals, as shown in FIG.
” means that the system performs exposure control based on photometric data, and at this time, the AO multiplication signal “0
“If so, the TTL metering shooting mode will be instructed.
If it is "1", the external photometry shooting mode is instructed. Also, when the OU multiplication signal is "1", it instructs the system to flash photography mode, and at this time the AO multiplication signal is "O".
If so, instruct the shutter speed to be controlled semi-automatically,
If it is "1", it instructs to control the shutter speed fully automatically. These signals OU and AO are applied to terminals a and b of multiplexer 572, respectively.

The multiplexer 572 has input terminals a to f, and input signals from the input terminals to a timing pulse T.
It is configured to convert into a serial signal and output it in synchronization with BI to TB6. The c, d, and e terminals of this multiplexer 572 are connected to an AE lock signal AELK and an AE charge signal ABC!, respectively. G.

Winding completion signals WN and UP are applied, and a signal A'DOF indicating AD conversion overflow is applied to the f terminal from the logic circuit 566. As a result, this multi-
From plexer 572, timing pulses TBI~T
The ADOF signal, the AELK signal, the AECG signal, the WNUP signal, the AO double signal and the OU double signal are output in synchronization with each of B6. ~ In synchronization with TB6, it was placed on the condylar entry cavus line 370,
Note that this signal switching circuit 568 is controlled based on the command from the logic circuit 566, and when the A-D conversion of the input analog data is completed, the A- When transfer of D-converted data becomes possible, the output of the buffer register 564 is applied to the input bus line 370, and in other conditions, the serial output signal of the multiplexer 572 is applied to the input bus line 370.
70.

The detailed block diagram of the input control section 360 described above is shown in FIG. 48. In the same figure, 5
Reference numeral 57 denotes a frequency division counter which divides the clock pulse CP by 32 to generate a reference clock for timekeeping, and generates the reference clock from its Q4 terminal. This reference clock is input to the counter 558 through the inverter INV4.
Therefore, this counter 558 divides and counts the reference clock and calculates its Q.
Outputs 8-bit count data from the O-Q7 terminal. Note that the most significant bit of the output data of the counter 558)
7 is applied to the clock terminal of flip-flop 560 through inverter INV5. this,.

Flip-flop 560 has its Q output as its D input, and essentially constitutes one bit of the most significant bit of counter 558. Further, the output of the inverter INV5 is introduced into a NAND gate NAND1 which receives the Q output of the flip-flop 560 at one input terminal, and this NAND gate NAND
The output of 1 is provided to the clock terminal of flip-flop 562. Similar to the flip-flop 560, this flip-flop 562 also converts its output into its D
The counter 558 and the flip-flop 5600 are used as an input, and essentially constitute one pit.

That is, as is clear from the above explanation, the frequency division counter 577, the counter 558, and the flip-flop 560
．． 562 constitutes a 15-bit frequency dividing counter. In this embodiment, two integrated circuit elements MC14520 (manufactured by Motorola) were used to realize such a 15-bit frequency division counter.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 49, this integrated circuit element MCI4520 has two
One of the counters has a configuration as shown in the logic diagram of FIG.
520 as shown in FIG. 51, the 15-bit counter mentioned above can be realized.
This configuration is realized by connecting four 4-bit counters in series, and the counter configured in this way can distinguish from the least significant bit to the fifth bit. It is used as a lap counter 557, and the 6th bit to the 13th bit is allocated to an 8-pit counter, that is, the counter 558.
Flip-flop 560562 for each 5th bit
Appropriated as such. The counter having the above-mentioned configuration is reset immediately when a signal is input to the direct reset terminal.

In FIG. 48, the buffer register 564 is a parallel
It consists of an in-parallel-out type register, which captures and stores the data input to the input terminals DO to D7 in synchronization with the rising edge of the clock terminal C input, and outputs it to the QO to Q7 terminals. It is something to do. This buffer register 564 receives the QO to Q7 terminal outputs of the counter 558 at each of its Do-D7 terminals, and sends each of the QO to Q7 terminal outputs to the Xo-X7 input terminal of the signal separation circuit 568. giving. Also,
At the clock terminal C of this buffer register 564,
The output of the comparator 556 is applied through the inverter INV8, and therefore, when the output of the comparator 55-6 falls from 1" to When the definite integral in the negative direction is completed, the count data of the counter 558 is input.

The buffer register 564 is specifically a 4-bit parallel-in/parallel-out type shift register integrated circuit element 0D40 shown in FIG.
35 (manufactured by ROA), which can be easily realized by arranging two of them side by side as shown in FIG.

The signal switching circuit 568 and the multiplexer 572 are basically multiplexers having the same configuration, and both can be configured using an integrated circuit element MO14512 (manufactured by Motorola).

This integrated circuit element MC14512 has a configuration as shown in the logic diagram of FIG. 53 and characteristics as shown in the truth table of FIG. 54. This integrated circuit element Me145
12 receives 8-bit parallel data from the XO-'X7 terminal, and A with a "0" signal applied to its DIS terminal.

When counter pulses as shown in FIG. 32 are applied from the B and O terminals, the input data of the X0 to X7 terminals is sequentially input to the conversion circuit from the Z' terminal in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7. Each terminal from XO to X7 of 568 has
It receives the output signals of the buffer registers QO-Q7, and counter pulses CTI, OT2, and OT4 are input to its A, B, and O terminals, respectively. The X1 terminal of multiplexer 572 still has
As a result of AD conversion, the ADOF signal indicating that the counter 558 has overflowed, the AELK signal to the X2 terminal, the AEo<1) signal to the X3 terminal, and the W signal to the X4 terminal.
The NUP signal is inputted to the X5 terminal as an AO times signal, and the X6 terminal as an OU times signal.
Each terminal has a counter pulse CTI, OT2.
゜OT4 is input. Note that the output terminal Z of the switching circuit 568 and the output terminal Z of the multiplexer 572 are wired-OR coupled to each other, and the input bus line 3
It is connected to 70. In this configuration, the same signal as the switching control signal input to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572 is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 via INV9. Depending on the state of the switching control signal, the input path line 370 receives data inputted to either xo-X7 of the signal switching circuit 568 or X of the multiplexer 572.
One of the various signals input from O to X7 is output in synchronization with the timing pulses TB0 to TB7.

Further, the output of the flip-flop 560 is inputted to the D terminal of the flip-flop F14 synchronized with the clock pulse CP through the inverter INV7, and the Q output of the flip-flop F14 is synchronized with the timing pulse TBO. It is input to the D terminal of flip-flop F15. Furthermore, this flip-flop F15
The Q output of is a flip signal synchronized with timing pulse TBo.
It is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F16, and the Q output of this flip-flop F16 is the timing pulse T B OfifJ (period cr).
It is input to the D terminal of 17.

In the configuration as described above, the flip 70-tube F
The operations of F14 to F17 will be explained according to the timing chart of FIG. Now, when the output of the flip-flop 560 changes from "1" to "0", that is, when the output of the inverter NV7 changes from "Oo to 1", the flip-flop F14 outputs
is set in synchronization with D of flip-flop F15.
A “1” signal is input to the terminal. Therefore, flip 7
Since the zero knob F15 is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO, its Q output becomes °1". The Q output of this flip-flop F15 is Since the flip-flop F16 is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO, its Q output is “1”.
In other words, through the above operations, the comparator 55'6 is
The one-word time immediately after the output changes from "0' to 1" can be obtained. The 1-word time obtained in this manner becomes the basis for obtaining the ADCE signal indicating that the AD conversion has been completed. Note that the "1" output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F16 is further input to the D terminal of the slip-flop F17, so the flip-flop F17 is activated in synchronization with the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO. is set, and its Q output becomes °1''.

In other words, through the above operations, the flip-flop F1
By adopting the AND condition of the Q output of 6 and the 4 outputs of F17 and F17, the output of the comparator 556 changes from "0" to "1', and then the second one You can get a lot of time.

The 1-word time obtained in this way is the 1-word time immediately after the 1-word time when the ADCE signal indicating the completion of the A-D conversion is output. It is used to transfer.

Note that the Q output of the flip-flop F'15 and the four outputs of the flip-flop F16 are given to the AND gate AND9 to which the timing pulse TB6 is input, and as a result, as shown in FIG.・
A signal is output from the AND gate AND9 at the timing of TB6, one word time immediately after the Q output of the flop 560 changes from °1" to "0", but this signal indicates that AD conversion has been completed. A-D conversion completion signal A indicating that
It is placed on bus line 366 through OR gate OR4 as DCE. That is, the flip-flop 5
The fact that the Q output of 60 changed from 1" to °O" means that
This is because it indicates that the lamp of the integrator 554, which had been performing definite integration in the negative direction, has been switched on, that is, that the A/D conversion has been completely completed. Note that this will be explained in detail later.

Further, the Q output of the flip-flop F16 and the Φ output of the flip-flop F17 are connected to an AND gate AN
As a result, as shown in FIG. 5-5, the AND gate outputs a signal that is at a high level for one word following the output of the ADCE signal. The output signal of the AND gate AND10 is applied as a control signal for data transfer to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 568 through the inverter INV9, and also directly to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572. As a result, the data in the buffer register 564, that is, the digital data obtained by the A-reconversion, is transferred to the second word of the signal switching circuit 568 for only one word after the ADCE signal is output. The data are sequentially output from the terminal to the input bus line 370 starting from the lower digit in synchronization with the timing pulse TBO-TB7.

Note that during this time, since the °1" signal is input from the AND gate AND10 to the DIS terminal of the multiplexer 572, the output from the Z terminal is regulated. That is, the state returns to the normal state. If so, input bus 370 receives A from two terminals of multiplexer 572 in synchronization with timing pulses TBI-TB6.
Although signals such as gLeAECG, WNUP, AO, and CU are being output, when the ADCE signal is output after the completion of A-D conversion, the signal switching circuit 5 is activated only during the next word time.
68, the A/D converted digital data DD stored in the buffer register 564 is output.

Meanwhile, the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is 1 through the inverter INVIO, and the timing pulse TB7
is input to the AND gate AND8 which receives the input. That is, while the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is 0 degrees, the AND gate AND8 outputs a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB7.
is placed on bus line 366 through OR gate OR4 as a NT signal indicating that the input analog data is being integrated in the positive direction. That is, the fact that the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is "0" indicates that the integrator 554 is integrating the input analog data in the positive direction. Note that this will be explained in detail later.

On the other hand, the output of the comparator 556 is the clock pulse C
This signal is input to the D terminal of the P-synchronized flip-flop F13. Further, the Q output of this flip-flop F-13 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F12 which is also synchronized with the clock pulse CP. The Q output of the flip-flop F13 and the Q output of the flip-flop F12 are applied to an AND gate AND7, and the output of the AND gate AND7 is passed through an OR gate OR3 to a frequency division counter 557. counter 55
8 and the flip 70 tubes 560 and 562, respectively, to their direct reset terminals R.

This means that if the ramp is switched after the integrator 554 performs a definite integration in the negative direction, it will start integrating in the positive direction.
Although there is some delay time until a positive output is obtained from the comparator 556 once reset (
This depends entirely on the characteristics of the integrator 554), the counter 55
This is provided so that the operation start time of 8 and the time when a positive output starts to be output from the comparator 556 are not different, and when a positive output starts to be output from the comparator 556, only one clock period immediately after that, The frequency division counter 557. counter 55
8. This is a configuration for directly resetting the flip-flops 560 and 562 to match the counting start time of the counter 558 with the output start time of the comparator 556.

Furthermore, the Q output of the flip-flop 562 is input to the clock terminal of the flip-flop F18, which receives the output signal of the comparator 556 at its D input terminal, and the integrator 554 performs definite integration in the negative direction. While the comparator 556
If the counter 558 overflows even though the output has not been inverted from °l" to "O", that is, the A-D conversion has not been completed, the flip-flop 562 is set. The Q terminal of the flip-flop F18 uses the output of the Q terminal as a clock. The Q output signal of this flip-flop F18 is the result of A-D conversion,
ADO indicating that counter 558 has overflowed
It is used as an F signal at the multiplexer 5720XI terminal.

The operation of the input control section 360 having the above-described configuration will be explained in more detail below with reference to the operation characteristic diagrams shown in FIGS. 56 and 57.

Incidentally, Fig. 56 shows the case where the A-D conversion was performed smoothly, and Fig. 57 shows the result of the A-D conversion.

Each shows a case in which an overflow occurs.

First, when the power is turned on, a clear signal PUC is output from a power-up/clear circuit (not shown), and the frequency division counter 557. counter 558° flip-flop 560,
562. F14°F15. F16. Clear and reset F17 0 In this state, Q of 7 rip-flops 560
The output is recessed at °O'', so the A-D conversion control circuit 552
ramps integrator 5540 in the positive direction and simultaneously provides input analog data to integrator 554. At this time, the output of the comparator 556 becomes "1°," and at the same time, the counter 558 starts counting up the output pulses of the frequency division counter 557. While this integration is being performed, the flip-flop 560 is゛0° output is inverter INV
is given to the AND gate AND8 through iO, so from this AND gate AND8 or go)
Pass line 366 through OR4 includes a timing signal.
In synchronization with pulse TB71, the integrator 554 inputs the input analog signal.
An INT signal is output indicating that log data is being integrated.

When the counter 558 overflows during the integration operation as described above, the output of the flip-flop 560 becomes "1" and at the same time, the frequency division counter 557 . The contents of the counter 558 become 0° for all pits, and counting starts again from "0". Along with the 1" output from the Q terminal of this clip-flop 560, the A-D conversion control circuit 552
makes the ramp of the integrator 554 negative, and at the same time the reference level signal from the reference level generating means 5-50 is applied to the integrator 55.
Give to 4. At the point when this integration in the negative direction starts,
The integral value of the integrator 554 is proportional to the input analog data. While this integration in the negative direction is being performed, the flip-flop 560 continues to output "1", so the output of the AND gate AND8 is regulated, so of course the INT signal is not output.

As described above, as a result of the integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554, when the output signal of the integrator 554 falls to a certain level, that is, when the integration is completed, the output of the comparator 556 changes to
It changes from 1" to 0". As a result, the comparator 55
At that point, the buffer register 564, which receives the output signal of No. 6 at the clock terminal C through the inverter INV8, takes in and stores the count data counted by the counter 558 and output from the QO to Q7 terminals. In this manner, the count data captured in buffer register 564 is a digital value corresponding to the input analog data, as previously described.

Note that even after the above operation, the counter 558 continues counting operation, and when this counter 558 overflows, the flip-flop 56'0 is reset and its Q
When the output becomes 0, the flip-flop 562 is set and its Q output becomes 1.The Q output of the flip-flop 562 is given to the clock terminal of the flip-flop F18. F
Since the output of the comparator 556 which provides an output to the D terminal of 18 is already 0'', it is naturally not set.

On the other hand, the Q output of the flip-flop 560 is connected to the flip-flop through the inverter INV7 and the D output of the flip-flop F14.
In order to give "1" input to the terminal, the timing shown in Figure 55.
As is clear from the pulse, the flip-flop 560
During one word starting from the first timing/purpose TBO after the Q output of
From ND9, AD synchronized with timing pulse TB6
The CE signal is provided to pass line 366 through OR gate OR4. That is, in this system, the A-'D conversion ends when the counter 558, which continues counting during and after the constant integration in the negative direction by the integrator 554, overflows. Therefore, as described above, the end of A-D conversion is detected at the time when the Q output of the flip-flop 560 changes from "1" to °0. Moreover, at the next word time, as shown in FIG. 55, "1" is output from the AND gate ANDIO for one word.
The l” output is sent to the multiplexer 572.
is applied to the DIS end of the multiplexer 572, and regulates the signal output from the two terminals of the multiplexer 572, and at the same time controls the signal output from the inverter IN.
The timing pulse TBO-TB7 is applied to the DIS terminal of the signal switching circuit 56-8 as a °0° signal through V9, and only during the l word period during which this °1° signal is output.
Sync.

The A/D converted data DD stored in the buffer register 564 is sequentially sent to the input bus line 370 from the lower digits through the two output terminals.

On the other hand, the Q output of flip-flop 560 reset by the overflow of counter 558 is A-D.
The A-D conversion control circuit 552, which receives the Q output, once clears the integrator 554, switches its ramp in the positive direction, and integrates the human-powered analog data. input to the device 554.

Integrator 554 with switched ramp from negative direction to positive direction
does not start integration immediately; due to the characteristics of the element,
Since integration is started after a certain delay time, the output of the integrator 554 exceeds a certain level, and the output of the comparator 55
It takes a certain amount of time for 6 to start outputting the 1° ratio.

On the contrary, the force counter 558 is
After an overflow, the next counting operation is started immediately from the state where all bits are 10'', so there is a risk that the integrator 554 will not be able to accurately integrate the input analog data.To prevent this, Flip-flops F12, F13, and gates are provided in
7 is a direct-resat mechanism, and when the comparator 556 starts outputting 1° during integration in the positive direction, this is detected and the dividing counters 5, 57,
Counter 558. The purpose is to clear and reset the flip-flops 560 and 562 and start counting anew from a state where all bits are 0''. The above-mentioned operations are repeatedly performed. , an ADC that indicates the end of A-D conversion for each A-D conversion cycle.
E signal, p, A-D converted digital data D
D is output. 1. As mentioned earlier, the input bus line 370 receives the A-D converted digital signal.
%AEL excluding word time when data DD is output
K signal, AECG signal, WNUP signal, AO double signal CU
The atonement signal is repeatedly output in synchronization with the timing pulses TBI to TB6.

Incidentally, after obtaining the integral value corresponding to the input analog data by the integration in the positive direction by the integrator 554, the integrator 554 performs the integration in the negative direction. If color/return 558 overflows and flip-flop 562 is set before the output of comparator 554 falls below a certain level, i.e., while the output of comparator 556 remains 1", The clip-flop F18 whose D input is the output of the comparator 556 is set, and its Q output terminal outputs an ADOF signal indicating that the A-D conversion result has overflowed, and the multiplexer 572 is given to the X1 terminal of.On the other hand,
Since the clip-flop 560 is reset at the same time as the counter 558 overflows, the A-D connection control circuit 552 receiving its Q output clears the integrator 554, so at this point the comparator 554 The output is “1”
It falls to “0” from there.

Therefore, the output of the comparator 554 is connected to the inverter INV8.
The buffer register 564, which is applied to the clock terminal through The data taken into the buffer register 564 is data of all pits "o".

Note that even if the result of AD conversion overflows as described above, the ADCE signal and the INT signal are sent to the bus line 366 based on the output of the flip-flop 560.

By the way, when the A-D conversion result overflows during strobe photography, it is a signal that the aperture on the camera device side needs to be set manually.
This is a case where an amount such that the A-D converter 382 overflows or lows is given as an analog signal for diaphragm control from 84. Therefore, at this time, buffer 3 and register 5
Naturally, the data of all bits 0'' taken into 64 will be ignored by the system.

As described above, from the mechanism section 358 to the input control section 3
Analog data and various conditions or status determination signals taken into the input bus line 370 are sent to the central control unit 362 through the input bus line 370, and signals ADCE and INT indicating the status of A-D conversion are sent to the bus line 366. be carried on.

Here, we will return to the central control unit 362 again to continue the explanation.

In central control 362, bus line 366 is coupled to input bus selector 578. The input bus selector 578 detects the ADCE signal input to the input bus line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6 and determines whether the signal coming on the input bus line 370 is a condition signal. , and outputs a signal instructing processing of the input signal from the input bus line 370.

On the other hand, the input bus line 370 is connected to the central control unit 36.
The signal switching circuit 576 is connected to the 20 condition register 574 and the signal switching circuit 576. Usually, the signal switching circuit 576 is an AD converter. - It acts as a circulation circuit for the D register 516 for storing the data.

The condition register 574 is connected to the input bus selector 37.
When a signal commanding condition import is input from 8,
The ADOF signal, AELK signal, AECG signal, WNUP signal, and AO multiplied signal CU signal on the input bus line 370 are captured and stored in accordance with timing pulses TBI to TB6.

Further, the signal switching circuit 576 normally includes the D register 5
16 contents DR are circulated, but when a signal instructing data acquisition is input from the input bus selector 578, the A-D conversion data DD on the bus line 370 is circulated at the input bus selector 578. Timing pulse TBO~T
0 to be captured and stored according to B7. Therefore, the condition register 574 and the D register 516
is constantly repeatedly input with new setting conditions or operating conditions and A-D conversion data DD through the input bus line 370 and stores them. This is the same as the A-D conversion period of the D converter. The signal switching circuit 576 receives the AELK signal from the condition register 574, and when the AELK signal is input, even if the input bus
Even if a signal instructing data fetching is input from the selector 578, the circulation of the data DR in the D register 516 is continued and new AD conversion data is not fetched.

This camera system provides AE locking through such a configuration.

The configuration for importing the condition signal and AD conversion data DD from the input bus line 370 into the central control unit 362 will be described in more detail below.

Now, when the input control section 360 completes the A-D conversion and the signal ADCE indicating this is put on the bus line 366 in synchronization with the bus B6, the ADC
It has already been mentioned that the A-reconversion data DD is sequentially output from the lower digits to the input bus line 370 in the next word span after the E signal is output, in synchronization with the timing pulses TBO to TB7. Therefore, the central control unit 362 side also inputs the timing () (timing) in synchronization with the buses TBO to TB7 at the next word time after detecting the ADCE signal synchronized with the bus TB6. By loading the line 370 into the D register 516, the A-D conversion data DD can be stored in the D register 516. Note that at word times other than the above,
Various signals are carried on the input bus line 370 from the input control section 360, so the signal on the input bus line 370 can be input into the condition register 574 based on the timing pulse.

Therefore, the input bus selector 578 receives the signal on the bus line 366 and outputs the signal from the ADC at the timing of TB6.
It is sufficient to adopt a configuration in which input of the E signal is detected and a command is given to take in A-D conversion data from the input path line 3701 during the next one word period.

In this embodiment, the configuration shown in FIG. 58 is applied to the input bus selector 578.

That is, as is clear from the figure, the bus line 366 is connected to the flip-flop F1 synchronized with the timing pulse TB7.
This flip-flop F18 is introduced into the D terminal of F18.
The Q output of is given to the D terminal of a flip-flop F19 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO.

In such a configuration, each flip-flop F18. F
19 performs the operation shown in FIG. In other words, the flip-flop F synchronized with the timing pulse TB7
18 is not reset unless its D terminal input is 1' at least at the timing of TB6, that is, unless there is an ADCE signal on bus line 366. At this time, the Q output of the flip-flop F18 is "O", so the timing clock F19, which is synchronized with the timer Hals TBO and receiving this "0" output at the D terminal, is in the reset state. q output ■ is "1". This ■
A signal is provided to the condition register 574 to cause the condition register 574 to capture the contents of input bus line 370.

The detailed configuration of the condition register 574 is shown in FIG. 60, and as is clear from the figure, the shift register S
It is composed of R-1 and a latch L that takes in data in synchronization with the falling edge of the clock.

The shift register SRI has its D terminal connected to the input bus.
connected to line 370 and clock pulse CP
The data on the input bus line 370 is taken in in synchronization with the input bus line 370. In such a configuration, all the signals placed on the input bus line 370 for each clock pulse CP are sequentially taken into this shift register SRI, and are synchronized for each clock pulse CP to the output terminal QO. Kara Q
5 is output sequentially. Therefore, in this state,
The output data from the Q, 0-Q5 output terminals of the shift register SRI are all uncertain data, but during the time when the A-D conversion data DD is not on the input bus line 370, that is, when the ADCE signal is Timing during the time period excluding the next one word sent on bus line 336.
At the time of pulse TB7, the Q of shift register SRI is
From the O to Q5 output terminals, the CU multiplied signal, AO multiplied signal, WNUP signal, AECG signal, AELK signal, and ADOF are respectively output.
This means that a signal is being output. This adds the AO double signal timing pulse to the CU double signal timing pulse TB6.
The WNUP signal is the timing pulse TBS, and the WNUP signal is the timing pulse TBS.
B4, the AECG signal is applied to timing pulse TB3,
AECG signal goes to TB2, AELK signal goes to TBI, A
This is evident when considering that the DOF signals are placed on respective input bus lines 366 in synchronization with TBO. Therefore, the timing is applied to the latch L synchronized with the falling edge of the clock whose Do-D5 terminals receive outputs from the QO-Q5 output terminals of the shift register /SR,1, respectively.
By applying a falling signal only while the pulse TB7 is being output, the latch L is provided with CU, AO, WNUP,
It is possible to capture and store the AECG, AELK, and ADOF signals. In this embodiment, by inputting the timing pulse TB7 to the AND gate ANDII which receives the input of the output signal 2 from the input bus selector 578, 1 word time, timing pulse T subject to output regulation
ANDI2 which obtains a signal synchronized with B7 and further receives this signal as input of clock pulse CP.
A signal synchronized with the clock pulse CP, that is, a signal that performs a falling operation during the timing pulse TB7, is obtained by applying it to the clock terminal of the latch L, and this signal is applied as an input signal to the clock terminal of the latch L. There is.

Through the configuration as described above, the parallel in/9 parallel out registers forming the latch L include:
The next one with the ADCE signal on bus line 366
Except for the word time, a signal input that changes to a new setting condition or operating state is performed and updated every word time. Note that the CU signal is transmitted from the QO terminal of the parallel-in/9-parallel-out register BRI forming the latch L, the QO terminal is a τx signal, the sQx terminal is an AO times signal, and the S terminal is an AO times signal WNUP signal from sQ2 terminal, WN-UP signal from mouth terminal; AECG signal from sQ3 terminal, AECG signal from Q3 terminal, AELK signal from sQ4 terminal.
The AELK signal is from the %Q5 terminal, and the AI)OF signal is from the Q5 terminal.
The ADOF signal is output from the Q5 terminal.

Note that this condition register 574 can be specifically realized by a circuit configuration as shown in FIG. 61. As is clear from the figure, the 60th illustrated shift register SRI
is an integrated circuit element CD4015, and the launch L is constructed using two integrated circuit elements CD4042.

The integrated circuit element CD4015 (manufactured by RCA) is a dual 4-bit static shift register whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.
The Q31 output is given as the D2 terminal input, essentially configuring an 8-pit shift register. In this embodiment, 6 bits of them are used as shift register SRI. Furthermore, as already shown in the logic diagram of FIG. 40, the integrated circuit element CD4042 is a 4-bit latch, and data is fetched in parallel in synchronization with the falling edge of its clock input. It has a configuration in which data is held while the clock input is "O".It is obvious that an 8-bit latch can be constructed by using two latch CD4042s in parallel. However, in this embodiment, 6 bits of these are used as latch L.

On the other hand, "1" is applied to the D terminal of the 58th illustrated flip-flop F18 from the pass line 366 at the timing of TB6.
When a signal is given, that is, when there is an AECE signal, the flip-flop F18 is set at the timing of TB7 and makes its Q output 1''. Therefore, the timing pulse TBO receiving the Q output The synchronous flip-flop F19 is set in synchronization with the rising edge of the first timing pulse TBO of the next word time, and its Q-output is set to 1.The flip-flop F1B is set after being set. , holds that state only until the rising edge of the next timing pulse TB7, so the D input of the clip-flop F19 is set at the rising edge of the next timing pulse TBO when this flip-flop is set. immediately becomes °0".

Therefore, the clip flop F19 is held in the set state for one word time from the rise of TBO to the next rise of TBO, and its Q output becomes 1'' for the original one word time.

The ■ signal is applied to the signal switching circuit 576, but upon receiving the ■ signal, the signal switching circuit 576 stops the circulation of the contents of the D register 516 and switches the input bus.
The data on line 370 is introduced into D register 516 for one word from TBO to TB7. Note that the data introduced during this one word is A-D conversion data DD that is placed on the input bus line 370 for this one word on the input control section 360 side. Note that the data thus fetched into the D register 516 is circulated through the signal switching circuit 576 until the next data is fetched.

The detailed configuration of the signal switching circuit 576 and the D register 516 is as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 63, but the D register 516 is an 8-bit shift register as shown in the block diagram of FIG. An integrated circuit element CD4021 (manufactured by RCA) is used.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 63, the Q output of the clip-flop F19 shown in FIG. 58 and the QO output AELK of the switch L shown in FIG. Not, that is, AEL
When the K signal is "1" and the signal (2) which commands data acquisition is °0", the output of this AND gate AND13 is "0". Therefore, at this time, the above-mentioned AND
AND gate A directly receiving the output of NDl3
ND14 has its output regulated, and
Since the AND gate AND15 to which the output of Dl3 is input through the isolator INV9 becomes conductive, the output of Dl3 becomes conductive.
The contents DR of the register 516 are input from the Q8 terminal to the AND signal.
Gate AND15. It will be circulated through the or gate OR5.

On the other hand, even when the Q output of the flip-flop F19, that is, the signal instructing data capture is "1",
When in the AE lock state, the AE LK double signal becomes °0",
Therefore, the output of the AND gate AND13 is °0°
Therefore, the D register 516 is connected to the input path line 370.
The A-D conversion data is not imported from the A-D conversion data DD through the AND gate A'ND15 and the OR gate OR5.
will be kept in circulation.

On the other hand, if it is not in the AE lock state, that is, the AELK
The signal is °1", and the Q output of the clip-flop F19, that is, the signal that commands data capture is °1".
”, the output of this AND gate AND13 is °
1”, so at this time the above ANDl
AND14 receiving the output of AND13 becomes conductive, and the output of AND13 is connected to the AND gate A which is input through the inverter INV9.
The output of ND15 is regulated. Therefore, the A-D conversion data DD, which is carried on the input bus line 370 only while the Q output of the flip-flop F19 is "1", is sent to the D register 516 through the AND14 as a timing signal. The data are sequentially captured from the lower digits in synchronization with pulses TBO to TB7.

Through the configuration described above, the input control section 360
The A-D conversion data DD and various conditions or status signals obtained in the above are taken into the central control section 362.

Now, in FIG. 30, 500 is an arithmetic circuit configured to execute a required arithmetic operation between the data AR of the A register 510 and the data specified by the data selector 502 according to the arithmetic instruction from the instruction ROM 504. be done.

Note that the calculation instructions outputted from the instruction ROM 504 at this time include the eight calculation control routines described above, and one calculation control routine is selectively executed depending on each photographing mode.

The arithmetic circuit 500 cooperates with auxiliary registers such as an A register 510, a B register 512, and a C register 514. Note that 506 circulates the data BR of the B register 512, or circulates the data A from the A register 510.
A gate I's 508 for writing R is a gate for circulating data CR in the C register 514 and writing data AR from the A register 510.

The data selector 502 selects % a, + b, C
+d+ e+ f+ gt bs, one of the data input from nine terminals of i is selectively given to the arithmetic circuit 500 according to the input from the instruction ROM 504.

Film sensitivity data DTSV is sent from terminal a of the data selector 502, and open aperture value data DT is sent from terminal b of the data selector 502.
The bending error data DTAC is input from the C terminal, the shutter speed data DTTV is input from the d terminal, and the aperture value data DTAV is input from the C terminal.These data, DTSV, DTAQ, DTAC, DTTV,
As for how DTAV is obtained, it is the same as already described.

Further, from the terminal f of the data selector 502, a fixed 5
Data specified by the instruction ROM 504 is taken in from among some fixed data stored in the fixed data ROM 534.

The data stored in the fixed data ROM 534 is C3TO, in which all bits of the data are 0'', and C3TC, which represents other specific data.

All pit and toca of C3TD and C3TE data.

C3TF, data TMIN representing the minimum shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, data TMAX representing the maximum shutter speed that can be controlled by the body 4, representing the shutter speed that can be synchronized with the flash for flash photography. TSYN.

Constants C3TI, C3T2 . The maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used, etc., is 0 which is selectively given to the terminal fK'' of the data selector 502 based on the command 1 from the instruction ROM 504. Data on values AMAX
A plurality of aperture values are stored in the fixed data ROM 534, and these aperture values are data AM regarding the maximum aperture value taken from the lens device 2 to the body 4 side.
It is appropriately selected and output based on AX'.

Incidentally, the fixed data written in the fixed data ROM'534 includes constants for various calculations and mechanical constraints imposed by the lens device 2 and body 4, such as the upper and lower limits of the shutter speed. It is set as appropriate depending on the performance of the lens device 2 and the body 4, the calculation method, data setting, restriction method, etc.

Also, the terminal g of the data select f502.

D registers 516.h and i respectively. B register s
121 Contents of each C register 514, DD,
BR%CR will be selectively incorporated.

It should be noted that among the terminals a to i of the data selector 502, which terminal is used to input data to the arithmetic circuit is determined by a command from the instruction ROM 504. All the selected data are then introduced into the arithmetic circuit 500.

The arithmetic circuit 500 is connected to the instruction ROM 5.
04, the data selected by the data selector 502 is loaded into the A register 510, or the data AR in the A register 510 is combined with the data selected by the data selector 502. Perform the necessary operations between the two and store the results in the A register 510.
or when a carry or borrow occurs as a result of the operation, the carry flip-flop 540 is set and the contents AR of the A register 510, the contents BR of the B register 512, or the contents CR of the C register 514 are stored.
It performs arithmetic control operations such as exchanging with

Now, the instruction ROM 504 that provides arithmetic control instructions to the arithmetic circuit 500 will be explained.

Instruction RO provided in the central control unit 362
As mentioned above, the M504 includes eight arithmetic control routines, and these eight routines are based on the 5PDW signal and ASLC signal output from the condition signal storage circuit 548, as well as the AO multiplication signal output from the condition register 574. and C
It is selected depending on the U-fold signal state. the 5PDW signal;
The program selector 580 determines the arithmetic control routine of the instruction ROM 504 according to the ASLC signal, AO multiplication signal, and CU multiplication signal states.

The instruction ROM 504 is configured to execute the routines selected and set by the program selector 580 and output control signals to the system. , the program counter 582 is 0. This program counter 582 has a latch 584 connected to its inhibit terminal. Data D
Unless D is obtained, the program counter 582
The program counter 582 is
When the first ADCE signal is detected by the input bus selector 578, the restriction is released and the program counter 582 starts counting.

The program counter 582 receives a timing pulse T.
It has a configuration that counts up by one for each BO, and in this system, the timing
One step of arithmetic control operation by the instruction ROM 504 is performed during one word from pulse TBO to TB7.

From then on, the program counter 582 repeatedly performs counting operations, and outputs a signal indicating this every time the counting operation progresses to a certain step. This signal indicates that the instruction ROM 504 has completed the arithmetic control of one routine, and is applied to the logic circuit 598. This signal is transmitted to the logic circuit 598.
Taking into account the time factor, cl is activated by the bus in synchronization with the timing pulse TBS to indicate that the calculation has ended.
As the CALE signal carried on line 366, one is the next timing pulse T after the CALE signal is issued.
It is output from BO as an R8ND signal for carrying transfer data on the output bus line 374.

As mentioned above, the program selector 580° program counter 582. Instruction ROM50
The configuration of No. 4 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 65 shows a block diagram of the control system and logic circuit 598, latch circuit 584, program selector 580, and program color/receiver 582 of the instruction ROM 504.

In the figure, a program selector 580 is an integrated circuit element C.
It is composed of D4019 (manufactured by RCA),
This integrated circuit device CD4019 is a conventional AND-OR select gate whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.

- Program counter 582 is also integrated circuit device CD
4024 (manufactured by RCA), this integrated circuit element CD4024 is a ripple counter whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.

The program selector 580 has the CU times signal, which is the output of the condition register 574, at its KA terminal, and also the KB signal.
When the CU double signal is input to the terminal and it is not in strobe shooting mode, the input signals of the A1 and A2 terminals are converted to Di and B2.
Outputs to each output terminal of
.

It is configured to output each input signal of the B2 terminal to each of the DI and B2 output terminals. The program selector 580
The output of the AND gate AND16 is given to the A1 terminal of the 5PDW.
The signal and the AO multiplied signal obtained through the AO multiplied signal inverter INVIO are input. Further, the ADOF signal is input to the B1 terminal of the selector 58, the ASLC signal is input to the A2 terminal, and the AO multiplied signal and the ASLC signal are input to the B2 terminal through an OR gate OR6.

In such a configuration, the program selector 580
When the CU double signal is °1'', that is, when not in strobe photography mode, four calculation control programs are executed, and when the CU double signal is °1'', that is, in strobe photography mode, four calculation control programs are executed. It is possible to choose,
In total, the eight arithmetic control routines described above can be specified.

The instruction ROM 504 has an output of 28 (-256) depending on the combination of inputs from eight input terminals AO-A7.
The system of this embodiment is configured to execute eight routines each consisting of 32 steps, depending on the combination of inputs from the A5 to A7 terminals. Eight arithmetic control routines are executed in accordance with the input from the AO-A4 terminal, each routine having 32 steps. This instruction ROM 504 is connected to the person's 7 input terminal -
CU signal is given, and A6. Each D of the program selector 580 is connected to each input terminal of A5.
1. Receives signal input from D2 output terminal. In addition, each input terminal of AO-A4 of the ROM 504 receives each output of Q1 to Q5 of the program counter 582. The program counter 582 is synchronized every falling edge of the timing pulse TBO. It has a structure that seems to count up one by one. The instruction ROM 504 starts incrementing due to the count up of the program counter 582. As a result of the first A-D conversion, some A-D conversion data D is stored in the D register 516.
D must be accumulated, and A after turning on the power switch.
- D conversion is not completed and no A is stored in the D register 516.
If the program counter 582 counts up without also storing the -D conversion data DD, this will lead to malfunction. Therefore, in this system, A-
The configuration is such that the program counter 582 starts counting up only after the D conversion is completed. That is, the flip-flop F19 (fifth
The Q output in Figure 8) and the AELK signal indicating that the system is not in the AE lock state are received.
By introducing the output of 21 to the J terminal of the J- type clip-flop F20, when the first ADCE signal is placed on the path line 366 in the absence of the AE-flop, said flip-flop F20 Set the Q output to 1°. Therefore, the Q terminal output of the clip flop F20 is connected to the direct reset terminal R8 through the inverter Nv11 (or goo) OR7.
The program counter 582 that is input to T starts counting up operation in synchronization with the falling edge of timing pulse TB7 when the direct reset terminal R8T input becomes 0° at the same time as flip-flop F20 is set. do.

The instruction ROM 504 has eight output terminals OPO to OP7, and the instruction code is composed of the 3-bit output of OR7 to OP5.
The operand code is made up of bits.

In this embodiment, an integrated circuit element 1702A (manufactured by Intel) whose block diagram is shown in FIG. 68 is used as the instruction ROM 504.

The output code of this instruction ROM 504 has a meaning as shown in the code explanatory diagram of FIG. 69.

Now, we will explain the instruction seed.

That is, O, P7 determines whether this instruction is related to operation or data exchange (power), and 0P775! −”Oo, commands the calculation and “1
” indicates a command to exchange data.

OR7 is “0°, that is, when a calculation command is issued, OR6
indicates the content of the operation, and when OR6 is 0'', it is adding, and when OR6 is 1°, it is subtracting.

Also, at this time, OR5 instructs the processing of the calculation result; when OR5 is "O", the calculation result is not recorded in the A register 510, and when OR5 is 1°, the calculation result is not recorded. 0 commands the A register 510 to record the statement. Conversely, when OR7 is 1", that is, a data exchange command is issued, OR6 commands the conditions for data exchange, and O
When R6 is “0”, carrier 1 no flip-flop 5
Invalid when 40 is in reset state, and OF2 is °1
” is valid when the carry π flip-flop 540 is in the reset state.

At this time, OF2 also commands the conditions for data exchange, and when OP5 is "Oo", it is invalid when the carry flip-flop 540 is in the set state, and when OF2 is 1, the carry flip-flop 540 is invalid. flip flop 5/40
is valid when is set.

Comprehensively considering the above and considering them individually, OF2 is “
0", OF2 is °0", and OR5 is °0", A
With the contents AR of register 510 and the operand code,
The specified data is added, but the result is not written to the A register 510, so in the end nothing is done. In the following explanation, this instruction will be referred to as N0OP.

When OP7 is IO”, OF2 is 101 and OF2 is °1”
In this case, the content AR of the A register 510 and the operand
This instructs so-called addition in which the data specified by the code is added and the result is written into the A register 510.

In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as ADD 00P7.
is "0", OF2 is "1", and when OF2 is "0", the data specified by the operand code is subtracted from the contents AR of the A register 510, and the result is stored in the A register 510. Although it is not written, this operation is to check whether or not the carry slip flop 540 is set as a result of the operation rather than the result of the operation.In the end, it is specified by the contents of the A register 510 and the operand code. This is a comparison of the data. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as LT.

When OF2 is '''01, OF2 is @1'' and OF2 is '''01.
1'', it instructs so-called subtraction in which the data specified by the operand code is subtracted from the content AR of the A register 5410, and the result is written to the A register 510.The following explanation follows. This command will be referred to as SUB.

When OF2 is 1”, OF2 is °0” and OF2 is “0°”.
When , the data exchange power specified by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code (even if the carry flip-flop 540 AE IJ is set,
This command is invalid even if it is set, and in the end it is commanding something that would never happen. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as N0OP2. .

When OF2 is “1”, OF2 is “O” and OF2 is 1°.
When , the data exchange power specified by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code 11 Carry flip-flop 540 is invalid when it is reset, but is valid when it is set. In the end, the carry clip flop 54
This instructs data exchange to be performed only when 075i is set. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWC.

When OF2 is @1”, OF2 is 11” and OF2 is °0
'', the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand
This commands that the data exchange specified by the code is valid when the carry flip-flop 540 is reset, but invalid when it is set. flip flop 54
This instructs data to be exchanged only when 0 is reset.

In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWN.0 When 0P7 is 91 degrees, OF2 is 11 degrees, and OF2 is 1 degree.
`` indicates that the data exchange commanded by the contents AR of the A register 510 and the operand code is valid whether the carry flip-flop 540 is reset or set. This command ultimately commands data exchange regardless of the state of carry flip-flop 540. In the following explanation, this command will be referred to as SWU.

In addition, in the case of the data exchange explained above, the A register 51
If the operand with which data is exchanged with 0 is the B register 512 or the C register 514, the A register 51
The contents AR of 0 can be written to the operand, but if the operan 1,000 is fixed data or setting data, the contents AR of the A register 510 cannot be written to the operand. Therefore, in this case, instead of data exchange, the operand data is unilaterally written to the A register 5410.
This is a so-called data read operation, but the system of this embodiment does not particularly distinguish between a data exchange instruction and a data read instruction, and this data exchange instruction acts as a data exchange instruction only when the operand is a register, and when the operand is a register other than a register. In this case, it acts as a data read instruction.

As described above, this instruction ROM 504 has the eight instruction systems described above.

Next, the operand code will be explained.

OF2 distinguishes whether the operand is fixed data or variable data, and when OF2 is O'', the operand is fixed data and fixed data R, 0M5.
34 to OP3 to OPO.1 Also, when OF2 is 0'', the operand is variable data, and the data selector 50
It specifies the variable data input from each input terminal a-i of No.2.

When OF2 is 60'', that is, regarding fixed data, O
The data specified by P3 to OPO is OF2. OF
2. When OPt and OPo are “oooo”, all bits are “0”
C3TO data of '0010', '111000'
00” C3TC data, 0100”, 11010
C3TD data of "000", "000" when "0110"
C3TE data of 11111'', C3TF data of all bits ``1'' when it is 0111'', and OF2. OF2
．． O.P.I.

When the OPO is 1000", the lowest shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera device body 4 is TMIN, "1001".
When , the maximum aperture value that can be controlled by the camera device body 4 is TMA4, when it is “1010”, the maximum aperture value that can be controlled by the lens device 2 is AMA4, and when it is “1011”, the strobe synchronized shutter speed that can be controlled by the camera device body 4 is T.S.
YN, first constant C8 for calculation when '1100'
'rl, second constant C for calculation when "1101"
This is each data of 3T2.

When OF2 is “1”, that is, regarding variable data, O
The data specified by P3 to OPO is OF2. OF
2. When OPI and OPO are 1000”, D register 516
The content DR is the AD conversion data DD.
D'rsv when R1 is "1001", DTTV when "1010" is O, n'rAv% when "1011" is "1100"
DTAO when O, DTAC when "1101", '1
110”, the contents of the B register are BR and the DT is
When BR% is 1111'', the contents of the C register are CR and DTcR.

A comparison table of the addresses, instructions, and operand codes of the instructions R and OM504 is shown in FIGS.
Shown in (h).

What is shown in FIG. 70(a) is the instruction R
,0 When the A7 to A5 terminal inputs of the M504 are all 10", the routine is selected and the strobe shooting mode is not set.
Is the shutter speed a priority and the aperture is not narrowed down?
Or it is a routine applied when in external photometry mode.

This corresponds to the third routine shown in FIG.

'' Also, what is shown in Fig. 70 (b) is a routine that is selected when the A7 and A6 terminal inputs of each traction FLOM504 are 0'' and the A5 terminal inputs are l'', and when the aperture is not in flash photography mode. This is a routine that is applied when the camera is set to "Priority" and the aperture is not stopped down, or when the camera is in external metering mode. This corresponds to the first routine shown in FIG.

Also, shown in FIG. 70(C) is A7. of instruction ROM5Q4. A5 terminal input is '0', A
This is a routine that is selected when the 6-terminal input is ``l'', and is applied when the flash photography mode is not set, aperture priority is set, the aperture is closed, and the external metering mode is not set. This corresponds to the second routine shown in the figure.

Also, FIG. 70(d) shows a routine that is selected when the A7 terminal input of the instruction ROM 504 is 0'' and the A6.A5 terminal input is 1'', and when not in flash photography mode, shutter priority is given and This is a routine that is applied when the aperture is closed and the external metering mode is not used. This corresponds to the fourth routine shown in FIG.

FIG. 70(e) shows a routine that is selected when the A7 terminal input of the instruction ROM 504 is '1' and the A6.A5 terminal input is '0', and the strobe is fully charged and the strobe is taken. This is a routine that is applied when the aperture value of the lens device 2 is set on the strobe device side and the shutter speed on the camera device side is semi-automatically controlled when the mode is entered. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the fifth routine.

In addition, FIG. 70 (0 shows the instruction R
A7 of OM504. A5. This routine is selected when the terminal input is 1" and the A6 terminal input is NO", and the aperture value of lens device 2 is set in the strobe device section, and at the same time the shutter speed on the camera device side is fully automatically controlled. This is the routine that is applied. In the following description, this routine will be referred to as the sixth routine.

Also, FIG. 70 (ω) shows a routine that is selected when the A7.A6 terminal input of the instruction ROM 504- is l'' and the A5 terminal input is 0', and the aperture value of the lens device 2 is set to the camera device. At the same time, this routine is applied when the shutter speed of the camera device is semi-automatically controlled.In the following explanation, this routine will be referred to as the seventh routine.

Also shown in FIG. 70(h) is A7 of instruction ll'LOM504. A6. A5 terminal input is “1”
This routine is selected when the aperture value of the lens device 2 is set on the camera device side, and the shutter speed on the camera device side is controlled fully automatically at the same time.In the following explanation, this routine is selected when The routine will be referred to as the eighth routine.

Incidentally, when photographing using an external photometry adapter, the first or third routine is adopted depending on the state of the ASLC signal; in that case, unnecessary calculation steps are not executed. In the case of photometry using an external photometry adapter, there is no need to consider the open aperture value AVO and bending error AVc of the photographing lens device 2 during photometry for TTL photometry, and therefore the first or third routine is executed. In doing so, the step of performing correction calculations for the open aperture value AVO and the bending error AVC may be ignored. Incidentally, the steps in the first and third routines are shown in FIG. 70(a).
, It is clear from (b) that the ADD- of the 8th step is d-.
DTAO and 9th step ADD-DTAC.

Also, especially when executing the 5th to 8th routines,
When the A-D converter overflows, the signal ADOF indicating this is used as a signal indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture value of the lens device 2 during flash photography. However, if the A-D converter 382 has an autoflow (-) while executing the first to eighth routines, the signal ADOF indicating this will be thicker than the data obtained as a result of photometry. Therefore, in that case, it is necessary to issue some kind of warning, and furthermore, it is necessary to set the contents of the register whose contents have become unknown due to overflow to the maximum capacity of that register, that is, all bits are "1". This operation can be treated as completely equivalent to the flow in the A register 510 when film sensitivity S■, maximum aperture value AVo, bending error AVc, etc. are added to the photometry results BV and O. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the A-D converter 382 overflows when not in the strobe photography mode, during the steps of executing the first to fourth arithmetic routines, the operation after the above-mentioned addition step is performed. In step A, carry, flip,
The structure is such that a direct set signal is applied to the flop 540 and the carry flip 70 tube 540 is set.

Furthermore, the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation when executing the first to fourth routines is the maximum or minimum limit of the aperture value of the lens device 2 or a shutter that can be controlled by the body 4. If the speed limit is exceeded, a warning must be given to indicate this.

This can be easily achieved by blinking the aperture value or shutter speed displayed on the digital display 402. This operation is a step of determining whether the aperture value or shutter speed is derived as a result of calculation and then determining whether the calculation result falls within the limit value of the aperture value or shutter speed, and the carry flip-flop 5400 is set or reset. Based on this, it is sufficient to generate the aperture value display blinking signal AVFL or the shutter speed display blinking signal TVFL, and carry, flip, and flop 540
Just look at the output.

As mentioned above (overflows that occur as a result of A-D conversion, overflows that occur as a result of adding various data to photometric data, and the aperture value or shutter speed obtained as a result of calculation are the control limit values) The logic circuit 586 generates a signal to cause the aperture position display or shutter speed display on the digital display 402 to blink when the value exceeds the threshold value.

The logic circuit 586 is connected to the carry clip 70 tube 5.
40 and the output of the program selector 580, the output of the carry flip-flop 540 is determined by a specific address designated by the program selector 580, and the output is displayed on the digital display 402. A signal is sent to blink the shutter speed or aperture value.

The flashing shutter speed signal TVFL output from the logic circuit 586 is temporarily stored in a flip-flop 588 and then applied to a multiplexer 594, and the aperture flashing signal AVF is once stored in a flip-flop 588. The stored E is applied to multiplexer 594.

□The conditions for blinking the shutter speed or aperture value displayed on the digital display 402 have been described previously, so the explanation will be omitted here, but the conditions under which the blinking signal appears in this system are Whether this occurs will be detailed later.

Note that this logic circuit 586 is connected to R from the logic circuit 598.
The flip-flops 2588 and 590 are reset by the R8ND signal.

As mentioned above, when using an external photometry adapter, the 8th,
I generated a signal to ignore the 9th step, directly set the carry flip-flop 540 based on the ADOF signal generated when not in strobe photography mode, and added AD conversion overflow and various data. The logic for giving a blinking signal to the digital display 402 in response to a resulting overflow or exceeding the limit value of the aperture value or shutter speed determined as a result of calculation is all output from the program selector 58. have a close relationship.

A circuit configuration diagram for realizing such logic is shown in FIG. 71, in which 600 is an integrated circuit element MC14.
514 (manufactured by Motorola) is a 4-bit latch-16 line decoder. This integrated circuit element MC14514 has a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 72 and the logic diagram of FIG. Some are configured to decode and output to the line.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 71, 'program selector 5'
Among the outputs Ql-7Qs of the decoder 600, Ql-Q4 is input to the D1 to D4 terminals of the decoder 600. AND27 in the figure is for detecting the 8th step and 9th step in the 1st or 3rd routine and outputting the program execution regulation signal ■ in the external photometry mode. , CU times signal AO times signal AND gate AND3
It receives the input of the signal indicating the external optical mode obtained by applying the signal to・Ge) It receives the input of the signal obtained through the OR9, and includes a signal indicating that the system is in the external photometry mode and a signal indicating that the output of the program selector 580 is in the 8th step or the 9th step. The circuit is constructed so as to output the signal ``■'' according to the AND logic of .

In addition, AND28 is used for the 10th routine in the 1st to 4th routines when the result of A-D conversion by the A-D converter 382 overflows when not in the strobe photography mode. This is to detect the step and output the set signal ■ to directly set the carry flip-flop 540, and the CU multiplier signal ADOF
A-D converter 38 when not in strobe photography mode obtained by applying a signal to AND gate AND29.
In addition to receiving a signal indicating that the Q5 output of the program selector 580 has overflowed, the system also receives an inverted signal from the inverter INV12 of the Q5 output of the program selector 580 and an output 8100 of the decoder 600, and the system is in strobe photography mode. According to the AND logic of the ADOF signal when the program selector 580 is not in the 10th step and the signal indicating that the output of the program selector 580 is in the 10th step, the signal 2 is output.

The AND gate AND25 is the digital display 402
This is to give an input to the J terminal of the flip-flop 590 which outputs the signal AVFL for blinking the displayed aperture value, and AND26 is the signal for blinking the displayed shutter speed of the digital display 402. TVF
This is for giving input to the J terminal of the clip 70 tube 588 that outputs L. AND24 receives the ASLC signal and the CU multiplied signal, and outputs a signal indicating that the aperture value is selected preferentially when not in flash photography mode.
Go) directly to AND26, and the AND gate A
The signals are respectively input to ND25 through inverter INv13. This is because when the aperture priority mode is selected, the shutter speed is calculated and determined, so when the signal to command blinking comes, this signal is sent to the 7-rip-flop 590 to output the AVFL signal. In order to prevent the aperture from going to the J terminal of This is to prevent the signal from going to the J terminal of the flip-flop 588 for outputting the TVFL signal when the signal arrives.

The signal that commands the blinking is from OR11 (OR GOOD) to AND GOOU) AND25. This OR gate output, which is given to both ANDs 26, includes two conditions for outputting the signal for commanding the blinking.

One is the first condition output through the AND gate AND22, which is conditional on the carry flip-flop 540 being set; The set signal CA is input from the terminal.

The other is a second condition output through the AND gate AND23, which is conditional on the carry flip-flop 540 being reset;
The AND gate AND23 receives the reset signal CA from the carry clip flop 540.

AND22 is OR gate ORlO
The 811 and 814 outputs of the decoder 600 are input through the inverter and the Q5 output of the program selector 580 is inputted through the inverter! C is input through NV12, so C is input through carry flip-flop 540.
It is configured to receive the A-fold signal input and output 1'' when the program step by the program selector 580 is the V-th step and the V-th step.

Further, the AND23 is the decoder 6
The SO output of 00 and the Q5 output of the program selector 580 are input, so the carry-rip
It is configured such that when it receives the CA multiplied signal input from the flop 540 and the program step by the program counter 580 is the Vth step, an output of "1" is performed.
I can do it.

The conditions under which the carry signal CA is output from the carry flip-flop 540 will be described in detail later.

Note that the flip-flops 588 and 590 are both or
4 is receiving an inverted signal input. That is, 1 this 2
, /7'588.5901d It is synchronized with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP at the time of timing pulse TB7.

Furthermore, each of the flip 70 tubes 5, 88, and 590 receives an R8ND signal at its terminal.

As is clear from FIG. 70, the end of each routine that is proceeding depending on the R8ND signal M and the program step output of the program counter 580 is the Vth step in common for all eight routines. When the output of the program selector 580 reaches the Vth step or later, a CALE signal indicating that the calculation has ended is output, and then a signal instructing to transfer each zone obtained as a result of the calculation is output. This signal is output from R8N.
This is the D signal.

The CALE signal and R8ND signal are obtained through the logic configuration of a logic circuit 598 as shown in FIG.

The CALE signal is applied to Q5. of the program counter 582 as shown in FIG. It is output from the AND20 which receives the Q4 output, and the AND68 which receives the inverted output of the Q3 output of the program counter 582 by the inverter INV23.

As is clear from FIG. 70, this CALE signal is a signal that remains at a high level for 4 words from the Xth step to the Vth step of the program steps.

Further, the R8ND signal is applied to the Q2. of the program counter 582 as shown in FIG. The Q3 output is input through the OR gate OR8, and the output of the AND gate AND20 is high level for 8 words from the Xth step to the Vth step of the program step, that is, the final step. The signal is output from AND9. Therefore, this R8
The ND signal is based on the mK program, which is clear from Figure 70.
The signal is output as a signal set to be at a high level for 6 words from the Vth step to the Vth step, that is, the final step.

However, as shown in FIG. 65, the direct reset terminal R8T of the program counter 582 has an OR signal.
The output of the AND gate AND18, ie, the Q3. QO small output An AND condition signal with the output of AND20 is given. At this time, the AND gate A
As is clear from FIG. 70, the output of the ND 18 is set to be at a high level only during one word of the Vth program step. However, this and
When the output of the gate AND18 goes high, the program counter 582 is immediately reset, so the output of the AND gate AND18 falls to the low level the moment it rises.

Similarly, the FtSND signal also falls to a low level the moment the program step enters the 8th step, so the R8ND signal is essentially the 3-word signal from the Q step to the 8th step. It will be output as a signal that is at high level during the period. Note that the CALE signal is an AND signal that forms part of the logic circuit 578.
62. Since this AND gate AND62 receives the input of timing pulse TB5, CAL
While the E signal is at a high level, the CALE signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TBS and outputs a 1" signal amount/power (or goo) through the OR22. This logic circuit 598 is placed on the inter-word bus line 366.
A timing pulse TB4 is unconditionally placed on the bus line 366 from the gate 0R22.

Therefore, bus line 366 has a timing pulse TB.
A 4-bit "0" signal synchronized with O-TB3, an "L" signal synchronized with timing pulse TB4, a CALE signal synchronized with timing pulse TBS, and an ADCE signal synchronized with timing pulse TB6. However, the I village T signal is placed in synchronization with the timing pulse T'B7.

Next, a more detailed circuit configuration for selecting the data selector 502 shown in FIG. 30, the fixed data ROM 534, and the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 to be used will be described with reference to the circuit configuration diagram in FIG. 75.

The fixed data ROM 5a4 is C3TO.

C3TC, C3TD, C3TE, C3TF, TMIN,
TMAX, AMAX, TSYN, C8T1. It is constructed by storing 11 pieces of C3T2 data in series (11), and further arranging 6 pieces of the above serial data in parallel. but,
Data AM regarding the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used
Only AX is different for each of the 6th juxtaposed data, and the F numbers are Fll, F16. F22°F32.
F45. Contains data regarding the value of F64. This fixed data ROM 534 can basically be constructed from an integrated circuit element 1702A shown in FIG.

In such a data arrangement, the fixed data 'ROM
534 receives the outputs OP3 to OPO of the instruction ROM 504 at its input terminals 3 to A6, and specifies specific data of the serial data.

Therefore, by inputting the counter buses CTl to CT4 to the AO to A12 terminals, the FLOM5
From the 34 output terminals QO-Q5, the same 6 data except for AMAX are sent to the timing node bus TBO~
The data will be output sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with TB7.

The outputs of QO-Q5 are each connected to an AND gate AN
The AND gates AND31 to AND36 are selectively rendered conductive depending on the maximum aperture value of the photographic lens device 2 used. The outputs of these AND gates AND31 to AND36 are combined into ORI 2, and fixed data specified by the instruction ROM 504 is output from OR gate ORI 2. .

On the other hand, data regarding the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 in use is fetched from the maximum aperture value setting mechanism 536 to the central control section 3'62, and is fetched into a 6-bit shift register 538.

This shift register 538 is shown in FIG.
The diagram shows an integrated circuit element CI) 401
It can be constructed using 5 or 6 pits. The outputs of Ql to Q6 of this multi-site register 538 are always given to the input terminal DI-D6 of the buffer register 602, and the rising edge of the timing pulse TBO, which is given as a clock to the buffer register 602, is always applied to the input terminal DI-D6 of the buffer register 602. In synchronization with the shift register 538, the contents of the shift register 538 are transferred to the buffer
The data is taken into the register 602 and stored. That is, the data AMAX taken into the shift register 538 is synchronized with TB1-TB6, and therefore, at the timing of TB7, the data AMAX is taken into the shift register 538.
The shift register 53 is completely loaded into the
The content of 8 is the rise of TBO, Ha, sofa register 6
02 and stored.

The Q1-Q6 outputs of the buffer register 602 are given to the AND gates AND31-AND36, and depending on the stored AMAX, one of the AND gates AND31-AND36 is applied. is selectively conductive.

By the way, the fixed data ROM 534 receives the OP small output of the instruction ROM 504 at its C8 terminal, and the OP4 of the operand code shown in FIG.
As is clear from the section, data specified in the instruction ROM 504 is outputted through the QO to Q5 terminals only when OP4 is '0'.

Note that the buffer register 602 is an integrated circuit element C.
It can be constructed by combining three pieces of D4013 (manufactured by RCA). By the way, the integrated circuit element CD4
013 is a dual-type D-type clip-flop as shown in the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, through the configuration described above, the instruction R
, 0M504 specifies the fixed data stored in the fixed data R, OM2B5 as an operand, from the wired ORI 3 receiving the output of the OR gate 0R12 to the signal line 10. The fixed data specified by the timing pulse TBO~
It is output sequentially from the lower digits in synchronization with TR7.

On the other hand, in the wired or goo) ORI 3,
The output of data selector 502 is provided. This data selector 502 is connected to an integrated circuit element MC14 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.
512 (manufactured by Motorola), and is configured to selectively output data input from the XO to X7 terminals from the Z terminal according to input signals from the A, B, and C terminals. It is something that To each terminal of A, B, and C, is the instruction RO.
OPO'', OPI, and OP2 outputs are input from M504, and as is clear from Fig. 69, opo, O
PI, OP2 exit union senior, DR, DTSV,
DTTV, DTAV, DTAO, DTAC, BRCFL
Each variable data is selectively output to the Z terminal. In addition,
This data selector 502 receives the OP4 signal input through the inverter INV14 at its DIS terminal, and receives the OP4 signal through the inverter INV15 at its INH terminal.
P 3 (receives input of D signal, but as is clear from the OP4 and OP3 terms of the operand code shown in FIG. 69, only when OP, i, and OP3 are 1",
This data selector 502 selects XO to X7. The variable data input from the terminal is output from the Z terminal, and wired
It is output to the signal line 10 through the OR gate ORI 3.

As described above, through the configuration described above, the instruction R
When the variable data selected by the data selector 502 in the OM 504 is specified as an operand, the wired or goo (wired or goo) receiving the Z terminal output of the data selector 502 is connected from ORI 3 to signal line 10.
The variable data specified in the timing pulse TBO
~TB7 are output sequentially from the lower digits.

The logic circuit 592 also includes the condition signal storage circuit 548.
From MNAL signal, M, NAL signal.

BLB signal, 5PDW signal, 5PDW signal.

Upon receiving the ASLC signal, it simultaneously receives the AECG signal, WNUP signal, and CU multiplication signal from the condition register 57j. This logic circuit 592 discriminates the various signals described above according to a certain logic and generates a display control signal for the digital display 402 and a control signal for the output control section 3640 for the output control section 364.

This logic circuit 592 outputs a WNUP signal indicating that film winding has been completed, and a warning signal "'EEEE".
EE” display command signal EDSP, pulp display “bul”
b'' display command signal BDSP; in strobe photography mode, EF'' display command signal EF D indicating that strobe charging is complete; 8. Display command signal MDS of “M” indicating that it is necessary to manually set the aperture of lens device 2
An output of P is made.

The EDSP signal is generated when there is an operational error in the camera device, and as mentioned earlier, this occurs when the mark 12 is selected on the lens device 2. Mark 12 is selected on the lens device 2 when the lens device 2 is being narrowed down by the aperture drawing lever 64 and film winding is completed, and when the lens device 2 is being focused by the aperture drawing lever 64, When device 2 is not narrowing down, body 4'
(It is output based on two states when the AE lever 94 of In is in the AB discharge state. In other words, the EDS and P signals are 'EDSP=SPDW-MNAL+SPDW-MNAL
・WNUP-AECG・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ It is output in a state that satisfies the logical formula 08.

In addition, the BDSP signal has a pulp signal BL 'l'.
This is the signal output when .

Further, the EFDS signal is a signal that is output when the CU multiplied signal is "1".

Further, the MDSP signal indicates that when the aperture value is set with the aperture setting ring 8 of the lens device 2, the aperture of the lens device 2 is not being stopped by the aperture lever 64, or the aperture is not being stopped by the aperture lever 64. It is output in two states: one is in the shutter priority mode, and the other is in the shutter priority mode. That is, the MDSP signal is MDSIP-8PIM'-MNAL+SPIIW-MN
AL-ASLC is output in a state that satisfies the logical expression Ql.

The logic circuit 592 has a logic diagram shown in FIG. In the figure, the AND gate AND37. AND38 DEG AND39 and OR gate OR14 have a logical configuration to satisfy the above-mentioned 0th mallet equation, and OR gate ORI4 provides an EDSP signal.

Also, AND gate AND40. AND41 and or goo) 0'Rl 5 is the logical configuration of the above (to satisfy formula 11, h6.or goo) From OR15, MD
An SP signal is obtained.

The output of the logic circuit 592 and the flip-flop
The outputs TvF, AvF of '588,590 are then provided to a multiplexer 594 to generate the timing pulse T.
It is converted into a signal synchronized with BO to TB7.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram of the multiplexer 594, to which the integrated circuit element MC14512 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. 53 can be applied. This multiplexer has input terminals X07X7, the XO terminal is grounded, and the
P signal.

AVFL signal to X2 terminal, TVF'L signal to X3 terminal, E'DSP signal to X4 terminal, BDS to X5 terminal.
P signal, BFDS signal to X6 terminal, MD to X7i terminal
Receives input of SP signal. These input signals are A
Counter pulse CT1 input to each terminal of ,B,C
．． Depending on CT2 and CT4, the timing pulse TBo
- As a signal synchronized with TB7, from the Z terminal to the signal line 0
is output in series. .

As mentioned above, the 'WNUP signal is
The AvFV signal is connected to the timing pulse TB2, the TvFL signal is connected to the timing pulse TB3, the EDSP signal is connected to the timing pulse TB4, the BDS
The P signal is output to the signal line (2) in synchronization with the timing pulse TB5, the EFDs signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TB5, and the MDSP signal in synchronization with the timing pulse TB7.

Incidentally, this multiplexer 594 receives the R and SND signals at its INH terminal, and while the R8ND signal is being output, the signal output from its Z terminal is restricted.

FIG. 79 is a logic diagram of the arithmetic circuit 500 shown in FIG.
D47 indicates the circulation gate of the B register 512, and AND gate ANT349 indicates the circulation gate of the C register 514. A register 510. , B register 512. In the normal state, the C register 514 is:
(respectively each of the above and goo) AND45. AND4
7. Through AND49, each content AR,,BR
, CR is circulated.

This arithmetic circuit 500 includes the instruction ROM
Operation control instruction op□ from 504.

OPl, OP2. OP3. , OP4. OP5. OP5.
Controlled by OP7. Said instruction R
, OM5 Q4 outputs the command near-)'OP7. as shown in FIG. OP6. OP5 and t peray)'-
=r-)”OP4.OP3.OP2゜OP1.O
This arithmetic circuit 500 decodes each code through a group of gates and performs necessary arithmetic and control operations.

Further, this arithmetic circuit 500 includes a data selector 502
Various fixed data and variable data are taken in through the circuit, and these data are taken in from the output signal line [phase] of the circuit shown in FIG. 75 to the AND gate λND6o. Note that this AND gate AND60 receives the signal of the output signal line (■) of the circuit shown in FIG. This is to restrict the fetching of data of the operands that have been performed, so as to prevent substantially unnecessary operations from being performed. The output of this AND gate AND60 is the output of AND gate AND4
3 and exclusive or goo) EX2 and AND gate AND57. Although it is given to AND59,
The AND43 is the A register 510.
This is used when directly importing operand data into the EX2.
and Antogame) AND57. AND 59 is used when calculating data AR of A register 510 and operand data.

In Fig. 79, exclusive or gate FjX1,
EX2. EX3 and and goo) AND57゜AND
58. AND59. AND61. or gate 0R21
, flip-flop F21 constitutes an arithmetic section. The configuration of this calculation part is a well-known addition/subtraction circuit, and when OP6, which is the input of exclusive OR gate EX1, is 10'', it operates as an addition circuit, and when OP6 is ``1'', it operates as a subtraction circuit. As shown in the section OP6 in FIG. 69, this is a configuration that follows an instruction system in which, in the calculation mode, if OP6 is no++, add, and if OP6 is l'', subtract. In addition,
The flip-flop F21 is a carry flip-flop that stores the carry generated from the OR gate 0R21. The carry generated in the operation, that is, the carry output from the OR gate 0R21 at the timing of TB7, is the timing pulse TB7.
It is regulated by D61. This or gate OR21
The signal IJ- output from the AND gate AND5
6 and is applied to the J terminal of the carry flip-flop 540.
Since s4o is inputted with the inverted signal of timing pulse TB7 (inverted signal by INV16) and the OR condition signal of clock pulse CP (or goo) OR23 as its clock input, it is connected to the terminal J or. According to the input, this flip-flop 540 is set or reset at the timing of TB7. That is, this carry flip-flop 540 is set by the carry generated by the timing pulse TB7, that is, by the carry generated at the last stage of the operation.

Note that when the operation mode is not in operation mode, as is clear from FIG. 69, the instruction code O20 is 1", so the
(Goo) AND56 is something whose output is regulated.

As mentioned above, the carry generated as a result of the operation is
The signal is detected and stored by the carry flip-flop 540, and the Q output thereof is output as a CA multiplied signal from the CA multiplied signal output terminal.

The calculation result obtained by the above-mentioned addition/subtraction circuit is outputted through the exclusive or gate EX'23 and applied to the AND gate AND44. The output of this AND gate AND44 is OR.
Since it is applied to the A register 510 through the gate ORI 7, if this AND44 is conductive, the result of the above operation will be introduced and stored in the A register 510. In this way, the calculation result is stored in the A register 51.
As is clear from Figure 69, what is incorporated into 0 is,
This occurs when the operation mode is in effect and an A register ON command signal is issued. That is, when O20 is O'' and OPs is 'l'', the AND (goo)AN for data circulation in the A register is
It is sufficient if D45 becomes non-conductive and AND44 becomes conductive to take in the operation result, and the AND gate AN'D51 t was provided for that purpose.
Ear bar 1' INV 21, / 7 ・
This is Kate N0R2. Said AND gate AND51
receives the input of OPs and the OF70 inverted signal obtained through the inverb INV21, and O20 is “O”.
-t'0P573 (It is configured to output "1" only when it is "1", that is, when the output instruction from the instruction ROM 504 is ADD or SUB. This AND gate AND510 "1" output is A,
It is applied to ND44 to make the AND44 conductive, and is inverted through NOR2 and then applied to the AND45 to inhibit the AND45.

Through this configuration, the result of the operation is introduced into the A register 510.

and goo) AND43 is and goo) AND6
This gate is provided to input fixed or variable data inputted through 0 into the A register 510, and the other input terminals are provided with input signals of AND52 and AND53 through the OR gate ORI6. is receiving output. said and goo) AND, 52 and AND
53 is conductive only when O20 is 1'', that is, in the data exchange mode, as is clear from FIG. 69.
It receives input from the Q output CA and OPs of the flip-flop 540, and as is clear from FIG. Also, the AND gate AND
53 is the carry flip mentioned above.

・It receives the input of the output GA and OF2 of the flop 540, and as is clear from FIG. 69, it outputs 1" when OF2 is 1" and the signal!J-CA is 0". Through this configuration, the AND52 output becomes "1'' when the SWC command or SWU command is passed, and the AND53 output output becomes "1''.
'' occurs when the SWN command or SWU command is passed.

Through the above configuration, when in the data exchange mode, if the output state of the carry flip-flop 540 matches the condition to be output from the instruction ROM 504, "1" is output from the OR gate ORt 6,
In order to make the AND43 conductive, the variable or fixed data of the operand introduced through the AND gate AND60 is taken into the A register 510 and stored. At this time, the 1'' output of the OR gate 0R16 is sent as a signal (l'l Q t+ times) through the NOR gate NoR2 and becomes AND4.
5, the circulation of the A register 510 by the AND 45 is prohibited.

On the other hand, the output of the A register 510 is
This is given to D46 and AND4'8, but in the data exchange mode, if the operand data is B register BR or C register C, A register 5 is given.
This is to simultaneously import the data of the operand into the A register 510 and move the data that had been stored in the A register 510 to the operand.

B register 512 or C register 51 as an operand
4 is selected, P4.4 is selected from FIG. OP3. OP
2. All OPLs become "i". This is detected by AND50. On the other hand, at this time, OPO is 0
”, the B register 512, and αpo is 1''
If so, C register 514 is selected. Therefore, OP
O is directly applied to the AND gate AND55, and at the same time it causes the inverter lNV2O to be applied to the AND gate AND55.
54.

This AND gate AND54 is given the output of the AND gate 50 and the output of the OR gate 0R16, so in the data exchange mode, the -operand and
Only when the B register 512 is specified and the data exchange conditions are satisfied, the AND gate AND54 is
outputs 111, and this 1” output is the OR gate 0.
It is applied to the AND gate AND46 through R20. Therefore, the AND gate AND46 becomes conductive, so that the data in the A register 510 is taken into the B register 512 through the AND gate AND46 and the OR gate 0R18. In addition, at this time, the 1" output of OR gate 0R20 is output through inverter INV18) A N D 4
'7, the AND gate AND47 for circulating the data BR of the B register 512 is prohibited. In addition to the OPO signal, the AND55 also receives the output of the AND gate 50 and the ORG).
Since the output of OR16 is given, the above AND is executed only when the C register 514 is specified as an operand in the data exchange mode and the data exchange conditions are satisfied.
Goo) AND55 outputs 1” and the above AND Goo)
Give to AND48. Therefore, the above-mentioned ANDG)AN
D46 becomes conductive and therefore the data in A register 510 is transferred to the AND gate AND48. or gate OR
It will be taken into the C register 514 through I9. In addition, at this time, 'l'' of AND gate AND55
The output is given to the AND49 through the inverter INV 19, so the AND49 is used to circulate the data CR in the C register 514.
is prohibited. 1.Please note that the carry flip
Since the flop 540 receives inputs OP and 7 at its terminals, it enters the data exchange mode and enters the reset state in synchronization with the rising edge of the first clock pulse CP at the time of the first timing pulse TB7. However, this TB
At the timing 7, the commanded data exchange has been completed.

Through the configuration described above, this arithmetic circuit 500 performs necessary arithmetic operations or data exchange according to instructions from the instruction ROM 504.
By operating this arithmetic circuit 500 according to each routine shown in the figure, the A register 5 (0) is displayed on the digital display 402 regardless of whether the result of the arithmetic operation is bundled or initially set. The control aperture value or data regarding the aperture value for display and control can be obtained in the B register 512, regardless of whether it is obtained as a result of calculation or initially set. , C register 514 provides control data for controlling the number of aperture stages of the lens device 2.

As mentioned above, when the calculation by this calculation circuit 500 is completed, the R8ND signal is output from the logic circuit 598 receiving the output of the program counter 582. There is a signal at the level between 37 and 1 afterward.

This R8ND signal is applied to the AND gate AND42. of the 79th illustrated arithmetic circuit 500. Noah gate N0R2, oh goo) is given to OR20, so the AND gate AND42. AND45. AND47 is prohibited. Therefore, the output of the register is the AND gate AND42. It is directly connected to the A register 510 through the OR gate 0R17, and the output of the A register 510 is connected to the AND gate AND46,
Since it is directly connected to the B register 512 through the OR gate 0FLt8, the R8ND signal is '1' from the signal line @.
``The data AR in each of the registers A, B, and C during the three words.

BR and CR are the contents BFL of the B register 512.

The contents AR of the A register 510 and the contents CR of the C register 514 are sequentially output in this order.

78. Signal line of multiplexer 594 shown.

(2) Output and the output line @output of the 79th illustrated arithmetic circuit 500 are given to the output logic circuit 596.

This output logic circuit 596 has a configuration as shown in the logic diagram of FIG. 80, and is responsible for loading time-controlled data and signals onto the output bus line 374. It is something.

This output logic circuit 596 is provided with an OR24 at the output end to the output path line 374, and the output of the signal line ■ and the AND gate AND.
64. Each output of AND63 is given. Signal line■
The output of AVF is the WNUP signal synchronized with timing nodes TB1 to TB7 from multiplexer 594.
L signal, TVFL signal, HDSP signal, BDSP signal,
These are the EFDS signal and the MDSF signal, and will be put on the output bus line 374 as is through the OR gate 0R24. The output of this multiplexer 594 is
As mentioned before, the output is regulated during the 3-word period when the R8ND signal is at the 1 level.

On the other hand, when the R8ND signal becomes a no-y level, this no-y level signal makes the AND65 receiving the signal line 0 output from the arithmetic circuit 500 conductive. This AND65- output is given to an AND gate AND64, and this AND64 outputs a signal BLB indicating loop mode from the setting condition storage circuit 548 and a strobe photography mode from the condition register 574. If the output of NAND3 is being received, and the shutter speed is not set to Pulp, then the above-mentioned AND Goo) AND64 becomes conductive. Therefore, through the AND64, the R8ND signal is
The B register 51 of the arithmetic circuit 500 is
2. A register 510. Each content BR of C register 514
, AR, and CFL are sequentially placed on the output path line 374 from the OR gate 0R24 in synchronization with the timing pulse.

On the other hand, if the flash photography mode is not set and the shutter speed is set to PULP, the output of the NAND3 becomes '0', and therefore the AND gate A N I) 64 is prohibited. Therefore,
The data output from the arithmetic circuit 500 to the signal line @ is not placed on the output bus line 374.

However, in such a pulp photography mode, as mentioned above, regarding the aperture value, the aperture is controlled and the aperture value AV of the lens device 2 is adjusted.

is displayed on the digital display 402.

Therefore, the data for controlling the number of aperture stages is all pits "0".
", but in order to display the maximum aperture value AVo, it is necessary to transfer the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 used to the output control section 360. For that purpose, the aperture value to be controlled, i.e. The data AR of the A register 510 is connected to the bus,
At the same timing as when it is placed on line 374, the maximum aperture value AVo of the photographic lens device 2 in use is transferred to bus line 3.
You can put it on 74. For that purpose, AND gate AND
62. AND63 is provided. The AND62 is input with the Q5 output of the program counter 582 and the 811 output of the decoder 600,
Therefore, this AND62 is the arithmetic circuit 5
When the data AR of the A register 510 is output from 00 to the output line @, it becomes '1' for the same one word.
Goo) AND63 receives the output of the NAND3 through inverter INV22, and
The arithmetic circuit 500 is given the output of the AND62 and the signals D and T A O from the circuit shown in Fig. to A register 51
At the same timing as the data AR of 0 is output, the open aperture value data AVO of the photographing lens device 2 in use is placed on the output bus line 374 through the OR gate 0R24. ” Figure 81 shows bus line 366, input bus line 3
70. 3 is an explanatory diagram summarizing what has been previously described regarding signals and data placed on output bus line 374. FIG.

That is, bus line 366 has a timing pulse T
During the timing period from BO to TB3, the "O" signal is applied, the CALE signal is applied in synchronization with the timing pulse TBS, the ADCE signal is applied in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6, and the timing pulse TB? The INT signal is carried in synchronization with the input control section 360. Central control unit 362. Output control section 364
Each part plays an important role in determining the timing for data transfer.

In addition, the input bus line/370 plays an important role in transferring various signals and data from the input control section 360 to the central control section 362 based on timing pulses TBO to TB7. When transferring various signals, the ADOF signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TBl, the AELK signal is synchronized with the inter-timing pulse TB2, the 'kECG signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB3, and the 'kECG signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4. WNUP signal, timing pulse AO9, timing pulse synchronized with TBS
The CD signal is loaded in synchronization with the pulse TB6, and in the case of data (in this case, A-D conversion data DD), the timing node pulse TB is used.
In synchronization with O to TB7, % amateur level data is sequentially loaded from the lower digit.

Additionally, the output bus line 374 is connected to the central control unit 362.
It plays an important role in transferring various signals and data to the output control unit 364 based on the timing pulses TBO to TB7. The WNUP signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB2, the TVF'L signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB2, the AVFL signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB3, the EDSP signal is synchronized with the timing pulse TB4, and the BDSP is synchronized with the timing pulse TB5. The EFDS signal is loaded in synchronization with the timing node TB6, and the CMDSP signal is loaded in synchronization with the timing node TB7, as well as data such as shack speed TV, aperture value AV, and open aperture value. In the case of A V rO + control aperture stage number AVs, etc., the timing norm TB
In synchronization with O-TB7, % amateur level data is sequentially loaded from the lowest digit.

Next, the output control section 364 will be explained.

The output control section 364 has two main functions. One is a display control function and the other is an exposure control function.

Various condition signals and various data are input to this output control section 364 from the central control section 362 through an output path line 374. Since these signals and data are input under temporal control, in order to know what kind of signal or data is input to the output bus line 374, it is necessary to check the signal or data. We need to know the time that is placed on the output path line 374.

A synchronization circuit 660 receiving a signal input from bus line 366 is provided to obtain this time.

This synchronization circuit 660 is shown in detail in FIG. 82, where 700 is a ring counter. The ring counter 700 can be implemented using an integrated circuit device CD4035 whose logic diagram is shown in FIG.

Since the bus line 366 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F22 which operates in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6, this 7 flip-flop F22 inputs the signal to the bus line 366 in synchronization with the timing pulse TBS. The loaded CALE signal is detected. The Q output of this flip-flop F22 is the timing pulse T
D of flip-flop F23 that operates in synchronization with BO
given to the input terminal. This flip-flop F23
The Q output of is input to the clock terminal CLK of the ring counter 700 through the AND gate AND66 to which the timing pulse TBo is input.

This ring counter 700 returns its QO and Q3 outputs to the J and N terminals via an AND gate AND67. Note that the QO of the ring counter 700
The clock pulse C output to the specific output signal line 0
The output of Q1 is output to the signal line [phase] through OR26, which receives the input of clock pulse CP, and the Q1 output is output to the signal line [phase] through OR26, which receives the input of clock pulse CP. It is output to the signal line [phase] through OR25, which receives the input of the beam pulse CP.

Note that the Q output of the flip-flop F23 is input to the S terminal of the flip-flop F24, and the Q output is output to the signal line O.

The R terminal of this flip-flop F24 has a power
An up clear signal PUC is provided.

Further, a direct reset signal 1jEt' is inputted to the direct reset terminal R of the flip-flop F23 from a signal line @ which will be described later.

In such a configuration, the -1(0) operation will be explained with reference to FIG.

Now, when the CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBS is placed on the bus line 366, the flip-flop F2 operates in synchronization with the timing pulse TB6.
2 is set and its Q output becomes 1''.The C'A
Since the LE signal is output for 4 words, this flip
The flop F22 continues to output "1" for 4 words.

The Q output of the clip 70 tube F22 is input to the Di terminal of the flip-flop F23 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO, so the next evening, the timing pulse "T"
In synchronization with the rise of BO, this flip-flop F2
3 is set and its Q output becomes l''.Since the flip-flop F22 is in the set state for 4 words, the flip-flop F23 similarly continues to be set for 4 words. becomes.

The Q output of the above-mentioned flip )9 tube F25 is inputted with the timing self pulse TBO.
66, the AND gate AND66 outputs a signal synchronized with TBO for 4 words after the flip-flop F23 is set.

Since the output of this AND66 is given to the clock terminal CLK of the ring counter 700, the ring counter 700 receives the timing pulse TBo.
QO, Qt* Q2. The Q3 output terminal outputs as shown in Figure 83. Note that the outputs of QO, Ql, and Q2 of this ring counter 700 are input to AND67, and the output of this AND gate AND67 is input to terminals J and 700 at the start of counting. At this point, a count output is output from the QO terminal. The reason why the output polarity of the ring counter 700 is normally "'l" and becomes n Off during count output is that such an output characteristic is obtained by grounding the T/C terminal.

Therefore, a signal that becomes 0-level is output to the signal line 0 only for the next 1 word time when the CALE signal is detected for the first time.

Also, or goo) OFL25.0FL26,0R27
From then on, as shown in Figure 83, the timing pulse T
At each rising time of Bo-TB7, pulse outputs having falling characteristics are outputted from the signal lines (1), (o), and [phase], respectively. Note that the falling output of the signal WsO corresponds to the word time when various signals are loaded on the output bus line 366, and the falling output of the signal line [phase] corresponds to the word time when various signals are loaded on the output bus line 366. It corresponds to the word time when the data TV is loaded, and the way the signal line [phase] falls corresponds to the word time when the control aperture stage number data AVs is loaded on the output bus line 366, and 68 is the previous one. This is clear from the relationships among the various signals and data sending times described above.

On the other hand, the flip-flop F24 is set by the Q output of the flip-flop 23, but the output signal from the Q terminal of this 7-rip, 70-tube F24 to the signal line ◎ is transmitted after the first calculation is completed. This is used to prevent the camera mechanism from performing any operations after the shutter release. This flip-flop F24 receives a power up clear signal PLIC at its reset terminal RK. Also, this path line 366 is a timing
It is input to the D terminal of a 7 flip-flop F25 synchronized with the pulse TBo, and this flip-flop F25 receives the INT signal placed on the bus line 366 at the time of the timing pulse TB7, that is, the A-D of the input control section 360. Its Q output is placed on the signal line [phase], which is used to detect a signal indicating that the converter is missing in the integration of the input analog data.

The flip-flop F23 of this synchronous circuit 660 receives a direct reset signal input from the signal line @ to its direct reset terminal R, but this is because the shutter
The flip-flop is configured so that data etc. are not input to the output control section 364 at any time other than the time before the shutter release is performed and the time when the self-timer is operating after the shutter release is performed. F2
This is to prohibit the set operation of step 3. The shutter release is performed based on a certain calculation result,
After each mechanism of the camera device starts operating, other data, especially when TTL metering is being performed, is input that is affected by aperture or mirror up, which prevents normal exposure control operation. There are things to prevent things from happening.

Various signals and data on the output bus line 366 are separated based on temporal judgment based on the output from the synchronization circuit 660 and timing pulses TBO to TB7 as described above, and the output control section These functions will be incorporated into the corresponding functional parts of H.364.

The various signals on the output bus line 366 are demultiplexed by a demultiplexer 610 into timing pulses TBO~
It undergoes separation based on TB7 and is stored in output control register 622.

A detailed configuration of a configuration including such a demultiplexer 6.10 and an output control register 622 is shown in FIG. 84, and a logic diagram of the demultiplexer 610 is shown in FIG. An integrated circuit element CD4015, which is commonly used in the present invention, is used, and two integrated circuit elements CD4035, the logic diagram of which is shown in FIG. 38, are used as the output control register 622.

In this configuration, the demultiplexer 610 receives the signal line (1) output of the 82nd illustrated circuit 660 at its clock terminal C, and the output control register 622 receives the AND69 output at its clock terminal C. via the timing pulse TB1 and the asynchronous circuit 66 in FIG.
The AND condition signal of the 0 signal line 0 output is input.

That is, as mentioned above, at the next word time when the CALE signal synchronized with the timing pulse TBS is placed on the pass line 366, the timing pulse TBI
~ In synchronization with TB7, as shown in Figure 81, the output bus line 378 has WNUP, TVFL, AVFL, EDSP.
, BDSP.

Since the EFDS and MASP signals are input, the demultiplexer 610 takes in the signal line (2) output, timing pulse, and each of the above-mentioned signals in series between these words. After this operation, at the next word time, signal line 0
Since the output goes from low level to high level, the AND gate AN'D69 outputs a signal synchronized with the timing pulse TB1, so that QO1, Ql1. Q21. Q31.
QO2゜Ql2. Each output of Q22 is taken into the output control register 622 from terminals DO to D6 and stored therein. As a result, the output control register 62
MDSP from each output terminal of QO-Q6 of 2.

EFDS, BDSP, BDSP, AVFL, TVFL.

Each signal of WNUP will be output.

On the other hand, each data on the output bus line 374, such as shutter speed TV, aperture value AV, and control stage number AVs, is handled as data for controlling each mechanism of the camera device and data for displaying insufficient data. are different.

Now, to explain how to import data for display,
In the output bus line 374, there are two types of data used for display: shutter speed data TV and aperture value data AV. These signals are rounded off through the display control circuit 652 and converted into a form suitable for display on the digital display 402. Also, in order to prevent the digital display 402 from flickering due to sudden changes in data, data capture is performed. The display aperture value is set in the register 648 for displaying the aperture value, and the display shutter speed TVDS is set in the shutter value register 648 based on the word time at which each data is loaded on the output bus line 374. Each of the data is taken into the speed display register 650 and stored.

FIG. 85 shows a detailed logic configuration diagram of a data acquisition circuit for such display.

In the figure, 998 is a rounding circuit for rounding off the data input from the output bus line 374, and is constituted by an integrated circuit element CD4032 (manufactured by RCA). This integrated circuit device CD4032 is formed by three series adders, the block diagram of which is shown in FIG. 8.6, and the logic diagram of which is shown in FIG. , the circuit shown in Figure 85 uses only one of them.

This rounding circuit 998 has the output data of output bus line 374 on its A1 terminal! The timing pulse TBt is input to the Bl terminal. Further, a timing pulse TB7 is input to the carry terminal CA.

In such a configuration, the output bus line 374
When data is input to the terminal, the % accuracy bit is T
Although it is input at the timing of BI, a timing pulse TBI is input to the Bl terminal at the same timing. That is, 1°' only for the % precision bit of the data.
However, if this one-level precision bit is set to 1, a carry will appear in the % precision bit and a carry will be performed, and the % of the data will be added. If the precision bit is set to 0, the carry does not reach the Z precision bit. Therefore, as long as we look at the output data from the S terminal of this rounding circuit 998 and look at the higher digits than the % precision bits, this output data will be % precision data rounded to the nearest precision bit. .

As described above, in the rounding circuit 998, the data is converted into data with a percent accuracy suitable for display, and the data output from the S terminal is sent to the aperture value display register 64.
8 and 7° applied to the respective D terminals of the shutter speed display register 650. At this stage, it is difficult to determine what the data rounded off by the rounding circuit 998 and converted to % accuracy relates to. There is a necessary filter depending on the judgment 1 Therefore 1 Each of the above registers 648, 650
In accordance with the control pulses input to the respective clock terminals C, the corresponding data will be taken in.

Note that this rounding circuit 998 has its carry terminal C
It is reset by receiving the input of timing pulse jB7 at A.

The clock terminal C of the aperture display register 648 is connected to the clip flop F2 through OR31.
7 and the OR condition of the clock pulse CP, and the shutter speed display register 65
If it is 0, the clock terminal C receives the OR condition of the Q output of the flip-flop F26 and the clock pulse CP through OR32.

The Q output of the clip 70 tube F26 is the D input of the flip-flop F27, and the D input of the flip-flop F26 is connected to the inverter INV25.
It receives the output of OR gate 0R29 through the gate. On the other hand, the Q output of the flip-flop F27 is applied to the set terminal S of the flip-flop F28, and the Q output is applied to the OR gate 0R28. The OR gate 0R28 receives two signals from a signal line [phase] connected to a signal source to be described later via an inverter INV24.
The on/off signal of H2 is input, and the output signal of this OR28 is given to the OR29. On the other hand, this OR gate 0R29
It receives a signal input from the signal line ◎, which is the QO terminal output of the illustrated ring counter 700. Note that the 2Hz on/off signal from the signal line ◎ is an OR gate.
30 to the reset terminal R of the flip-flop F28. This flip-flop F28
In addition to the reset terminal, there is also the OR gate 0R30.
A power up clear signal PUC is input through the power up clear signal PUC. On the other hand, the flip-flop F26. The power up clear signal PUC is also input to each direct reset terminal R of F27.

With this configuration, its operation will be explained according to the timing chart of FIG. 88. When the 2H2 signal sent from the signal line [phase] becomes low level, the output of inverter INV24 becomes low level. level. In this state, the clip-flop F28 is in the reset state,
Since its Q output is 0'', the output of OR28 is 0'', so the OR gate 0R29 is
The counter 7 shown in FIG. 82 is input from the signal line 0.
A QO ratio output of 00, that is, a signal that is normally ``1'' and becomes 0'' only during one word following the CALE signal can be output.

The output of this OR gate OR29 is the inverter INV2
5 to the D terminal of the flip-flop F26 synchronized with the timing pulse TBO, so that the flip-flop F26 is connected to the inverter INV25.
It outputs "1" for one word from then on, and remains set only for the next one word. While this flip-flop F26 is set, this corresponds to the time when the shutter speed data TV is loaded on the output path line 374, so the Q output of this flip-flop F26 and the clock pulse CP are OR gate 0R32 receiving input
If a clock pulse for data capture is given to the shutter speed display register 650 through the error, the display shutter speed T from the rounding circuit 998 is
VDS will be captured and stored in the register 650. On the other hand, since the Q output of the flip-flop F26 is input to the D terminal of the flip-flop F27 synchronized with the timing pulse xTB□, this flip-flop F27
It remains set only for the next 1 word between the 1 words in which it is set. Therefore, while this flip-flop F27 is set, it corresponds to the time when the aperture value data AV is loaded on the output bus limiter 374.
When a clock path for data acquisition is given to the aperture position display register 648 through the OR gate 0R31 which receives the Q output of the flap flop F27 and the input of the clock pulse CP. , the display aperture value AVDS from the rounding circuit 998 is taken into the register 648 and stored.

Note that since the Q output of the clip-flop F27 is given to the set terminal of the flip-flop F28,
This flip-flop F28 is also set together with the above-mentioned freetub flop F27, and its Q output is 1.
” becomes.

This Q output is given to OR28 and its output is I11, so the output of OR gate 0R28 is 0.
1" and is applied to the OR gate 0R29. Therefore, the signal from the signal line ◎ does not pass through the OR gate 0R29, and both flip-flops F26 and F27 are held in the reset state, so the shutter speed display The corresponding data for the display register 650 and the aperture display register 648 are not updated.

This flip-flop F28 receives the inverted signal of the 2Hz signal from the signal line [phase] through the inverter INV24 through the OFL30, so it is reset when the 2Hz signal becomes low level. It will be done.

On the other hand, this low-level 2Hz signal is passed through the inverter INV24 to the above-mentioned (or goo) OFL28.
Since a "1" signal is given to the signal line 0 and its output is set to 1, the signal from the signal line 0 is maintained in a state where it cannot be accepted.

Next, when the 2Hz signal from the signal line [phase] becomes high level, the flip 70 tube F28 output becomes 0'', so it is possible to receive the signal from the signal line @, and therefore, Using the same method as described above, a new displayed shutter speed TVDS is loaded into the shutter speed display register 650, and a new displayed aperture value AVDS is loaded into the aperture position display register 648. It will be remembered.

Through the above-described configuration, data for display, such as shutter speed and aperture value, is captured every 2H2, so flickering and other problems may occur due to small changes in data within the digital display 402. This method can prevent erroneous reading, and is an extremely effective data capture method or display method for a digital display system.

As described above, the displayed aperture 6-value AVDS and displayed shutter speed are rounded to the aperture level display register 648 and the shutter speed display register 650, and are taken in as % precision data at 2Hz intervals. TVDS includes the following display control circuit 624 and display driver 65.
6 will be displayed on the digital display 402. .

The display control circuit 624 does not simply display the aperture value and shutter speed, but also displays symbols, etc., controls blinking of the display, etc., as shown in FIG. 1θ, depending on the operation mode and operating state of the camera device. It is also necessary to perform various signals TVFL, which are taken in from the output bus line 374 and stored in the output control register 622.
, AVFL, EDSP, BDSP, BFDS, MDSP
etc. are involved.

The detailed block diagram of the display control circuit 624 is shown in FIG. 89. Reference numeral 702 in the middle of the figure is a decoder ROM for displaying the aperture value; Aperture value and 'O for the display section 250 of No. 2
P”, cL”.

704 is a decoder R for displaying the shutter speed.
OM is for displaying the shutter speed on the first display section 244, and 706 is for displaying the shutter speed on the first display section 244.
uLb”, “bEF”.

Each figure shows a decoder ROM for symbol display for displaying symbols such as "EF".

As mentioned above, the digital display 402 is dynamically driven based on the timing pulses TBI-TB6, and the details will be explained with reference to the plan view of the digital display 402 shown in FIG. 90.

In the figure, the first display section 244 includes a display element 708 for displaying fractions, four 7-segment display elements 710 and 714° for displaying shutter speed and symbols, and a decimal point display element 7.
12, the 7 segment display element 718 is driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB3, the 7 segment display element 716 is driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB4, and the 7 segment display element 714 is driven to display at the timing of timing pulse TB4. and a display element 70 for displaying fractions.
8 is driven for display at the timing of the timing pulse TB5, and the 7 segment display element 710 and the decimal point display element 712 are driven for display at the timing of the timing pulse TB6.

Further, in the figure, the second display section 250 is composed of seven segment display elements 720, 724 and a decimal point display element 722, and the third display section 252 is composed of "M".
The 7-segment display element 724 and the display element 726 for displaying M'' are driven to display at the timing of the timing pulse TB1, and the 7-segment display element 726 is configured to perform display. 72
0 and decimal point display element 722 H timing pulse T,
The display is driven at timing B2.

Therefore, each of the seven segment display elements 710°714.
716, 718, 720, 724 in parallel with a time division display signal synchronized with the timing pulses TBO to TB7, and the display element 726 for displaying "M" and the decimal point display element 722, 712. and fractional display: Timing pulses TBI, TB2 . TB6. By providing synchronized display signals to each of the TBs 5, this digital display 402 can be dynamically driven.

Note that as the display device 402, R7A-122-9 (B
(manufactured by OW MAR) can be used.

The aperture position display decoder ROM 702 is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. ~A6 receives the input of the aperture value display register 648, and the input terminal A7 receives the input of the output control register 62.
2 receives the BDSP signal input.

Also, the C8 terminal has a timing pulse TBI,
The output of NOR3, which receives the input of TB2, is input through OR40.

Therefore, the output of the aperture position display decoder ROM 702 is restricted at least at times other than the timings of TBI and TB2. Therefore, at the timing of TBI, the input to the AO terminal is 0'', and at the timing of TB2, the input to the person's O terminal is ``1''.・The 7-segment display element 724 and the 7-segment display element 72o of the digital display 4'02 are output from the output terminals DO to D7 at each timing of pulses TBI and TB2.
It outputs 8 lines for display driving of the 1-decimal point display element 722.

Nao, Kotup: I-f ROM 70' 2 (D D
The 7-line output of O''D6 is used for segment selection of the 7-segment display elements 720 and 724, and the 1-line output of D7 of the decoder ROM 702 is used for selective driving of the decimal point display element 722. It will be used accordingly.

The shutter speed display decoder ROM 704 has a sixth
It is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 8, and has a tie, a mink pulse TB4. The input terminal AIK receives the output of the OR gate 0R38 which receives the input of TB6, and the input terminal AIK receives the timing pulses TBS, TB'6.
It receives the output of OR gate 0R39 which receives the input of . Further, the input terminals A2 to A7 receive the output of the shutter speed display register 650. Also, that ■
The output of NOR3 (which receives input of timing pulses TBI and TB2) is connected to the inverter I.
NV34, Oy-Gate 0R42, Or Gut OR
It is input through 1 through 43. Therefore, the shutter speed display decoder ROM 704 has at least TBI
, TB2, its output is regulated.

Therefore, the output of this decoder ROM 704 has meaning at the timings of TB3 to TB5, but now the timing pulse TB4. T B 5. T B 6
When neither is input, that is, at the timing of TB3, both the AO and AI terminal inputs become "0", and when the timing pulse TB4 is input, only the AO terminal input becomes "1". , when the timing pulse TBS is input, only the input of that person's 1 terminal becomes 1'', and when the timing pulse TB6 is input, both the AO and AI terminal inputs become 1''. Therefore, according to the output from the shutter speed display register 650, at each timing of the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, the 7-segment display element 718 of the digital display 402 is output from the output terminal Do-D7.
．． 7-segment display element 716, 7-segment display element 714, fraction display element 708, 7-segment display element 710, and decimal point display element 712 for display driving.
Determine how the line will come out.

The 7 line output of Nao, Copper R-Da Aom7o 4oDa-D6 is the 7 segment display element 710.714
, 716, 718, and one line output of D7 of the decoder FLOM 702 is used to select and drive the fraction display element 708 and the decimal point display element 722, respectively.

The symbol display decoder ROM 706 is composed of an integrated circuit element 1702A having a configuration as shown in the block diagram of FIG. 68, and its input terminal AO receives the pulse TB4. It receives input from TB6, and input terminal A
I have the timing control through OR39.
Pulse TB5. Receives input from TB6. In addition, input terminals 4 to 86 each have EF".

A signal instructing the display of "bEF", "buLb", and "EEBE" is input. Moreover, the timing pulse TB1. The output of the NOR gate NOR3 receiving the input t'' of TB2 is connected to the inverter INV34,
jF7-'J-)OR4It-U is input.

Therefore, the shutter speed display decoder ROM 706
The output is regulated at least at the timings of TB1 and TB2. Therefore, this decoder ROM 70
The output of 6 has meaning at the timing of TB3 to TB6, but now the timing pulse TB4°TB5. T.B.
6 When neither is input, that is, at the timing of TB3, the inputs to the AO and AI terminals are both 0", and when the timing pulse TB4 is input, only the AO terminal input is 1". , when the timing pulse TBs is input, only the input of that person's 1 terminal becomes "L", and when the timing pulse TB6 is input, that AO.

Both Al terminal inputs become 1". Therefore, this decoder R, 0M706 outputs 1" from the output terminals Do-D6 at each timing of timing pulses T'B3 to TB6 according to the A4 to A7 terminal inputs. , 7-segment display element 718, 7-segment display element 716, 7-segment display element 714. 0M7Q6 glue.

The 7-line output of ~D6 is the 7-segment display element 7.
It will be used for segment selection of 10,714,716,718.

The DO-D6 outputs of each of the decoder ROMs 702, 704, and 706 are combined and applied to the display drive circuit 656 as a total of seven lines of signals. Further, the D7 outputs of the decoder ROMs 702 and 704 are combined into one line and applied to the display drive circuit 656 through the OR37. °Display drive circuit 6
As the 56, two 75491 (manufactured by TI) are used.

On the other hand, the signal for displaying the M'' symbol display element 726 is obtained by outputting the MDSP signal in synchronization with the timing TBt by the AND74. The output of AND74 is sent to the decoder ROM through the OR37.
It is applied to the display drive circuit 656 together with the D7 outputs 70'2 and 704.

Note that each of the decoder ROMs 702, 704, 706,
Its output is regulated by various factors. In particular, since the outputs of the decoder ROMs 704 and 706 are both output in synchronization with the timing pulses TB3 to TB6, it is necessary to select one of them for output. Also, when you want to make the display data of the shutter speed blink, it is necessary to regulate the output of the decoder ROM704 at a constant cycle, and when you want to blink the display data of the aperture value, the output of the decoder R, 0M702 needs to be regulated at a constant cycle. In addition, it is necessary to control the display of error warnings.”EE IJBE
``When displaying all blinking, decoder ROM 702, 70
It is necessary to regulate the output of 6 at a constant cycle, and furthermore, the input analog and
During data integration, that is, while the INT signal is being input, there is a risk that the light blocking of the digital display 402 in the viewfinder will have an adverse effect on the TTL photometry system, so all decoder ROMs 702, 704, and 706 output It is necessary to implement regulations and make the digital display 402 inoperable.
Furthermore, when the camera mechanism is operating for exposure, the light emitted from the digital display 402 in the viewfinder may have an adverse effect on the exposure, and when the self-timer is operating or the exposure time is In order to prevent wasted battery consumption due to unnecessary operation of the digital display 402 when shooting with
It is necessary to perform the output regulation of 06 to disable the digital display 402.

In Figure 89, a signal is input to NOR5 from the signal line @, 0, but from the signal line [phase],
1 before the exposure control mechanism of the camera device starts operating.
A signal that becomes "1" is input from the signal line O, and a signal that becomes "1" after the exposure control mechanism of the camera device finishes its operation. Therefore, this Noah Gate N0R5
"When the exposure control mechanism of the camera device is in operation"
This results in a signal output that becomes ``l''.
The output of NOR5 is fed to OR34. on the other hand,.

An INT signal indicating that integration is in progress is input to this OR gate from the signal line @ shown in FIG. This will act as a blanking signal. The output of the OR gate 0R34 is inverted from the OR gate 0'RJ35 through the inverter INv27 and is given to the AND gate AND74 as a '0' signal, so the output of the AND gate AND74 is regulated, and therefore the 'M ``Blanking is often applied to the selection display signal for display.

On the other hand, the output of the OR gate 0R35 is sent to the v terminal of the decoder ROM 702 through the OR gate OR40.
Decoder RO through OR gates 0R42, 0R43
Connect the OR gate 0R42, OR, to the C8 terminal of M704.
43 to the terminals of the decoder FLOM706, each of the decoder ROM70
Since each output of 2°704.706 is blanked, the display on the digital display 402 is restricted.

Note that one clock pulse CP is given to the OR gate 0R35, and when the output of the OR gate 0R34 is 0'', a signal synchronized with the clock pulse CP is always output. However, it is synchronized with this clock pulse CP.

The signals are sent to each of the decoder ROMs 702, 704 and 706.
This is used for blanking so that unnecessary data is not displayed on the digital display 402 when the output content changes.

Now, the shutter speed is displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display section 402, and the aperture value or 'cL"OP"O is displayed on the second display section 250.
Display a symbol such as "O", and if necessary, display the third symbol.
When displaying "M" on the display section 252 of B.
The DSP signal, the E-DSP signal, and the EFDS signal are naturally "0", and therefore, the blanking signal is sent to the I terminal of the decoder ROM 702 at times other than TBI and TB2, as mentioned earlier. is applied and also the decoder RO
For the C8 terminal of M704, as mentioned earlier, 1/m
A blanking signal is applied at timings TB1 and TB2. On the other hand, the C8 terminal of the decoder ROM 706 receives the output signal of the AND73, which receives the BDSP signal, the BDSP signal, and the EFDS signal. - Since the output of NOR4 is given as a blanking signal through OR gate 0R41, the output of this decoder RO, M706 is regulated.

Therefore, based on the outputs from the decoder ROMs 702 and 704, the digital display 402 displays the shutter speed on its first display section 244, and displays the aperture value or other information on its second display section 2-50. “cL”, “OP”,”
00", etc., and if necessary, the third
``M'' is displayed on the display section 252 of .

In such a display state, if the aperture value currently calculated as a result of calculation exceeds the limit of increasing without control in the lens device 2, a force "l" is sent as an AVFL signal to erase the display of the aperture value. ;It will be output! In this case, this AVFL signal is transmitted from the signal line [phase] on which the 2H2 on/off signal is carried through the inno (-taper INV33).
Since the on/off signal of H2 is given to the NAND gate NAND3, this NAND gate) NAN
The D3 cars output 2Hz on/off signals, which are input to the NAND gate NAND4. On the other hand, this NAND gate NAND4 receives input from the NAND gate NAND2;
Since the BDSP signal among its inputs is "0", its output is "1", and therefore the corresponding Nando Goo)N
AND4 will output an on/off signal of 2H2. This nand goo) NAND4 output is oh goo)
The signal is input to the CS terminal of the decoder ROM 702 through the OR 40', and the output of the ROM is blanked at 2 Hz.

Therefore, the aperture value display displayed on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 is caused to blink at 2 Hz by the decoder ROM 702.

Also, as already mentioned, when the shutter speed calculated as a result exceeds the limit that can be controlled by the body 4, 'l' is output as the TVFL signal to make the shutter speed display blink. In this case, this TVFL signal is connected to the inverter INV3:l from the signal line [phase] on which the 2H2 on/off signal is carried, and the AND gate to which the 2Hz on/off signal is given. Since it is given to AND72, this AND goo)A
A 2H2 on/off signal will be output from the ND72. The output of this AND72 is sent to the C8 of the decoder ROM704 through OR43.
It is input to the terminal, and blanking is applied to the outputs of the R and OM with 2H2. Therefore, the shutter speed display displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 is caused to blink at 2H2 by the decoder R,0M704.

Next, when the strobe photography mode is entered and a charge completion signal is given to the input control unit 360, as mentioned above, a “1” signal as an EFDS signal is output from the central control unit 362. However, at this time, as shown in FIGS. 10(e) and 10(d), "EF" indicating the controlled shutter speed and charging completion is displayed on the first display section.

Note that the shutter speed to be controlled is determined by the fractional display element 708.
．． It is displayed using a 7 segment display element 710° 714 and a decimal point display element 712, and the decoder ROM
704 and timing pulses TBs and TB6 are involved, and the 'BFWμ indication indicating the completion of charging is performed by 7 segment display elements 716 and 718, and the decoder ROM 706 and timing pulses TBs and TB6 are involved.
3. TB4 is involved.

Now, when "1" as an EFDS signal is input to the A4 terminal of the 89-bit display decoder ROM 706, the timing pulse TB3. T.B.
The signal output during 4 is EF'' for the 7-segment display elements 716 and 718 of the first display section.

On the other hand, a shutter speed display signal is applied to the decoder ROM 704 from a shutter speed display register 650. Note that since the shutter speed at this time is less than the strobe synchronization shutter speed (for example, 1/60th of a second), it does not exceed the display range by the 7-segment display elements 710 and 714 of the first display section.

In this state, AND73 has EFD
S signal is input, but this AND73
is the timing pulse T through OR gate 0R44.
B3. Since it is receiving TB4 (7) input, this AND
'Gate AND73 is TB3. l at the timing of TB4
This '1' output is input to NOR4, and in order to set the output to '0', the output of this knob gate N0R4 is connected to the inverter INV32.
The decoder ROM704, which is input to the C8 terminal through OR43, is inverted through TB3. Blanking is applied only during the timing of TB4, and the above-mentioned Noah gate N0
The output of R4 is input to the decoder ROM 706 T, B3 . T.B.
Blanking is applied between timings other than 4, that is, between TBS and TB6.

Therefore, in the strobe photography mode, the shutter speed and "EF" are displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402. On the other hand, the second display section 244 of the digital display 402 The display unit 250 has an aperture position display register 6 unless the strobe is in full flash mode 5.
48 outputs aperture value data, and in accordance with the data, a display aperture value signal is output from the decoder ROM 702, and the aperture value is displayed. Furthermore, for the third display section 252 of the digital display 402,
If the MD8P signal is @11T, "M" is displayed.

Also, if Pulp is selected as the shutter speed,
As previously mentioned, the 1" signal is output as the BDSP signal, but at this time, the first display section displays 'buLb' as shown in Figure 10). It will be done. When 1" is input as the BDS P signal, this 1" signal is input to AND gates AND70 and AND71, but the AND gate AND70
Since the S signal is input through the inverter INV30, and the BFDS signal is directly input to the AND71, as long as the EFDS signal is NO,
The output of the AND70 becomes 1'' and is input to the A6 input terminal of the decoder ROM706.

As a result, the decoder ROM 706 displays "b u'L b" on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402.
A signal is output to display the information. In such a state, the BDSP threat signal is input to NOR4, so its output is set to 0''. Therefore, the output of NOR4 is inverted through inverter INV32 and then OR Decoder R, 0M704, which is input to the C8 terminal through OR43, is blanked, and the decoder ROM706, whose output from the NOR gate N0R4 is inputted to the V terminal through OR gate 0R41, is " Therefore, in the pulp photography mode, the first display section 244 of the digital display 402
"buLb" will be displayed. on the other hand,
The second display section 250 of the digital display 402 displays the photographing lens device 2 in use according to the output signal from the aperture display register 648 unless the MDSP signal is "1".
is displayed, and if the MD8P signal is l'', the aperture value is not displayed and the third display section 252
g"M" is displayed. This matter is explained in Figure 10 (
As shown in b).

Also, as mentioned earlier, if you are in strobe shooting mode and select "Normal" as the shutter speed, the EFDS signal and BDSP signal will be output. However, at this time, the first display section shows <
"bEF" is displayed. E/FDS signal and B
When 1'' is input as the DSF signal, the output of the AND gate AND71 receiving both input signals becomes 1, and is input to the A5 terminal of the decoder FLOM706.

As a result, the decoder FLOM 706 displays buLb'' on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402.
A signal is output to display the information. In this state, the BDSP signal is input to the NOR gate N0R4, so its output is set to NO, but for this reason, this NOR gate is inverted through the NOR gate NOR4 (D output ty) <- INV32. The decoder ROM704 inputted to the I terminal through OR43 is subjected to planking, and the output of the NOR gate N0R4 is inputted to the i terminal through OR gate 0R41. The decoder ROM 106 outputs a note for displaying "bBF". Therefore, in the strobe photography mode and the pulp photography mode, the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 displays "bEF". A display will be made. On the other hand, the digital display 402
Unless the strobe is in the full flash mode, the aperture value and data are output from the aperture direct display register 648 to the second display section 250 of the flash unit, and the decoder R
A signal of the displayed aperture value is output from the OM 702, and the aperture value is displayed. In addition, the digital display 40
For the third display section 252 of 2, the MDSP signal is "
1", "M" is displayed.

Also, when a "1" signal is input as an EDSP signal,
Said digital display 4o2. 1st ° 2nd display section 2
At 44.250, "EEEEEE" is displayed blinking.

In this way, when a "1" signal is input as the EDSP signal, the decoder ROM 702 outputs a signal for displaying "EE" by inputting an H signal to the input terminal of the person 7.
In addition to inputting a DSP signal, an EDSP signal is input to the A7 input terminal of the decoder ROM 706 in order to output a signal for displaying "EEEE".

On the other hand, this EDSP signal is a NAND signal which is given a 2Hz on/off signal through the inverter INV33 from the signal line O on which the 2H2 on/off signal is carried.
9 on/off signals of 2 Hz are output from this NAND gate NAND2 and input to the NAND gate NAND4.

On the other hand, this NAND gate NAND4 receives the output of the NAND gate NAND3, and as long as the AVFL signal is "O", the output will be "V". Therefore, the NAND4 outputs a 2Hz on/off signal,
This signal (Haoa Gu) decoder RO through OR40
Input to C8 terminal of M702, output of ROM702
Blanking is applied to the force at 2Hz. Therefore, the decoder ROM 702 causes the "EB" display displayed on the second display section 250 of the digital display 402 to blink at 2 Hz. Further, the 2Hz on/off signal output from the NAND gate NAND2 is inverted through the inverter INV28, and the phase is matched with the 2Hz on/off signal output from the NAND gate NAND4. Input to decoder ROM 706 (7) C8 terminal through OR gate 0R41j,
Blanking is applied to the output of the ROM 706 at 2H2. Therefore, the EE displayed on the first display section 244 of the digital display 402 by this decoder ROM 706 is
EE” display will be flashed at 2Hz.On the other hand,
Since the EDSP signal is input to the NOR gate N0R4, this NOR gate NoR414"'0" output is not performed. The output of the decoder ROM 704, which is input to the lever terminal, is completely regulated through the OR gate 0R43.

As mentioned above (when there is a “1” signal input as the EDSP signal, the digital display 402 shows “EE”).
EE EE” 2) (This means that the blinking display is performed at Z intervals.

Next, we will discuss in detail how control data is fetched from output bus line 374.

The control data carried on the output bus line 374 is data TV for controlling the shutter speed and data AVs for controlling the number of aperture steps. As already mentioned, in the next one word time after the CALE signal is placed on the pass line 366, the 1/8
The stage precision data is placed on the output bus line 374, and the narrowing stage number control data/AVs is the 1st word of the 3rd word after the CALE signal is placed on the pass line 366, as described above. The data is placed on the output bus line 374 as 1/8 step precision data synchronized with timing pulses TBO to TB7. That is, the shutter speed control data TV is synchronized with the output of the asynchronous circuit 660 in FIG. are doing. In other words, the shutter speed control data TV can be taken in from the output bus line 374 in synchronization with the signal line [phase] output, but this shutter speed control data TV is based on the apex value, that is, the actual shutter speed in seconds. Since it corresponds to a logarithmically compressed value of the reciprocal of time, some kind of arithmetic operation is required to obtain data corresponding to actual shutter speed seconds from shutter speed data TV corresponding to the apex value. That is, in order to make this shutter speed data TV a signal of a magnitude corresponding to the actual shutter speed, it is necessary to subtract the shutter speed control data TV from the apex value of the shutter speed that is the reference. The data obtained as a result of this subtraction corresponds to the number of steps equivalent to the apex value in the control shutter speed, and the data obtained in this way is expanded exponentially based on the reference shutter speed. It's possible to gain time. As mentioned above, in order to obtain the real time from the shutter speed equivalent to Apex, it is necessary to subtract the shutter speed data TV ~ from the reference shutter speed. is the subtraction circuit 612.

The control shutter time data TVs obtained through the subtractor circuit 612 as described above is input to the shirt shutter time control registers 614 and 626, and each register 614, 626 is connected to the synchronizing circuit '6.60. The shutter speed control data TV is separated from the output bus line 374 and is captured and stored based on a control signal specifying the time to take in the shutter speed data from the shutter speed control signal. The register 614 is provided to store the integer part of the shutter speed data TVs, and the shutter control register 626 is provided to store the decimal part of the shutter speed data TVs.

On the other hand, the aperture stage number control data AVs can be fetched from the output bus line 374 in synchronization with the signal line [phase] output.
s separates the aperture reduction stage number control data AVs from the output bus line 374 based on a control signal that specifies the acquisition time of the aperture reduction stage number control data AVs from the synchronization circuit 660 to the aperture reduction stage number control register 628. and store it in memory.

The data for control as explained above, that is, the shutter speed control data TV and the aperture cutting stage number control data AV.
The detailed logic diagram and diagram of the structure for importing s is shown in FIG. 91.

As is clear from FIG. 91, the shutter speed control registers 614 and 626 are integrated into an integrated circuit element CD4015 which uses the signal line [phase] output shown in FIG. 82 as the clock terminal C input, and also controls the number of narrowing stages. The register 628 is composed of an integrated circuit element CD4015 whose clock terminal C input is the signal line [phase] output shown in FIG.

The detailed logic diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4015 is shown in FIG. 62.

In the configuration shown in Figure 91, AND75,
AND76. AND77. AND78. OR e-gate 0R45, 0R46, exclusive OR gate EX4. EX5,4:y part INV35,
71Jy Boo 70 Tsubu F29. NOR5 is a well-known subtraction circuit configuration, and the timing noggles TBO-T is configured for the NOR gate N0R5.
From the data input in synchronization with B7, the data input in synchronization with the timing node TBO-TB7 is subtracted from the output cross line 374, and the result is sent to the exclusive OR gate EX5. Tatiming・
Output in synchronization with pulses TBO to TB7. By the way,
ANDA gate AN through the inverter INV35
The purpose of inputting the timing signal TB7 to D78 is to prevent the carry that occurs at the final stage of the operation and to
This is to prevent the carry from being inserted into the operations in BO to TB7.

Note that for the Noah gate N0R5, the equivalent value of the apex of the shutter speed, which is the reference for the shutter speed control, is input, but in this embodiment, the value equivalent to the apex of the shaft speed is 2000th of the maximum speed. 1 second is the reference shirt time,
Therefore, the binary code data corresponding to the shirt time of 1/2000th of a second is input to the NOR5. This data will be shown later, but
10101000'', and therefore, if this data is synchronized with the timing write pulses TBO to TB7, an "L" input will be given to the NOR write gate N0R5 at the timing pulses TB7.TB5.TB3°. In order to realize the configuration, in this embodiment, timing pulses TB3.TB5 are applied to the NOR gate N0R5.
．． Inputting to TB7.

The output data from the exclusive-or gate EX5 of the subtraction circuit 612 having the configuration as described above is as follows.
The data is applied to the input terminals of the shutter speed control registers 614+626, but at this stage, it is unclear whether the data actually corresponds to the control shirt speed and TV.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the shirt timing control register 6
Output bus line 3 to block terminal C of 14+626
- Apply the signal output from the output signal line [phase] of the synchronizing circuit a60 at the same word time when the data TV regarding the shutter speed is placed on the synchronous circuit a60. As a result, the registers 614+626 separate and store the shutter time control data TV from the output of the subtraction circuit 612. Through this operation, the shutter speed control data TV is outputted in parallel from the upper digits to the lower digits from each terminal QO to Q7 of the shutter speed control registers 614+626.
The output corresponds to the integer part, and Q5 to Q7 correspond to the decimal part, respectively.On the other hand, the throttling cutting stage number control register 628 corresponds to the output bus
The clock terminal C of this register receives the line 374 as an input terminal, and the clock terminal C of this register receives the synchronous circuit 660 at the same word time as the output bus line 374 receives the throttling stage number control data A Vs. Since the signal output from the output signal line [phase] is input, the register 62
8 from among the data in the output bus line 374;
The control data AVs for controlling the number of aperture cutting stages is separated and captured and stored. Through this operation, the narrowing cutting stage number control data AVs is outputted in parallel from the output terminals QO-Q7 of the narrowing cutting stage number control register 628 from the upper digits to the lower digits.

As described above, the shutter speed control register 614
The exposure control operation in the mechanical part 358 of this camera system is performed based on the shutter speed control data TV stored in +626 and the aperture stop number control data AVs stored in the aperture step number control register 628. Now, let's take a look at this camera mechanism part 358 and its operation.
Explain about chest of drawers.

This camera system is a shutter release means 396 provided in the mechanism section 9358. Aperture control means 398
．． As mentioned above, the operation is controlled through the three electromagnetic mechanical conversion means called shutter speed control means 400, but the operation of the above-mentioned control means will now be explained.

Most of the mechanical mechanisms of this camera system are no different from traditional camera mechanisms.

The shutter release means 396 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates in conjunction with a trigger mechanism that runs a mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism by energizing the electromagnetic solenoid for a certain period of time. AE lever 9 for presetting the aperture value from the body 4 side.
In addition, the aperture control means 398 operates the mechanical sequence mechanism such as starting the movement of the lens device 20, driving the lens device 20 to close the aperture, flipping up the mirror, and starting the movement of the front curtain of the focal plane shutter. This is an electromagnetic solenoid that urges the clamp mechanism of the AE lever 94 toward the clamp release side when energized, and the AE lever 94 can travel in the unclamped state by energizing the electromagnetic solenoid. It is clamped when the current is turned off. In this configuration, before the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts running, the aperture control means 398 is energized to hold the clamp mechanism of the AE Ij-94 on the clamp release side, and the The AE lever 94, which starts running when the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts running, is kept in a state where it can run. Next, when the AE lever 94 starts traveling according to a mechanical sequence, the amount of travel is detected, and when the amount of travel reaches a predetermined value, the power supply to the throttle control means 398 is stopped. Then, the clamping mechanism of the AE lever 94 is returned to the clamping position to clamp the AE lever 94. As described above, it is possible to preset the aperture value of the lens device 20, and this is as described above.

Further, the shutter speed control means 400 is an electromagnetic solenoid that, when energized, restricts the rear curtain of the focal plane shutter from starting to run. As a result, the shutter rear curtain is placed in a travel restricted state, and as the electricity is stopped, the travel restriction of the shutter rear curtain is released, and the shutter rear curtain starts traveling. In this configuration, at the same time as the mechanical sequence of the camera mechanism starts running, the shutter speed control means 400 is energized to regulate the running of the shutter rear curtain, and after the shutter front curtain runs, time measurement is performed. When the measured time reaches a predetermined value, the power supply to the /Yatta speed control means 400 is stopped (1).
Therefore, the exposure time can be controlled by releasing the travel restriction of the shutter rear curtain and starting the travel of the shutter rear curtain.

Note that when the shutter trailing curtain finishes running, the mechanical sequence mechanism performs a return operation of the mirror, the aperture reduction drive lever 98, and the like.

Note that the shutter release means 396. Throttle control means 398. The shutter speed control means 400 needs to accurately control its operation timing and operation time, and for this purpose, signals for accurate one-sequence control that are obtained according to various conditions are required. For this purpose, a control signal generation circuit 6 is provided in the output control section 364.
It is 46. This control signal generating circuit 646 supplies the shutter release means 396' and the aperture control means 398.
．． A drive control signal is applied to the shutter speed control means 400 for an appropriate time at a timing such that an appropriate exposure control operation is performed, but these control timings or times are determined by the operating time of the self-timer. , the timing at which the AE lever 94 travels through the number of aperture stages stored in the aperture stage number control register 628, and the timing at which the AE lever 94 travels through the number of aperture stages accumulated in the aperture stage number control register 628;
, 626, the timing at which the real time corresponding to the shutter time data accumulated in the shutter speed data 626 passes, the time to compensate for the mechanical delay of the mechanical sequence mechanism, etc.

The output data of the shutter speed control register 626 and the output data of the narrowing stage number control register 628 are as follows.
The data is input to the data selector 632 (1) and selectively given to the down counter 642 based on commands from the control signal generating circuit 646.

On the other hand, the output data of the shutter time control register 614 is sent to the select gate along with the output data of a constant generation circuit 616 provided to generate constant and numerical data corresponding to times for various temporal controls. 618,
The signal is selectively applied to the frequency dividing circuit 620 based on the command from the control signal generating circuit 646.

Note that the down counter 642 receives the pulse signal FPC inputted as the AE lever 94 runs and the output pulse signal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the select gate 640 at its clock terminal. , the data inputted from the data selector 632 is subtracted and counted based on the pulses inputted through the select gate 640, and the carry generated as a result of the subtraction counting is given to the control/signal generation circuit 646. The structure is as follows.

When performing this, the aperture/shrink stage number control data AVs is provided from the aperture/shrink stage number control register 628 to the down counter 642 through the data selector 632. On the other hand, a pulse signal FPC is output to the clock terminal of the down counter 642 via the select gate 640 in accordance with the amount of travel of the AE lever 940.
is input. At this time, the AE lever 94 is running smoothly,
In the down counter 642, the aperture stage number control data AVs is subtracted based on the pulse signal FPC. When a carry is output from the down counter 642° through this operation, this carry indicates that the number of input pulses of the pulse signal FPC matches the narrowing stage number control data AVs, and A
FL/bar 94 (Indicates that the travel position at the time of DSO has reached the preset position corresponding to the number of aperture control stages of the lens device 2. Therefore, the control signal generated by inputting the carry is The means 64 and 6 are the diaphragm control means 39.
8, it is possible to preset the number of aperture reduction steps of the lens device 2 to the same value as the aperture reduction step number control data AVs by clamping the AE lever 94.

In addition, when performing shirt time control now, the data
Through the selector, the Nyatta seconds control register 62
6, the down counter 642 receives decimal fractional data of the shutter speed control data TV. Note that the down counter 642 adds "l" to the decimal data and then takes in this data as data multiplied by eight. On the other hand, the select gate 640 is connected to the pin terminal of the down counter 642.
The output pulse of the frequency dividing circuit 620 is inputted through the circuit. At this time, the frequency divider circuit 620 takes in the integer part data of the shutter speed control data TV from the shutter speed control register 614 through the select clock 618, Since the frequency is divided by the pulse signal of
42 is subtracted based on the output pulse of the frequency divider circuit 620. Through such actions,
When a carry is output from the down collar/return circuit 642, this carry indicates that the output pulse number of the frequency dividing circuit 620 matches the data regarding the shirt timing control data which is less than a decimal number. This indicates that the real time corresponding to the second control data has passed. Therefore, the control 1 signal generating means 646, which receives the carry signal, depends on the shutter speed control means 400 to start running the shutter trailing curtain, so that the shutter speed corresponds to the shutter speed control data frost. It can be controlled in real time.

In addition, to explain the shutter speed control in more detail, the shirt speed control data TVs is 1/8
It is given as data with step precision, and this data is now expressed as TVs=P+'! (18) Set aside. However, P and α are integer values. This data corresponds to the actual exposure time TR4=Y is an extremely complicated circuit, so in this example, 2" 8: 2P(1-+-i)
(20) is coming soon. Therefore, the actual exposure time TR is TR= Y
This is expressed as (21). Note that this formula is TR
−−×2P×(8+α) (22) Since it can be replaced with
Create a frequency-divided pulse, and use this frequency-divided pulse to
By subtracting and counting the data 8+α inputted into the counter 642, the real time TR in seconds can be obtained.

Furthermore, from the constant generation circuit 616, data for specifying the self-second time, data for compensating for delays in mechanical sequence operation and determining the operation time of the shutter release means 396, and Data for generating the two on/off signals described above is output, and both are frequency-divided by the frequency dividing circuit 620 and converted to real time, and then the control signal generating circuit 646. and said shutter release means 396. Throttle control means 398. This is the basis of the output control signal for the shutter speed control means 400.

Next, the detailed operation of this output control section 364 and the detailed circuit configuration for realizing it will be explained.

In the camera system of this embodiment, the control states of the camera device are divided into eight states.

This is because the operation of the camera device is established through various sequences, and the operation of the electrical control circuit must also correspond to such sequences.

This camera system generates signals CCO to CC7 in order to specify the eight control states mentioned above.
The operation of the camera device corresponding to each signal of CO-CC7 will be explained according to FIG. The CCO signal is held in the loop (■) until the shutter release button /18 is pressed. In this state, the photographer can check the display of various data on the digital display 402 in the 7-eye viewr 13 and change the setting data. Note that the state of this CCO signal is maintained as long as the FDSP signal is 1" or the first CALE signal is not output after the power is turned on. The state of the CC2 signal is During the corresponding cycle, the digital display 402 stops displaying various data, but the input control unit 360
Photometric or analog data capture and A
-D conversion and calculations by the central control unit 362 are performed repeatedly, and during this time an LED lamp 32 (described later) blinks to notify the photographer that the self-timer is in operation. The transition from the CCO signal state to the CC2 signal state occurs when the shutter release button 18 is pressed and the SR double signal becomes 1" when the 5ELF signal is 1" ( I). In addition, in the state of CC2@, the 5ELF signal becomes “0” or the EDS
When the P signal becomes “1”, the force increases. The camera device returns from the CC2 signal state to the CCO signal state (n).

The states of the CC3 to CC6 signals are completely shifted in parallel with the shift of the mechanical main sequence of the camera device mechanism section 358, and when the state shifts to the state of CC31'i, the iris control means 398 is no longer energized. started, AE lever 94
The clamp mechanism is biased toward the clamp release side, and the AE lever 94 becomes movable.

By the way, the state of this CC3 signal changes from the state of the CC2 signal when the state of the CC2 signal during self-timer operation ends (■), or when the shutter release button 18 is pressed, the state of the 5ELF signal changes. This can be obtained by directly transitioning from the state of the CCO signal when it is "0".

Note that the state of this C60 signal is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then shifts to the state of the CC1 signal (
Vl).

In the state of the CC1 signal, the shutter/release means 396 of the camera mechanism section 358 is energized to operate the trigger mechanism for starting the mechanical sequence. The state of this CCI signal is also held for a predetermined period of time, and is then shifted to the state of the next CC5 signal (■), but depending on the operation of the trigger mechanism, the mechanical sequence of the camera device starts running. "do.

The state of the CC5 signal is an aperture control cycle,
Depending on the mechanical sequence, ξra-up, A
Operations such as running the E-warever 40 are performed. This CC5
In the state of the signal, the number-of-down-down-stage control data AVs is subtracted and counted based on the pulse signal FP output in accordance with the travel amount of the AE lever 940, and the number of pulses of the pulse signal FPC matches the data AVs. Otherwise, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the state of the CC5 signal changes to the state of the CC4 signal (■). At this time, the aperture control means 398 The energization to is stopped, the AE lever 94 is clamped, and its movement is restricted. That is, this CC5
While the signal is in the state, the diaphragm is reset from the body 4 side of the lens device 2.

Note that the state of the CC5 signal ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed and shifts to the state of the CC4 signal when the number of pulses of the pulse signal FPC does not match the data AVs. This is applied when the aperture preset is manually performed on the lens device 2 side, or when the aperture value AMAX of the minimum aperture is automatically selected.

Note that when the state of the CC5 signal is entered, energization to the shutter speed control means 400 is started in order to restrict the movement of the shutter trailing curtain.

In this state of the CC5 signal, the aperture presetting and the aperture closing operation of the lens device 2 by the aperture drive lever 98 are performed in parallel.

Next, when the CC5 signal shifts to the state i of the CC4 signal, the front shutter curtain starts running as a mechanical sequence progresses. Depending on the start of the movement of this shutter front curtain,
Since the exposure of the film surface does not start immediately, and there is a mechanical delay time, the state of the CC4 signal is set to compensate for this time.

Next, when exposure is started by the start of the shutter front curtain, a CTST signal is input, and depending on the CTST signal, the state of this CC4 signal shifts to the state of the CC6 signal (IK) .

The state of the CC6 signal is a shutter speed control cycle, and after entering the state of the CC6 signal, the shutter speed control data is After a corresponding period of time has elapsed, the state of the CC6 signal shifts to the state of the CC7 signal (X), and in the state of the CC7 signal, the shutter speed control means 400 that was previously in the energized state is energized. is released, the shutter rear curtain starts, and the exposure of the film surface is stopped. Note that after the shutter trailing curtain finishes running, the mechanical sequence performs a quick return of the mirror and aperture drive lever.

By the way, when the BDSP signal is in the "1" state, the switch S that is linked to the shutter and release buttons 18
As long as the signal SR from W2 is "1", the state of the C('6 signal is maintained, and when the SR signal becomes "0", the state of the CC6 signal returns to the state of the CCO signal. (■)0 This function is based on the fact that in the bulb photography mode, the release button 18 is used to directly manually control the shutter speed.

In addition, 1. The state of the CC7 signal is already
Viewfinder 1 displays the data that forms the basis of the exposure control performed.
This is a state in which so-called post display is performed, which can be confirmed in 3. When the state of the CC7 signal is entered, the operation restriction of the digital display 402 is released and various photographic information is displayed, but this photographic information relates to the exposure control that has already been performed. In addition, CC7 with
The signal state changes from the CC6 signal state to the CC7 signal state, and if the signal SR is "1", that is, if the shutter release button 18 continues to be pressed. In the intervening state, when the signal SR becomes "0", it immediately returns to the state of the CCO signal (
XI).

Furthermore, if the signal SR is already "0" at the time of transition from the CC6 signal state to the CC7 signal state, that is, if the shutter e-release button 18 has already been released, the system will After transitioning to the CC7 signal state, it immediately returns to the CCO state.

Furthermore, even if the shutter release button 18 is held down in the CC7 signal state, if the film is wound manually or by the motor drive device described above, the system will not work. The state of the CC7 signal returns to the state of the CCO signal. This is an important function when continuous photographing is performed using a motor drive device by holding the shutter release button 18 in a depressed state.

As described above, in the camera system (C) of this embodiment, the output control section 364 is placed in eight control states of the CCO to CC7 signals.

The /- sense of each signal CC0 to CC7 explained above,
shutter release means 3 in the states of each of the signals;
96. The state of the energizing signal to the electromagnetic lunoid of the aperture control means 398 and the shutter control means 400 is shown at 7-- in FIG.
It is shown in the explanation diagram of the can.

In addition, in FIG. 93, FCI, Fe2. Fe2 is the CC
This signal is the basis for obtaining the O to CC7 signals.

Now, the control signal generation circuit 646 and cc.

~ Before explaining the CC7 signal, we will explain the configuration operations that are the basis for control and the configuration operations for obtaining other temporal control signals based on the aperture control stage number data AVS and the shutter speed control data TV. .

FIG. 94 shows the shutter speed control register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
14. Constant generation circuit 616. Select Goo) 618.
This figure shows the detailed configuration of the frequency divider circuit 620, and in the figure, 618A to 618D are select gates composed of an integrated circuit element CD4019 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG. There are four select gates 618 shown in FIG. 30.

Furthermore, the frequency dividing circuit 620 is an integrated circuit element MCI4536 (
This integrated circuit element MC14536 is a programmer pull timer whose block diagram is shown in FIG. 95. This programmer pull timer is capable of frequency division up to 24 steps in total, and is based on the 4-bit data input from each terminal A, B, C, and D and the signal input from the 8b terminal. , the frequency of the pulse signal inputted from the In terminal is divided and outputted from the Do terminal. In addition, the above A.

The input data from the B, C, and D terminals are used for up to 16 stages of frequency division, and the input to the 8b terminal is for further 8 stages of frequency division when the temperature is 0°.

In FIG. 94, the flip-flop F39 divides the clock pulse and sends its Q output to the I of the frequency divider circuit 620.
This is for inputting to the n terminal. In Jin's embodiment system, a 64 KHz pulse signal is used as the clock pulse, but through this configuration, a 32 KHz on/off pulse is applied to the In terminal of the frequency divider circuit 620. It will be done.

This 32 KHz pulse corresponds to the reference time Y described earlier.
This divider circuit 620 serves as the basis for creating a time of 1/8 of , is configured to output from its DO terminal a pulse signal of 16 kHz1, that is, a pulse signal with a period corresponding to Y, which is 10000 times the reference time □ seconds. That is, this frequency dividing circuit 620 has 16
A KHz pulse signal is frequency-divided based on the input data from input terminals A, B, C, and D and the 8b false end input signal, and then outputted from the O terminal to the signal line O. Note that this frequency dividing circuit 620 includes a reset terminal R, and is reset according to an input signal from a signal line O, which will be described later.

The select controller 618A receives the lower 4 bits of the integer part of the shirt shutter time control data TV from Q1 to Q4 of the shirt shutter time control register 614 to its A1 to A4 terminals, and also inputs the lower 4 bits of the integer part of the shirt shutter time control data TV to its A1 to A4 terminals. Data for obtaining a self-time of 8 seconds, that is, "1010" data is input to the terminal, and a CC6 signal, which will be described later, is input to the Ka terminal.
A CC2 signal, which will be described later, is input to the Kb false end.

That is, the select gate 618A outputs data related to the self-second time from its D1 to D4 terminals during the time of the CC2 signal, and outputs the lower four pits of the integer part of the shutter second time control data TV during the time of the CC6 signal. The D1 to D4
Output from the terminal.

Further, the select gate 618B has fixed data input to its A1 to A4 terminals for specifying the time of the CC3 and CC4 signals, which will be described later, and to the B1 to B4 terminals, as the time of the CC5 signal, which will be described later. Fixed data is input to specify a certain time. Furthermore, this CC3
゜As the time of the CC4 signal, a time of 2m5ec is used, and therefore the A1 to A4 terminals have “011
0” data is input.

Further, as the time of the CC5 signal, the AE lever 94
A time of 30m5ec is used in consideration of zero travel time, etc., and for that reason, the terminals B1 to B4 are set at °101
0"Data is being input.

Note that this select gate 618 B id:, Ka
CC1 through the OR gate OR57 to the terminal.

It receives the CC3 signal input, and the Kb false end receives the CC5 signal input. That is, this select gate 6
18B is 2 m at the time of CCI and CC3 signals.
Data regarding the time of sec is output from the D1 to D4 terminals, and data regarding the time of 30 m5 ec is output from the D1 to D4 terminals at the time of the CC5 signal.

In addition, the select gate 618C has its A1 to A4 terminals receive the D1 to D4 outputs of the select gate 618A, and its B1 to B4 terminals receive the outputs of the select gate 618A.
The D1 to D4 outputs of 18B are input, and the Ka terminal receives the CC2 signal and CC2 signal through the OR gate 0R55.
6 signals are input, and the CCI signal and CC3 signal are input to the Kb false end through OR gates OR56 and OR57.
signal, CC5 signal is input.

That is, this select gate 618C is CC2°CC
At the time of the 6 signal, the D of the select gate 618A is
1 to D4 terminal output from the D1 to D4 terminals,
At the time of the CCI, CC3, and CC5 signals, the D1 to D4 terminal outputs of the select group 618B are
It is output from the D4 terminal.

In addition, the select gate 618D has its A1 to A4 terminals input the D1 to D4 outputs of the select gate 618C, and its B1 to B4 terminals the data for creating the 2Hz signal described above, i.e. , "1101" data is input.

Also, the Ka terminal has OR54゜0R.
CCI through 55, 0R56, 0R57.

CC2, CC3, CC5, and CC6 signals are input, and the Kb false end is connected to the Kb signal through the inverter INV47.
An inverted signal from terminal a is input.

That is, this select gate 618D is CC1°CC
2, CC3, CC5, and CC6, the D1 to D4 terminal outputs of the select gate 618C are outputted from the D1 to D4 terminals, and at other times, that is, CCO and CC4.

At the time of each signal of CC7, data regarding the 2 Hz signal is outputted from its D1 to D4 terminals.

Outputs D1 to D4 of the select gate 618D are input to terminals A to D of the frequency divider circuit 620, respectively.

On the other hand, the output from the QO terminal of the shutter speed control register 614, that is, the most significant bit of the shaft speed control data TV, is output from the NAND signal receiving the CC6 signal.
The signal is input from the AND 29 to the D terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the inverter NV45 and the OR gate 0R53.

Further, the output of the NAND29 is connected to the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the AND91 which inputs the CC2 signal through the inverter INV46.
It is input to the 8b terminal of.

In the configuration as described above, the states of the A-D input and the 8b terminal input of the frequency divider circuit 620 will be explained for each state of the signals CC0-CC7.

During the time of the CCO, CC4, and CC7 signals, the Kb terminal input of the select gate 618D becomes 1", and the 8b terminal input of the frequency divider circuit 620 becomes 1", so the A, Each input terminal of B, C, D and each input of 8b terminal are "1°l"o'l"1",°1" respectively.
.

``1'', therefore, this frequency divider circuit 620 glue.

From the O terminal, a 16 KHz pulse is divided into "1101" steps, that is, a 2 Hz pulse is output.

At the time of the CC2 signal, select gate) 618
B1 to B4 terminal input of A is select gate 618C
, 618D to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency dividing circuit 620, and since the 8b terminal input is "0", the input terminals A, B, C, and D of the frequency dividing circuit 620 and the 8b Each input of the terminal is "0", "1", and "0" respectively.

"1"1. “0”, therefore, this frequency dividing circuit 620
From the DO゛ terminal to the signal line 0, the pulse output is a 16KHz pulse divided by "1010" steps plus 8 steps,
That is, a pulse output with a period of 16 seconds is performed.

Note that this 16-second period pulse is used as the end of the self-timer time at the time when this pulse first rises from °0" to °1", that is, when 8 seconds have passed after the start of frequency division. ing.

Next, at the time of the CC3 and CC1 signals, the A1 to A4 terminal inputs of the select gate 618B are input to the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the select gate &'18C, 618D.
is input to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency divider circuit 620.
Since the 8b terminal input of the is '1', the A of the frequency divider circuit 620 is
,B,C.

Each input terminal of D and each input of terminal 8b are 0°,
°1", "1", '0", 1", so from the DO terminal of this frequency divider circuit 620 to the signal line O, 16
Pulse output obtained by dividing KHz pulse by °0110° steps,
In other words, a pulse output with a cycle of 4 m5 ec is performed.

Note that this pulse with a period of 4m5ec is determined at the time when this pulse first rises from "0" to "work", that is, after the start of frequency division.
The time when 2 m crowns have elapsed is used as the end time of the CC3 or CC1 signal.

At the time of the CC5 signal, the select gate 618
The B1-B4 terminal input of B is the select gate 618C
, 618D to the A, B, C, and D terminals of the frequency dividing circuit 620, and the 8b terminal input of the frequency dividing circuit 620 is
1", the input terminals A, B, C, D and the 8b terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 are respectively 0".

"1", °O", "1", "l". Therefore, from the DO terminal of this frequency divider circuit 620 to the signal line @, a pulse output obtained by dividing the 16KHz pulse by "1010" steps, In other words, a pulse with a period of 64 m sec is output.Note that this pulse with a period of 64 m 5 sec occurs at the time when this pulse first rises from ``O'' to ``1 degree''.
In other words, after 32m5ec has passed after the start of frequency division, CC
This is used as the end point of the 5 signal.

At the time of the CC6 signal, the select gate 618
The lower 4 bits of the integer part of the terminals Al to A4 of A, that is, the /Yatsuta second control data TV, are input to the select gate 61.
．． A, B of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through 8C, 618D,
C and D terminals, and when the most significant bit of the integer part of the shutter time control data TV is "O", the input to the 8b terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 becomes "1", and the shutter time control data TV becomes "1". When the upper pit of the integer part of the tense data TV is 1", the input to the D terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 is 1", and the input to the 8b terminal is 0.

Therefore, from the DO terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620, 1 is connected to the signal line O.
Y×2 of the formula (b) obtained by dividing the 6 KHz pulse signal based on the shutter time control data TV.
A pulse signal corresponding to p is output.

In addition, the pulse signal with is later used to count down the data corresponding to 1 and 8+α of the above set,
It is detected that the actual time in shutter seconds has elapsed after the front shutter curtain started running at the time when this down/force/runt was completed.

FIG. 96 shows the shutter speed control register 6 shown in FIG. 30.
26. Refinement stage number control register 28° data selector 632. The detailed configuration of the down counter 642° select gate 640 is shown, and the middle data selector 632 in the same figure uses two integrated circuit elements CD4019 in parallel, the detailed logic diagram of which is shown in FIG. The QO to Q7 terminal outputs of the narrow-down control register 628 are input to its B7 to BO terminals, and the shutter speed control register 626
Q5 to Q7 terminal output, that is, the shutter speed control data T
Two people input the 3 bits below the decimal point of Vs to the A2 to AO terminals. In addition, this data selector 632
The °1" signal is input to the A3 terminal, and the A4~
A7 terminal is grounded. That is, this data selector 632 receives input of 8+α data as shown in the above formula □□□ at the AO to A3 terminals, and also receives input from the B
This is because the narrowing stage number ti control data AVs is input to the O-87 terminal. Moreover, this data selector 632 has the CC4 signal inputted to its Ka terminal and the CO3 signal inputted to its Kb false terminal.Therefore, during the time of CC3, this data selector 632 inputs the input signal from its DO to D7 terminals. The data selector 632 outputs the narrowing down stage number control data AVa, and in one hour of CC4, the data selector 632 outputs a set of 8+α data from its DO to D7 terminals.

The DO~D7 outputs of this data selector 632 are input to JO~J7 of the down counter 642, and the PR
When the CO3 signal or CC4 signal is input to the E terminal via the OR59, the down counter 642 outputs the Do-D7 signal of the data selector 632.
Captures and stores the output data of the terminal.

Incidentally, this down counter 642Fi is a down counter constructed using two integrated circuit elements CD4029, the detailed logic diagram of which is shown in FIG. , the data input and stored from the JO to J7 terminals are subtracted and counted, and if a carry (borrow) occurs as a result, a signal indicating this is output from the CO2 terminal. This CO terminal output signal is normally '1' and becomes '0° when a carry occurs, and this signal is input to the D terminal of the clip 70 tube F40 synchronized with the clock pulse CP. Therefore,
When the down counter 642 completes the subtraction count, a signal synchronized with the clock pulse CP is output from the Q terminal of the flip-70 ring F4Q as a signal m@ to indicate this fact.

On the other hand, this down counter 642 receives the FP multiplication signal input at its clock terminal CLK through NAND gates NAND31 and NAND29 at the time of the CC-5 signal, and also receives the FP multiplication signal input through the NAND gates NAND31 and NAND30 at the time of CC6. It receives the signal input from the Do terminal output of 620, that is, the signal line 0. Therefore, the operation of this down counter 642 will be explained based on the sequence shown in FIG. 93.

This down counter 642 converts the output data of the refinement stage number control register 628 into the data at the time of the CO3 signal.
The data is taken in from the JO to J7 terminals through the selector 632 and stored. Next, when moving to the CC5 signal time,
NAND Game) NAND30. F through NAND31
The Pc signal is input, and the aperture stage number control data AVs stored during the time of the CO3 signal is counted down according to the FPC signal, and as a result, when the subtraction count is completed, the CO2 terminal output signal ゛ changes from °1'' to ``0''. Move to ゛°. At this point, the AE lever 94 has moved to a position where it presets the amount of aperture corresponding to the number of aperture control data Av8. Needless to say, the amount of travel at this time is determined by taking into account the mechanical delay time until the AE lever 94 is clamped by the aperture control means 398, and an appropriate amount of compensation is added. At this time, the fact that the CO2 terminal output signal became “0” means that
A signal is output from the Q output terminal of the flip-flop F40 to the signal line O in synchronization with the clock pulse CP to indicate that the AE lever 94 has moved to the position corresponding to the aperture stage number control data AVs. is to be done.

In addition, this down counter 642 outputs data from terminals Q5 to Q7 of the shutter speed control register 626, that is, the data below the decimal point of the shutter speed control data TVs, as well as the lowest pit of the integer part at the time of the CC4 signal. The data with "1" set in the corresponding bit is effectively converted into integer data, that is, multiplied by 8 to become 8+α data.
The data is taken in from the JO to J3 terminals through the selector 632 and stored. Next, when moving to the time of the CC5 signal, the frequency divider circuit 620 is connected from the signal line 0 through the NAND gates NAND30 and NAND31.

The terminal output is input to the clock terminal CLK, and at the time of CC6, the signal line O receives the reference time Y multiplied by 16 KHz, as explained earlier.
A pulse signal with a pulse period Y x 2p, which is obtained by dividing the pulse signal of /Yatta second time control data TVs, is being output.
α is counted down in accordance with the pulse signal having a period of Y×2p, and as a result, when the subtraction count is completed, the cozm output signal shifts from “0” to “0”. At this point, after entering CC6 time, Y×2p×(
8+α). Therefore, an approximate real time corresponding to the shutter time control data T Vs (-P + s) K was obtained. At this time, CO
The flip-flop F40 detects that the two-terminal output signal has become 0°, and from its Q output terminal to the signal line O, the shutter time control data TVs is transmitted from the Q output terminal to the signal line O after entering the state of the CC6 signal. A signal is output in synchronization with the clock pulse CP to indicate that the real time corresponding to CP has elapsed.

FIG. 97 shows a detailed circuit diagram of the control signal generation circuit 646, which constitutes a logic circuit for obtaining the control signals CC0-CC7 mentioned above.

In addition, what is indicated by 990 in the figure is an integrated circuit element CD4 whose detailed logic diagram is shown in FIG.
A decoder consisting of flip-flops F32.028 and flip-flops F32. PCl which is each Q output of F33°F34
, FC2, FC3 are decoded and output as signals CCO to CC7. In addition, the above FC1, FC
Each signal of 2° FC3 is in a state as shown in FIG. It is output from the Q output terminals of F1a and F34. These flip-flops F
32. F33. F34 is all clock pulse CP
is synchronized with.

Now, the cent condition of flip-flop F32 is 5FC.
I. Set the reset conditions to RFe5. Set conditions for flip 70-tube F, 33 to 5FC2° and reset conditions to RFe5. 5 setting conditions for Flip Frog F34
FC3, reset condition RFe5. All flips mentioned above
70 knob F32°F1a, F34 direct reset (placed as FDR).

The fact that the FDH condition is satisfied means that the flip-flop F32. F33. F34 is clock pulse CP
Therefore, the decoder 990 outputs 1" as the CC6 signal. In other words, the system
It will be placed or returned to the state of the CO signal.

The conditions for this FDH are the power up clear signal PU
C is input, the state of the CC2 signal, that is, the EDSP signal becomes °1" while the self-timer is operating, or the film winding is not completed and the WNUP signal is "0", and C, when the C7 signal is not in the state, or when the C
This is established when the winding is completed in the state of the C7 signal, the WNUP signal becomes "1", and the time corresponding to 2 Hz has elapsed.

By the way, CC7 signal is 1", WNUP signal is "1",
When the 2Hz signal is 1", F'DR is established when the shutter release button 18 is kept pressed, the film winding is completed, and the next calculation result is not displayed. This is because it enters the next control state after some time has elapsed until it is loaded into the register of the motor.
Using the drive device, release the shutter release button 1.
This is an important condition for continuous shooting while holding down 8.

Note that the AND gate AND85. is involved in satisfying the above FDH condition. AND86゜AND87, OR gate 0R47, 0R48゜0R49, Invar 1
! INV42T: Yes.

The fact that the conditions for the CC2 signal are satisfied means that the clip 70 tube F33 is placed in the set state, and the clip flop F32. This means that F34 is placed in the reset state, and for that purpose, the condition 5FC2 needs to be satisfied.

That is, in order to create the state of the CC2 signal, the EDSP signal must be in the state of the CCO signal, the FDH condition is not satisfied, and the signal from the signal line @ is "1", i.e. , when the calculation in the central control unit 362 has been completed and the signal from the signal line O is °l°, that is, data is transferred from the central control unit 362 to the output control unit 364. Shutter when not released: Release button 1
It is necessary that the condition of 5FC2 is satisfied by being satisfied when 8 is pressed and the SR signal becomes 1.

Note that if the 5ELF signal is "0" at this time, the 5FCI condition also holds true, so the system
The state of the CO signal shifts to the state of the CO2 signal without passing through the state of the CC2 signal.

Note that when the CC2 signal is in the state, if the 5ECF signal becomes 0'' and the SR signal becomes 0°, the self-timer shooting is canceled and the RFC2 condition is met, and the system switches to CCO. It will return to the state of.

On the other hand, when the CC2 signal is in the state, the signal on the signal line [phase] is not "1", that is, the DO terminal of the frequency dividing circuit 620 outputs "1", and the signal on the signal line @ is 1. ``, the 5FC10 condition is satisfied, and the system shifts to the CO2 signal state.

The state of the CO2 signal shifts to the state of the CC1 signal when the signal on the signal line [phase] reaches l°, that is, at 2 m.
1. When 5 ets have passed. This is when the RFC20 conditions are satisfied.

The transition from the CCI signal state to the CC5 signal state occurs when the signal on the signal line [phase] becomes 1", that is, at 2m.
When 5ec has elapsed, the SFC30 condition is satisfied due to f.

The transition from the CC5 signal state to the CC4 signal state occurs when the MDSP signal is "0" and the signal on the signal line [phase] is "1".
”, that is, when the AE lever 94 has traveled an amount corresponding to the aperture step number control data AVs, or when the signal on the signal line ■ becomes 1”, that is, 30m5.
This is when the RPCI condition is satisfied when ec has elapsed.

The transition from the CC4 signal state to the CC6 signal state occurs when the front shutter curtain starts running and the CTST signal becomes "1".
This is when the 5FC20 condition is satisfied.

The transition from the CC6 signal state to the CC7 signal state occurs when the BDSP signal is '0' and the output of the signal line [phase] is °1.
”, that is, when the measurement of real time corresponding to the shutter time control data TVs is completed, the SF
This is when the CI condition is met.

Note that when the CC6 signal is in the state, the BDSP signal is 1"
and the SR signal becomes "0°," RFC2 and R
Conditions F and C4 are satisfied, and the system returns to the CCO signal state.

Further, when the SR signal becomes "0" in the state of the CC7 signal, the conditions of RFCI, RFC2, and RFC4 are satisfied, and the system returns to the state of the C'-0 signal.

In addition, the ones likely to be involved in 5FCI are and
G AND79. AND80. AND87゜NAND gate NAND5. NAND6. NAND7, N
AND16. NAND23. Inverter INV36,
INV37. INV38. INV39, flip
This is a logical configuration based on the flop F35.

Also involved in RFCI is ANDGATE A
ND81. AND90. Nando Goo) NAND8.
NAND9. NANDlo, NANDll, NA
ND19, IA/Z-IINV44. Free 0R51,0
The logical configuration is based on R52.

The person involved in 5FC2 is Nando Goo.
NAND 1 7, NAND 1 8
, NAND24, Flip-70 Tube F30. F3
1. This is a logical configuration based on the inverter INV48.

Nando Gou is also involved in RFC2.
G NAND 1 2. NAND 1 4.
NAND20, NAND8. NAND9, flip
Flop F36, AND gate AND81. AND8
8. OR gate 0R50, inverter INV37.

INV38. This is a logical configuration based on INV44.

Also, NAND Gate NA is involved in 5FC3.
ND13. AND gate AND89° OR gate 0
R51, inverter INV43° flip-flop F
It is 37.

Also involved in RFC3 is NAND Gate N
AND9, NAND14, NAND21.

This is a logic circuit based on an inverter INV37.

Note that the control signal generating circuit 646 provides a direct reset signal to the direct reset terminal R of the frequency dividing circuit 620 through the signal line (2).

The condition for "1 degree output" to be made to this signal line O is that when the SR signal becomes "O" in the state of the CC7 signal, 'S
F CI conditions, 5FC20 conditions.

The contents of the frequency divider circuit 620 are all cleared by this direct reset signal during 1 bit of the first clock pulse CP after the conditions RFC2 and 5FC3 are satisfied. It is something that will be done.

Note that the NAND gate NAND9°NAND22.N is involved in outputting °1” to this signal line O.
AND25. NAND26°NAND27. NAND2
8. Inverter INV37, INV40. This is a logical configuration composed of a first gate 0R50.

Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, energization signals are given to the shutter release means 396, the aperture control means 398, and the shutter speed control means 400, respectively. , the energization signal is given to the aperture control means 398 at the time of the CC1 signal, and the energization signal is given to the aperture control means 398 at the time of the CC3, CCI, and CC5 signals, and the shutter speed control means 400
An energizing signal is given to the terminals at times CC5, CC4° and CC6.

In order to realize such an operation, the CCI signal is directly applied to the /YASOTA release means 396, and the CCI signal is applied directly to the aperture control means 398.
via the PCI signal and CC7 signal converter IN.
An inverted signal based on V41 is applied to the shutter speed control means 400 via an AND gate 82.
FC3C3b is a circle to which the output signal of the inverter INV41 is applied.

Further, from this control signal generation circuit 646, a direct reset signal is applied to the direct reset terminal R of the flip-flop F23 shown in the figure 82 via the signal line .

This is to prohibit new calculation data from being input from the central control section 36'2 to the output control section 364 during the exposure control operation, and the AND gate AND84 via flip-flop F32. F
This signal becomes "1" when the AND condition of each of the 34 Q outputs is satisfied.

Furthermore, to explain, the control signal generation circuit 646 sends a signal to the drive circuit 404 in order to blink the LED display 32 to indicate that the self-timer is in operation and to indicate that the power supply is normal. A control signal is issued, but
The configuration of the drive control circuit for this LED display 3°2 is shown in the 98th section.
As shown in the figure.

In the figure, 800 is a 15-stage frequency divider circuit, which divides the 64 kHz clock pulse CP by 15 stages to generate a 2 Hz one-on/off signal. This 2
The Hz signal is provided to an AND gate AND100.

Further, 808 is a battery check circuit, which is configured to output a "1" signal when the battery has sufficient remaining capacity during battery check.

The output of the battery check circuit 808 is connected to the CC
The output signal of the AND gate AND100 is applied to the LED driving circuit 404.

In such a configuration, a CC whose self-timer is in operation
When the 2 signal is 1" or when the remaining battery power is sufficient as a result of the battery check, a 2Hz on/off signal is given to the LED drive circuit 404,
Therefore, the L E'D indicator 32 blinks.

The configuration of the camera system of this embodiment is as described above, although the explanation is insufficient.

The comparison table in FIG. 99 shows how each data is used in calculations. Here, the subject brightness BV
, film sensitivity SV, shutter speed TV, aperture value AV,
Open-air school AV.

1 for each apex series of minimum diameter aperture value AMAX, exposure amount EV, and aperture value set from the strobe side.
/ Compatible with 8-pit binary code with 8-stage precision,
Also, it is the same as the converted digital value for analog data when AD conversion is performed in the input control section.

It corresponds to an 8-bit binary code for the degree of stacking.

The curvature t difference ROM 528 shown in FIG. 37 outputs binary code data of the curvature error AVc as shown in FIG. 100 for a given open aperture value AVo.

In addition, the aperture position display decoder ROM 7 shown in FIG.
02. Shutter speed display decoder ROM704. FIG. 101 shows a comparison table of each manual binary code and display data of the symbol display decoder ROM 706.

In the system of this embodiment, the data is
The calculation routines shown in FIG. 70 are all based on binary data as shown in the comparison tables of FIGS. 0 and 101.

Therefore, in this specification, the portions that have not been sufficiently explained or the arithmetic circuit shown in the block diagram shown in FIG.
Regarding the operations to be performed according to the operation instructions shown in FIG. 69, each operation routine shown in FIG.
Figure 99.

I believe that those skilled in the art can easily infer this by comparing all the other drawings in addition to FIGS. 100 and 101.

With the above configuration, according to the present invention, the store aMfi
Not only can it prevent slit-like exposure caused by forgetting to set the J-tone shutter speed, but it can also properly expose objects in backlit conditions just by adding a simple circuit! be.

6tAE of a camera device to which a camera system according to an embodiment of the present invention is applied.

Hall 211 Company 1I! Indicator device 2 and Mf
A, A perspective view for explaining the case where 4 is -am.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state 11 in which some aperture value is preset on the YZ device 2 side manufactured by the 311th company.

411 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of each lever in a state where no aperture value is preset in the lens device 2;

FIG. 5 is a three-sided view showing an example of a strobe that is applied to the camera system of this embodiment.

FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an external photometer applied to the camera system of this embodiment.

FIG. 7 is a perspective view of an incident light type exposure meter applied to the camera system of this embodiment.

FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of a motor drive device applied to the camera system of this embodiment.

No. 9 is an explanatory diagram of finder information when looking through the finder window 13 of the camera device.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of finder information shown in FIG.

Figure 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the photographing mode during strobe photography.

FIG. 11(B) is a logical explanatory diagram showing the relationship between each photographing mode of the camera.

FIG. 12 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting digital data regarding film sensitivity from the ASA sensitivity setting dial 40.

FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the states of timing pulses TBI to TB6.

FIG. 14 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting information regarding the open aperture value of the lens device 2, the state of the aperture ring, and the aperture drive lever.

Figure 15 is a comparison diagram of binary code and gray code.

FIG. 16 is a principle diagram of a conversion circuit from Gray code to binary code.

FIG. 17 is a logical explanatory diagram for explaining the operation of the flip-flop shown in FIG. 16.

FIG. 18 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting data set using the dial 34 and the state of the mode changeover switch 38.

FIG. 19 is a specific configuration diagram for inputting the minimum aperture value of the lens device 2.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the input timing of various data and information.

Figure 21: Figure 1K22 is a concrete configuration diagram for inputting the states of various switches.

FIG. 23 is a specific configuration diagram for detecting and inputting the traveling distance of the AE lever 94.

FIG. 24 is a schematic block diagram of a strobe photography device.

FIG. 25 is a schematic block diagram of an external photometer.

FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram of an incident light type exposure meter.

Figures ±7 are schematic block diagrams of the camera 2 system of the Voice 3 embodiment.

Is Figure 28 the camera shown in Figure 27? - A schematic configuration diagram showing the functional configuration of the mechanical part of the system.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between each photographing mode based on TTL photometry and external photometry and the calculation routines corresponding thereto.

□Figure 30 is a schematic block diagram of the mlJ control circuit of the camera system of this embodiment.

FIG. 31 is a circuit configuration diagram of a clock pulse CP generation circuit.

FIG. 32 is a time chart showing the output pulse waveform of the system pulse generator.

FIG. 33 is a specific configuration diagram of the system pulse generator.

FIG. 34 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4029.

FIG. 35 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4028.

FIG. 36 is a detailed circuit diagram of the set circuit 520'.

FIG. 37 is a detailed circuit diagram of the gray binary converter.

FIG. 38 is a detailed circuit diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4035.

FIG. 39 is a logical configuration diagram of the transmission gate shown in FIG. 38.

FIG. 40 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element CD4042.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14539.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14539.

Figure 43 shows an integrated circuit element, MC145390 logic.
diagram.

FIG. 44 is a specific circuit configuration diagram of a signal separation circuit and a doubling circuit.

FIG. 45 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the condition signal storage circuit.

FIG. 46 is a timing chart for explaining detection of a pulp signal.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of FiCU and AO multiplication signal logic.

FIG. 48 is a detailed block diagram of the input control section.

FIG. 49 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device MC14520.

FIG. 50 shows one logic diagram of the counter shown in FIG. 49.

FIG. 51 shows a counter 558 and a flip-flop 560.5 based on the integrated circuit device MC14520 shown in FIG.
62 configuration diagram.

FIG. 52 is a configuration diagram of a buffer register 564 based on a combination of integrated circuit elements CD40350.

FIG. 53 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14512.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14512 shown in FIG. 53.

FIG. 55 is a time chart for explaining the operation of the input side w section.

FIGS. 56 and 57 are time charts for explaining the state of A-to-back conversion in the input control section.

FIG. 58 is a logic configuration diagram of input bus selector 578.

FIG. 59 shows flip-flops F18 and F1 shown in FIG.
Time meeting chart explaining the operation of 9.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram of the condition register 574.

FIG. 61 is a circuit configuration diagram when the circuit shown in FIG. 60 is specifically implemented using an integrated circuit element.

FIG. 62 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4 (115).

FIG. 63 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of a signal switching circuit and a D register.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4021.

FIG. 65 is a block diagram of the control system and logic circuit 598 of the instruction ROM 504.

FIG. 66 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4.019.

FIG. 67 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit element CD4024.

FIG. 68 is a block diagram of the instruction ROM 504.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the output code of the instruction ROM 504.

FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a comparison between addresses of the instruction ROM 504, instructions, and operand codes.

FIG. 71 is a configuration diagram of an output logic circuit of address decoder 60-0.

FIG. 72 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit element MCI4514.

FIG. 73 is a logic diagram of the integrated circuit element MC14514.

FIG. 74 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 598.

FIG. 75 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the circuit shown in FIG. 30 for taking in the data selector 502, the fixed tenter ROM 534, and the maximum aperture value AMAX of the photographic lens device 2 used.

FIG. 76 is a block diagram of the integrated circuit device cD4613.

FIG. 77 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 592.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram of multiplexer 594.

FIG. 79 is a logic diagram of the arithmetic circuit 500.

FIG. 80 is a logic diagram of logic circuit 596.

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of signals and data on bus lines, input bus lines, and output bus lines.

FIG. 82 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the synchronization circuit 660.

FIG. 83 is an output timing chart of the asynchronous circuit shown in FIG. 82.

FIG. 84 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram including the demultiplexer 610 and the output control register 622.

FIG. 85 is a detailed logic configuration diagram of a data acquisition circuit for display.

FIG. 86 is a block diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032. .

FIG. 87 is a logic diagram of integrated circuit device CD4032.

M8.8 is an operation timing chart of the circuit shown in No. 85.

FIG. 89 is a detailed block diagram of II'i display control circuit 624.

FIG. 90 is a plan view of the digital display 402.

Figure 91 is a detailed logic diagram for capturing data for control.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart for explaining the operation of the output control section.

FIG. 93 is a sequence explanatory diagram based on the chart 70- of FIG. 91.

FIG. 94 shows seven seconds control register 614, constant generation circuit 616. Select Goo) 618° frequency divider circuit 620
Detailed configuration diagram.

FIG. 95 is a block diagram of integrated circuit element MC14536.

FIG. 96 shows a shutter speed control register 6261, a stop-down stage number control register 628. Data selector 632. Down counter 642. Detailed configuration diagram of Select Goo) 6'40.

FIG. 97 is a detailed circuit configuration diagram of the control signal generation circuit 646.

M98 Figure 1/1 Circuit configuration diagram of a drive control circuit for an LED display.

FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating the comparison between data and a semi-decimal code.

FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a comparison between the input aperture value of the bending error ROM 528 and the binary code of the output aperture error.

FIG. 101 shows an aperture value display decoder ROM 702.

Shutter speed display decoder ROM704. Each input binary code of the symbol display decoder ROM 706 Applicant: Canon Corporation ((L) (b) (Cnt4a t4!Z /44 Figure 11 (B)
Ihitashi Priority 66 Fig. 76 4 tatami cut horizontal - To jd 4 Fig. % 52 ku beak 5 Otsu θ Iko Fig. 61 Kanchi Otsu? Record number 83■

Claims (1)

[Claims] A first signal generation circuit that receives a fully automatic mode signal and a semi-automatic mode signal from an automatic light control strobe and generates a fully automatic mode signal and a semi-automatic mode signal according to each signal, and a fully automatic mode signal from the signal generating circuit. It is equipped with a second signal generation circuit that generates a signal indicating the strobe synchronization shutter speed in response to the signal, and a second signal generation circuit that generates a signal corresponding to the manually set shutter speed in response to the semi-automatic mode signal. Il that! A camera speed selection circuit characterized by: